Unit2 news media(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)（精选20篇）由网友“天降喜宝”投稿提供，以下是小编帮大家整理后的Unit2 news media(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)，仅供参考，希望能够帮助到大家。
篇1：高二英语Unit2 news media 知识点总复习教案(人教版高二英语教案教学设计)
Section I 课前准备、听力、口语
1. Which of the news media above is the most reliable? 以上的新闻媒体中哪一种最可靠? (p.9 Warming Up Ex. 1)
reliable adj. 可信赖的；可依靠的；确定的 ① They are reliable friends. 他们是可信赖的朋友。② Is this product reliable? 这种产品的质量可靠吗? ③ Is the source of the information reliable? 那个消息的来源可靠吗?
【链接】 reliably adv. 可靠地；确实地 / reliability n. 可靠性；可信赖性 / rely vi. 依赖，依靠 (与on连用，相当于depend on) ① We can't rely on her for help. 我们不可指望她的帮助。② I rely on her to pay back the money. = I rely on her paying back the money. 我相信她会还钱。③ You may rely on it that he will come to meet you. 你放心好了，他会来接你的。
2. How do you know whether what you hear, see or read is true? 你怎么知道你听见、看见或读到的东西是不是真的? (p.9 Warming Up Ex. 3)
whether引起宾语从句，作know的宾语，what引起主语从句，作宾语从句的主语。
【辨析】what；which
(1) what相当于all that，the thing(s)that，the place that，the person that等，表示从不定数目或不定数量的事物中做出选择。(2) which表示从已知的、确定的范围中做出选择。(3) which可引导从句，而what则不可。① What shoes are you going to wear? 你要穿什么鞋? ② Which shoes shall I wear, the red ones or the brown ones? 我该穿哪双鞋，是红色的还是棕色的? ③ What train are you going by? (说话人只是询问火车的时间，而对可乘的火车没有任何概念) 你要乘几点的火车? ④ Which train are you going by? (说话人脑海里有几趟可乘的火车) 你要乘哪趟火车?
【注意】以下句子中常用what。① What season do you like best? 你最喜欢什么季节? ② What day of the week is today? 今天星期几?
3. The man was fired. 那人被开除了。(p.10 Listening 1)
fire的动词用法
(1) 解雇，开除 (=dismiss, 反义词: employ, take on)
The company fired him for not coming to work on time. 那公司因他不按时来上班而解雇了他。
(2) 点燃，燃烧 It is difficult to fire wet twigs. 湿的小树枝很难点燃。
(3) (以……为目标)发射(枪、弹等) He fired his gun at the big snake. 他开枪打那条大蛇。
(4) 激发(人、感情等)，使充满热情 The story fired his imagination. 这故事激发了他的想像力。
4. The man faced difficulties. 此人面对困难。(p.10 Listening 2)
1) face 的动词用法 (1) vt. & vi. 面对，面向 ① The building faces the park. 那座建筑物面对着公园。② -- How does this house face? -- It faces (to) the east. - 这房子面朝哪边? - 朝东边。(2) vt. 面临(困难等)，应付，面对；(危险、困难等)迫近① We must face our trouble and bear it. 我们必须正视我们的困难并勇于承受。② Such was the situation we were facing. 这就是我们面临的局势。③ Sooner or later he'll have to face being on his own. 迟早他将不得不面对只靠自己的局面。④ The difficulty that faces us today is one of supplying food to those in need. 我们今天面临的困难就是向急需的人提供食品。
【短语】be faced with 面临，面对 / face up to 面对；承担 / face the music 接受 (不愉快的后果或情况) ① I was faced with a new problem. 我面临一个新问题。② She couldn't face up to the fact that she was no longer young. 她无法面对自己不再年轻的事实。③ The boy was caught cheating in the examination and had to face the music. 那个男孩被发现考试作弊，不得不接受处罚。
2) difficulty表示“难，困难”时用作不可数名词，表示“难题，难事”时用作可数名词。如: ① I had great difficulty (in) doing the work. 我做那件工作感到很吃力。② She learned to speak French without difficulty. 她毫无困难地学会了讲法语。③ We will face many difficulties in the future. 将来我们要面临许多难题。
5. The man was generous. 此人很慷慨。(p.10 Listening 7)
generous adj. 慷慨的；大方的；宽容的；豁达的；丰富的，丰盛的 ① Your uncle is very generous to buy you that car for your birthday. 你叔叔真慷慨，买那部汽车祝贺你的生日。② He is generous with his money. 他出手大
方。③ It was very generous of you to forgive her. 你能原谅她实在是够宽容的。④ He gave me a generous lunch. 他请我吃了一顿丰盛的午餐。⑤ There will be a generous harvest this year. 今年会有大丰收。
【链接】generously adv. 慷慨地; generosity n. 慷慨大方
6. Below is a list of ten things that happened today. 以下列出了今天发生的十件事。(p.10 Speaking 第1行)
本句为倒装句，正常语序应为：A list of ten things...is below. below 看作副词，表示方位。当表示方位的状语或表语位于句首时，句子采用全部倒装的结构，即把谓语动词的所有组成部分都移到主语之前这类作状语或表语的词常见的有：away，down，in，off，out，over，up，above，below，here，there 及介词短语与分词。如：① To the list may be added the following names. 在这个名单上还可以添上下列人员。② Here is a seat for you. 这儿有你的一个座位。③ There goes the bell! 铃响了。④ The door opened and in came Mr. Smith. 门开了，史密斯先生走了进来。⑤ Away ran the prisoner. 这犯人跑了。⑥ In the front of the lecture hall sits a professor. 报告厅的前面坐着一位教授。⑦ Written on the blackboard are the names of those who were late yesterday. 黑板上写着昨天迟到的人的名字。⑧ Sitting in the front are the leaders of our school. 前面就坐的是我们学校的领导。
【注意】如果作主语的是人称代词，则不用倒装。如：① In he came and the lesson began. 他走进来开始上课。② Here he comes. 他来了。
7. Food prices are going up. 食品价格在上涨。(p.10 Speaking)
go up 此处相当于rise，increase，意为“上升，增长，提高”。如: ① The temperature has gone up. 温度上升了。② The goods have gone up in quality, but have not gone up in price. 这些货物的质量提高了，可是价格没提。
【拓展】go up 还可意为“上升，攀登；向(河的等)上游而去，沿(街)而去；响起，被听见；被炸毁”。如: ① The lift went up to the fourth floor. 电梯升到了四楼。② There is a path going up to the mountain top. 有条小路通到山顶。③ The boat was going up the river. 船正在河上逆流而上。④ The children were going up the street. 孩子们正沿着街走去。⑤ A cheer went up in the hall. 大厅里响起一阵欢呼声。⑥ The enemy gas tank received a direct hit and went up in a huge explosion. 敌人的汽油库遭到直接命中，在剧烈的爆炸声中被毁掉。
8. Two men robbed a bank in Shanghai. 两个人抢劫了上海的一家银行。(p.10 Speaking)
rob 意为“抢，抢劫”，用于如下结构: rob sb. / a place (of sth.) 从某人／某地抢走 (某物) ① They robbed her of all her money. 他们抢走了她所有的钱。② She was robbed of her necklace. 她的项链被抢走了。③ Thieves robbed the bank of thousands of dollars. 小偷们抢了银行数千美元。
【辨析】rob；steal；pick
rob用于rob sb. / a place of sth. 的结构。 steal用于steal sth. (偷某物)。 pick用于pick one's pocket(掏腰包)的固定搭配。
【提示】rob sb. / a place of sth. 在变为被动结构时，只能说：Sb. / A place is robbed of sth.，不能说：Sth. is robbed。
9. A house in your town burned down. Nobody was injured. 你所在的城镇里有一所房子烧毁了。没有人受伤。(p.10 Speaking)
burn down意为“烧毁；使烧毁”。如: ① The woodshed was burnt down in half an hour. 半个小时小木屋就烧毁了。② These houses were burnt down (to the ground)by the enemy. 这些房子被敌人烧毁了。
【拓展】burn down 也可表示“由于燃料烧尽而火力渐弱”。The fire is burning down，get some more coal please. 火力在减弱，请再拿些煤来。
【比较】burn up 意为“烧尽，烧光”“(火，炉等)烧起
来，旺起来”。如: ① He threw the letter into the stove and it burnt up in a few seconds. 他把信丢进炉子，几秒钟时间信就烧掉了。② Put some wood on the fire and make it
burn up. 添些木柴把火烧旺。
【提示】burn down 强调破坏性，burn up 强调动作的
结果。
【辨析】injure；wound；hurt；harm；destroy；damage
(1) injure指意外伤害或事故造成的伤害，有危及功能和发展之意。Several children were injured in the accident.好几个孩子在那次事故中受伤。
(2) wound一般指刀伤、枪伤、战场上受伤，也可指对感情的伤害。① He got wounded in the battle. 他在战斗中受伤。② Her words wounded him badly. 她的话严重伤害了他。
(3) hurt指精神或肉体上的“创伤，伤害”，作不及物动词时，意为“疼”，其过去分词不能作定语。① His words hurt me / my feelings. 他的话伤了我／我的感情。② He fell and hurt his leg. 他掉下来伤了腿。③ My shoes are s0 tight that my feet hurt. 鞋太紧，我的脚疼。
(4) harm一般指伤害有生命的东西，常指伤及一个人的健康、权利、事业等。① Smoking seriously harmed his health. 吸烟严重损害了他的健康。② They had their hearing harmed by the loud noise of machines. 他们的听力被机器的巨大噪音所损害。
(5) destroy指通过某种有力的或粗暴的手段使之毁灭或无用，一般不能或很难修复，有时可用于比喻意义。① The earthquake destroyed the whole city. 地震毁了整个城市。② All his hopes were destroyed by her letter of refusal. 他所有的希望都被她的拒绝信毁了。
(6) damage主要指对价值和功能的破坏，多用于无生命的东西，一般还可修复。① Her heart was slightly damaged as a result of the disease. 由于生病，她的心脏轻微受损。② They managed to repair the house that had been damaged. 他们设法修复了受到破坏的房屋。
【注意】wound与injure可构成如下形式: the wounded 伤员; twenty wounded 二十个伤员; the injured (因事故造成的) 受伤者
Section Ⅱ 阅读
10. Experienced editors and reporters make informed decisions about what events to report, how to report them. 有经验的编辑和记者对于该报道什么事件，如何报道做出明智的决定。(p.11 Reading第一段第1行)
informed adj. 明智的；有知识的；了解情况的 ① He is a well-informed man. 他是个消息灵通的人。② You should keep us informed whenever you are in trouble. 一有麻烦你就应该告知我们。
【链接】inform 的用法: inform sb. of sth. 告知某人某事; inform sb. that / wh... 告知某人…; inform sb. + 疑问词 + 不定式; ① I informed her mother of her safe arrival. 我通知她母亲她已平安到达。② We were informed that a big fire had broken out in the next town. 我们获知邻镇发生大火灾。③ His letter informed us how and when he was expected to arrive in Beijing. 他的来信通知了我们他预定来北京的时间和搭乘的交通工具。④ He will inform us where to go. 他会告知我们该去什么地方。
11. They also make sere that readers can relate to the stories. 他们还确保读者能与报道内容相关。(p.11 Reading 第一段 第2行)
relate vi. & vt. (和……)相关；涉及；把……与……关联起来 ① How on earth do his remarks relate to what we are discussing now? 他的评论和我们现在讨论的事究竟有什么关系呢? ② I think we may relate these two acci- dents to his carelessness. 我们可以把这两个事故与他的 疏忽联系起来。③ The two men just can't relate to each other. 那两个人怎么也合不来。
【注意】relate常与to搭配。
【 链接】related adj. 有关系的, 相关的；亲戚的 / relation n.关系; 亲戚 / relative adj. 相关的，关于……的; n.亲戚
12. The two reporters agreed to switch roles for once and be the interviewees rather than interviewers in order to let us know about their work and how the news we read is made. 为了让我们了解他们的工作以及我们读到的新闻是如何制作与写作的，两位记者同意转换一次角色，充当被采访者而不是采访者。(p.11 Reading第一段 第4行)
(1) for once = just for once = for this once = this once 就这(那)一次 ① For once you are right. 只有这一次你是对的。② For once, at least, it's not my fault. 起码这一次不是我的错。③ Do let me stay up later tonight, mummy - just for this once. 就让我今晚上晚睡吧，妈妈 - 就这一次。
【链接】all at once 突然；同时 / once and for all 永远的；一劳永逸的 / once in a while 偶尔 / once more (again) 再一次 / once upon a time 从前(用于开始讲故事)
【比较】 once 意为“一次；曾经一度”。① I will help you once but then you must do it by yourself. 我会帮你一次以后你必须自己做。② We once lived in San Francisco. 我们曾在旧金山住过。
(2) rather than 此处相当于and not，意为“而不是”。如: ① The colour seems green rather than blue. 颜色好像是绿色，而不是蓝色。② They were screaming rather than singing. 他们在尖叫，而不是在唱歌。③ It is better to ask for help at the beginning rather than to wait until a busy period when everyone is rushed off their feet. 最好在开始工作时就去请求帮助，而不要等到大家都忙得不可开交时，再去找人帮忙。④ She telephoned rather than wrote. 她打了电话而没写信。
【注意】rather than连接并列结构
【提示】rather than 连接两个主语时，谓语动词的单复数与前一个保持一致。He rather than you is to blame. 是他而不是你该受到责备。
【拓展】rather than 还可用于以下情况：
(1) 表示两种说法的正确程度，意为“与其说，倒不如说”。He is an artist rather than a philosopher. 与其说他是位哲学家，不如说他是位艺术家。
(2) 表示主观上选择。主句表示喜欢做的事(主句中常含有would，prefer，like等)，rather than部分则表示不喜欢做的事。① I would die with my head high rather than live with knees bent. 我宁愿昂着头死，也不愿跪着生。② Rather than go there I'd prefer to stay here on my own. 我宁愿自己呆在这里，也不去那里。
13. For long and important articles, for example, a feature story, the editor will tell me how I should develop the story. 对于重要的长篇文章，例如一个特别报导，编辑会告诉我该如何阐述。(p.11 Reading ‘Zhu Lin’ 第3行)
develop 在本句中意为“阐述、详述”，也可翻译为“(逐步)展开”。① We should develop our argument point by point. 我们应该逐步展开论点。② Please try to develop the idea more fully. 请将该意见更详细地说明一下。
【拓展】develop 还可意为“发展、开发、养成、揭露、显示、冲洗”等。① His business developed quickly. 他的事业迅速发展起来。② We need to develop solar energy even further. 我们需要进一步开发太阳能。③ I developed the habit of eating between meals. 我养成了吃零食的习惯。④ His investigation developed several new facts. 他的调查揭露了若干新的事实。⑤ Please develop these films immediately. 请马上冲洗这些胶卷。
14. After the interview，the reporter must present the material in an organized way and make sure that the article reflects events and opinions truthfully. 采访以后，记者必须有条理地呈现材料，并确保所写的文章真实地反映事件及看法。(p.11 Reading ‘Chen Ying’第5行)
(1) present vt. 呈现；描述；介绍；赠送 ① The mayor presented the prizes in person. 市长亲自颁奖。② The principal presented a diploma to each of the graduates. = The principal presented each of the graduates with a diploma. 校长把毕业证书授予每一位毕业生。③ I presented the letter of introduction to the receptionist. 我把介绍信呈给接待员。④ The forced agreement will present problems later. 那项强制达成的协议日后将会发生问题。⑤ They presented flowers to their teacher. 他们给老师送了鲜花。
【链接】present adj. 在场的，出席 n. 礼物 / presence n. 在场，出席
(2) reflect vt. 反映；表现；反射；映出；反省 (vi.) ① Her severe look reflected how she really felt. 她那冷峻的神情反映出她心中的真正感受。② The letter reflected her sorrow. 那封信显露出她的悲伤。③ Her face was reflected in the mirror. 她的脸映现在镜子中。④ Mirrors reflect light. 镜子能反射光线。⑤ Please reflect on the matter. 请仔细考虑那件事。⑥ I reflected on possible reasons for my failure. 我仔细考虑导致我失败的种种可能原因。
【链接】reflection n. 反射；反映；思考，沉思 / reflective adj. 反射的；反映的；沉思的
15. My favourite article is one I wrote about the efforts to bring stolen cultural relics back to China. 我最喜欢的文章是我写的一篇关于如何努力把被盗文物带回中国。(p.11 Reading ‘Chen Ying’ 倒数第1行)
(1) one 在句中作表语，起替代作用，以避免重复。如替代的名词为复数，则用复数形式的替代词ones。
① I haven't a pen. Can you lend me one? 我没带钢笔，你能借给我一支吗? ② I didn't buy a calculator. They only had expensive ones．我没买计算器，他们只有贵的。
【注意】以上例句中的one替代的是泛指概念的名词，若替代特指概念的名词。则用the one或the ones。① Don't tie it to that old branch. I think it will break. Tie it to the one on the right. 别把它绑在那根老树上，我想它会断的。把它绑在右边的树枝上。② My shoes are similar to the ones you had on yesterday. 我的鞋子与你昨天穿的相似。
【提示】one 只能指代可数名词，若指代不可数名词则用that。The weather today is warmer than that yesterday. 今天的天气比昨天的暖和。
(2) effort [U, C] 努力；艰难的尝试；努力的成果 ① He did it without effort. 他毫不费力地做完那件事。② Getting a high grade requires great effort. 要取得高分需要非常努力。③ All my efforts were in vain. 我的努力全都白费了。
【短语】make an effort 努力，尽力 / spare no effort 不遗余力
16. I like the story because it was the first time that I had written with real passion and because it made me realise that everyone's life is different. 我喜欢这个故事，因为那是我第一次怀着真正的激情写作，也因为它使我意识到每个人的生活都是不同的。(p.12 Reading ‘Zhu Lin’ 第3行)
it was the first time (that)…是固定句式，it也可换成 this 或 that；first 也可换成 second，third 等以表达不同的意义。如: ① This is the fourth time she's rung you in a week. 这是她一周内第四次给你打电话。② It was the second time that he had been out with her alone. 这是第二次他单独跟她外出。
【注意】该句式的that从句中通常用完成时态，在描述过去的事情时，有时用一般过去时。
【提示】当主句为将来时态时，从句的谓语动词要用
现在完成时。① It will be the first time that I haven't been
abroad. 这将是我第一次不呆在国外。② This will be the first time that I have visited China. 这将是我第一次访问中国。
【拓展】the first time 可起从属连词的作用，引起时间状语从句。① The first time (that) I saw her, my heart stopped. 我第一次见到她时，心脏都停止了跳动。② The first time I went to Beijing, I visited the Summer Palace. 我第一次去北京时，游览了颐和园。
17. I want to write about people who you seldom read about, for example people who have AIDS or who are addicted to drugs. 我想写一下那些你很少读过其情况的人，例如患艾滋病或染有毒瘾的人。(p.12 Reading ‘Chen Ying’ 第1行)
(1) read about 意为“读关于……的文章，获悉”。如: ① I read about the accident in the newspaper. 我从报纸上获悉那次事故。② I know it's true, because I read about it in the official report. 我知道那是真的，因为我在官方报告中读过有关它的文章。
【比较】read表示“读，看”，后接读的内容，也可表示“理解，看懂”。① I read a good article in today's paper. 我在今天的报纸上读了一篇好文章。② She could read his thoughts. 她能看出他的心思。③ You can read a guy's character at the first glance. 你第一眼就能看出一个人的性格。④ Silence must not always be read as consent. 不能总是把沉默理解为同意。
【提示】write，tell，know，hear，ask等都存在类似用法上的区别。
(2) addict vt. 使沉溺；使人迷；使醉心 (常用于被动结构be addicted to) ① Don't addict yourself to such foolish things. 不要沉溺于这些愚蠢的事情。② Many students are addicted to computer games. 许多学生迷恋计算机游戏。
18. Their stories must be told if we want to solve difficult social problems and help those who suffer from them. 我们要想解决社会难题并帮助那些为难题所困的人们，就必须把他们的情况说出来。(p.12 Reading ‘Chen Ying’ 第3行)
suffer vi. 受痛苦，受苦难 ① The injured man was still suffering. 那位受伤的男子还在遭受折磨。② His health suffered terribly from heavy drinking. 他的健康因酗酒而严重受损。
【短语】suffer from 苦于……，患……病 ① This area used to suffer from floods. 这一地区过去常遭水灾。② She often suffers from headaches. 她经常头痛。
【拓展】suffer用作及物动词时，意为“遭受，蒙受”。① The city suffered serious damage from the earthquake. 那个城市因地震而遭到严重破坏。② The economy of that country has suffered a great loss. 那个国家的经济蒙受了重大损失。
19. We shouldn't ignore what happens even if it is difficult for people to accept some stories. 即使人们很难接受某些报导，我们也不应当不顾发生的事实。(p.12 Reading ‘Chen Ying’ 第4行)
(1) ignore vt. 忽视；不顾；对……装作不知道 ① He ignored my advice. 他忽视了我的忠告。② The driver ignored the traffic light. 那个司机不理会红绿灯。
【链接】ignorance n. 无知；不学无术；不知道 / ignorant adj. 无知的；不学无术的；无教养的
(2) even if (=even though) 即使，纵然 ① Even if I have to sell my house, I'll keep my business going. 即使要卖掉我的房子，我还要继续我的事业。② Even if he is poor, she loves him. 即使他很穷，她还是爱他。
【比较】though意为“尽管”，常用于陈述事实。如: ① Though he is poor, he is satisfied with his situation. 尽管他很穷，但他对他的境况是满意的。② Her first name was Rose, though no one called her that. 她的名字是罗斯，不过没有人这么称呼她。
【链接】 as if (= as though) 好像He treats me as if I were a stranger. 他对待我好像对待陌生人似的。
20. The media can often help solve problems and draw attention to situations where help is needed. 媒体能经常帮助解决问题，关注需要帮助的局面。(p.12 Reading ‘Chen Ying’ 第二段 第1行)
(1) draw attention to 对……加以注意，把注意力吸引到……上来。① Her cry drew our attention to the running car. 她的喊叫声把我们的注意力吸引到那辆行驶的汽车上。② He drew attention to the rising unemployment. 失业率日渐升高引起他的注意。
【提示】draw one's attention 中的draw也可换成catch或attract。Her sweet voice attracted / caught / drew our attention. 她甜美的声音引起了我们的注意。
【拓展】 pay attention to 注意; devote one's attention to 专心于; call attention to 唤起对……的注意; turn attention to 将注意力转向……; fix one's attention on 将注意力集中于……① You should pay attention to doing the experiment. 做这个实验你必须多加注意。② Lenin devoted much attention to training party leaders from among the workers. 列宁很注意从工人当中培养党的领导人。③ Before close I must call your attention to a problem we have to face. 在结束前，我必须让你们注意一个我们必须面对的问题。④ During the year, the government turned its attention to improving agriculture. 这一年，政府把注意力转向改善农业上。⑤ You must fix your attention on what the teacher is saying. 你必须集中注意力听讲。
【注意】以上短语中的to都是介词，后面不用动词原形。
(2) situations 后面由 where 引起了定语从句，表示处于某种局面或形势下。where引起的定语从句除修饰地点外，也可修饰situation，case，point等。
21. The result is a better understanding of the world on all sides, leading to a future world where people from all countries are respected and different views and opinions are tolerated. 结果就是在各方面对世界有更好的理解，从而产生一个来自各国的人民都受到尊重、不同观点与意见都能容忍的未来世界。(p.12 Reading ‘Chen Ying’ 第二段 倒数第3行)
(1) understanding 用作不可数名词，有时与不定冠词连用，意为“理解，了解；理解力；共识” 等。如: ①He has a clear understanding of the situation. 他对情况了解得很清楚。② The problem is beyond my understanding. 这个问题超过了我的理解力。③ We have reached an understanding with them. 我们跟他们达成了共识。
(2) on all sides (=on every side) 在各方面，到处 ① On all sides there was great enthusiasm over his speech. 对他的演讲各方面都抱有极大的热情。② On every side we have heard approval of his plan. 我们到处听到对他的计划的赞同。
【拓展】from all sides 从四面八方 / on one's side 在某人一边，支持某人 / take sides(with) 偏向一边，站在……一边 / side by side 肩并肩
(3) leading to... 为状语，表示结果。① The child slipped and fell down, hitting his head against the door. 那孩子滑了一跤，头碰到了门上。② Fifteen million trees had been blown down by the high winds, blocking roads, paths and railway lines. 大风刮倒了1,500万棵树，阻塞了大小道路和铁路线。
【注意】现在分词作结果状语时表示必然的结果，而不定式作状语表示出乎意料的结果。One day 1 went shopping and came back to find my front wheel missing. 有一天我去买东西，回来时发现我的车前轮不见了。
Section III 词汇、语法、综合技能
22. Nine out of ten housewives who were interviewed about the product said they liked it. 关于这种产品，在接受采访的家庭主妇中十分之九的都说喜欢。(p.14 Grammar Ex.3 No.3)
out of 意为“从(某个数)之中”，也可换成in。如: ① Choose one out of these ten. 从这十个当中选择一个。② He is safe from danger (in) nine cases out of ten. 十之八九他是安全的。
【拓展】 out of 还可表示如下意义：(1) 从…的内部，从……到外 Don't look out of the window. 不要向窗外看。(2) 在……的范围外 ① He is out of sight. 他在看不到的地方。② He lives a few miles out of the city. 他住在离市区数英里之外的地方。(3) 因……原因，出于I did it for her out of friendship. 我出于友好为她做那事。(4) (状态)从……离开 ① Your coat is out of fashion. 你的外套过时了。② The riot is out of control. 暴动已经失控。
23. And I like the way the fans look up to them. 而且我很喜欢球迷们对他们表达敬意的方式。(p.14 Grammar Ex.5 第二段 第3行)
(1) the way后面的句子是定语从句，此处省略了引导词that或in which，它们在从句中作状语。
(2) look up to 意为“尊敬，钦佩”，相当于admire，respect。① We look up to the old worker as our teacher. 我们把这位老工人尊为我们的老师。② This old man is looked up to by everybody. 这位老干部受到众人的尊敬。
24. Out many of them still think soccer is boring. 但他们许多人认为足球很无聊。(p.14 Grammar Ex.5 第二段 倒数第1行)
bore vt. 烦扰，使厌烦 ① The long speech bored us all. 那冗长的演讲使我们都感到厌烦。② Are you bored with my story? 我的话使你感到厌烦吗? ③ He always bores her with the same story. (= by telling...) 他总是重复同样的故事，使她觉得厌烦。
【注意】bore通常跟with连用。
【比较】boring 令人厌烦的; bored 感到厌烦的
25. Americans will fall in love with this game too. 美国人也会爱上这种运动。(p.14 Grammar Ex.5 第三段 第2行)
fall in love with 爱上……(表动作，不延续) ① I fell in love with her at first sight. 我对她一见钟情。② She fell in love with the house as soon as she saw it. 一见到那所房子她就喜欢上了。
【比较】be in love (with) 意为“相爱，喜欢”，表示延续状态。① He had never been in love before. 他以前从没恋爱过。② If you're really in love with art, you don't mind hard work. 如果你真的喜欢艺术．你就不会介意吃苦。
26. A small group of fewer than a hundred people caused trouble for workers at our city's most successful company today. 不足一百人的一小群人今天在我们市办事办得最成功的公司给工人造成了麻烦。(p.15 Integrating Skills 第一图 第1行)
(1) fewer than 少于，不足(修饰复数名词)
【链接】less than少于，不足(修饰不可数名词) ; more than多于，超过(修饰复数名词或不可数名词)
(2) cause trouble (for) (给……)带来麻烦或烦恼
【链接】ask / look for trouble 自找麻烦，自寻烦恼; be in trouble 处于困境，有麻烦; get into trouble 陷于困境; make trouble 惹麻烦; put a person to trouble 给某人添麻烦; take trouble to do 费神做……，不辞劳苦地做
27. Brave and strong, the activists talked to workers outside the factory and left a positive message about protecting the earth. 勇敢而又强壮的行动者在工厂外与工人们进行了交谈并留下了有关保护地球的积极性宣言。(p.15 Integrating Skills 第二图 第3行)
brave and strong 是形容词作方式状语。再如: Stone- faced, the captain ordered to reduce speed. 船长面无表情地下达了减速的命令。
【拓展】形容词或形容词短语还可在句中充当以下状
语成分。
(1) 原因状语 Too nervous to reply, he stared at the floor. 他紧张地不能回答，只是凝视着地板。
(2) 时间状语 Ripe, these apples are sweet. 这些苹果熟了的时候是很甜的。
(3) 条件状语 Fresh from the oven，rolls are delicious. 面包卷如果是刚出炉的。则会很香。
(4) 句子状语(对句子内容加以评注) ①Strange to say，he did pass his exam after all. 说来奇怪，他竟然通过了考试。② More important，he's got a steady job. 更重要的是，他得到了一份稳定的工作。
28. Do your supporting sentences focus on the main idea? 你那些提供证据的句子是针对主题思想的吗? (p.16 Tips 第3点行)
focus vt. & vi. 集中(注意、关心)于……，集中注意力(与on连用) ① We must focus our attention on urgent problems. 我们必须把注意力集中在紧迫的问题上。② All eyes were focused on him. 所有目光都集中到他身上。③ He found it hard to focus on one thing for longer than five minutes. 他发现很难集中注意一件事在5分钟以上。
【链接】focus 也可用作名词，意为“焦距；(兴趣、活动等的)中心”。① Please adjust the focus of the telescope. 请调节望远镜的焦距。② He is the focus of attention. 他是人们注意的焦点。
【单元语法】
1. 过去分词作定语和表语
1) 过去分词作定语 单个过去分词作定语时常放在被修饰词前，过去分词短语作定语时应放在被修饰词之后。
如: ① I bought some painted chairs. 我买了几把油漆好的椅子。② Everybody attended the meeting held last week. 所有的人都参加了上星期举行的会议。
【注意】
(1) 过去分词修饰something，everything，anything，nothing，somebody，nobody等不定代词或不定代词those时，要放在这些词的后面。① He is one of those invited. 他是那些被邀请的人之一。② Nothing reported (in the newspaper) interested him. 报纸上报导的事没有一样让他感兴趣。
(2)单个的过去分词有时置于名词后作定语。如: The experience gained is very useful. 获取的经验很有用。
(3) 有些过去分词作前置定语与后置定语时意义不同。如: in the given time 在既定的时间内; with the words given 用所给的单词; a wanted person 被通缉的人; workers wanted 招聘工人; a concerned look 关切的神情; the people concerned 有关人士
2)过去分词作表语 ① She looks worried. 她看上去忧心忡忡。② Your article is well written. 你的文章写得很好。
【辨析】过去分词作表语与被动语态的区别。
(1) 用作表语的过去分词，被动意味很弱，主要表示动作的完成和状态，此时相当于一个形容词。如：① The glass is broken. 玻璃破了。② Our classroom is crowded. 我们的教室很拥挤。
(2)被动语态的过去分词，动作意味很强，句子主语为动作的承受者，后常跟by短语。如：① The glass was broken by Jack. 玻璃是杰克打破的。② The windows were closed by Tom last night. 昨天夜里是汤姆关的窗。
【拓展】表示感觉的一些过去分词 (如surprised，disappointed，excited，pleased等)及其他一些 (如dressed，drunk，devoted，lost，known，married， recovered，separated等)过去分词可常用作表语，表示状态，其中有些只表示状态，毫无被动意味。如：① I found that I was lost. 我发现我迷了路。② Those days are past and gone. 那些日子一去不复返了。③ He is dead drunk. 他喝得烂醉。④ The patient is perfectly recovered from his illness. 病人已完全康复。
【注意】过去分词作表语时，系动词除be外，也可用get，become等表示动作，不能延续。如: ① They have been married for five years. 他们结婚五年了。② They got married five years ago. 他们五年前结的婚。
篇2：人教新课标 高二Unit2 News Media优化设计
Unit 2 News media （新闻媒体）
Teaching Time: 7 periods
Period 1 Warming up & Listening
Teaching Aims:
1. Talk about news and the media
2.Train the students' listening ability by listening and answering some relative questions.
3. master the following words: reliable, elct, go up, burn down, injure…
Teaching Important Points:
1. Master the useful words and expressions in this period
2. Training the Ss’listening and speaking ability
Teaching Difficult Points:
How to help Ss understand the listening material exactly
How to help improve their speaking ability
Teaching Methods:
Listening-and answering activity to help the Ss qo through the listening material
Individual, pair or group work to make the Ss finish the speaking task
Teaching Aids:a computer, a recorder, the Bb
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1: Greet and Lead-in
Quesrion: How many golden medals have we got?
Answer: (By reading newspapers and magazines,watching TV, listening to the radio, also by a website.) In Eglish we call it news media.
Step 2: Warming up
1.Translate the followingaaaaaaaaaaaa:
(1)．新闻媒体_______________ (2)与…有区别______________
(3) 被开除_________________ (4)面临困难 _____________
(5) 给出理由_____________ (6)烧毁 ______________
(7) 宁愿_______________ (8).粮食价格_______________
(9). 上涨 ______________
2.Please open the book at page 9. Look at the pictures and discuss the following questions in pairs:
(1)Which of the news media above is the most reliable? Why?
(2)How are the media above different from each other?
(3)How do you know whether what you hear, see and read is true?
(4)Do you know how a newspaper is made?
Step 2: Listening(SB page 10)
T: Now let’s come to the listening. We are going to listen to two parts of conversations.The first part is an interview; the second part is a dialogue. Listen carefully to what is said in each part. I’ll play the tape twice. (after listening) Please work in pairs to talk about the questions in Exercises 2, 3,4.
(Check the answer with the whole class)
Step 3 Key Words
1. Which of the news media above is the most reliable? 以上的新闻媒体中哪一种最可靠？
reliable adj. 可信赖的; 可依靠的； 确定的
They are reliable friends. 他们是可信赖的朋友。
Is the source of the information reliable? 那个消息的来源可靠吗？
[链接] rely vt. 信赖; 依靠 reliably adv. 可靠地；确实地 reliability n. 可靠性；可信赖性
Translate Chinese into English:
这条信息可靠吗? Is this information reliable?
他看上去是个仁慈可靠的人。 He 1ooks a nice．reliable mall．
我指望你帮我。 I rely on you to help me．
2. The man was fired. 那个人被解雇了。
fire的动词用法
(1) 解雇，开除
The company fired him for not coming to work on time. 那个公司因他不按时上班解雇了他。
(2) 发射
He fired his gun at the big snake. 他开枪打那条大蛇。
(3) 激发（人、感情等），使充满热情
The story fired his imagination. 这个故事激发了他的想象力。
3. The man faced difficulties.
(1) face v.t. 面临（困难等），应付， 面对；（危险、困难等）迫近
e.g. We must face our trouble and bear it. 我们必须正视我们的困难并勇于承受。
[短语]
be faced with 面临，面对
face up to面对；承担
face the music接受（不愉快的后果或情况）
e.g. I was faced with a new problem.
She couldn’t face up to the fact that she was no longer young.
她无法面对自己不再年轻的现实。
The boy was caught cheating in the examination and had to face the music.
那个男孩被发现考试作弊，不得不接受惩罚。
(2) difficulty表示“难，困难”时用作不可数名词，表示“难题，难事”时用作可数名词。
e.g. She learned to speak English without difficulty. 她毫无困难地学会了讲英语。
We will face many difficulties in the future. 将来我们要面临许多难题。
词汇过关与精练
fire vt
①.老板通知他一周后解雇。(fire sb) The boss ________him with one week’s notice.
②.屋里太暗了，点上火吧。(light a fire) It is too dark in the room .Let’s _____ _____ ____.
③.天很冷他们点火取暖。(make a fire) It’s so cold. They _____ _____ ____to keep warm.
④.谁放火烧了那座房子？(set sth on fire / set fire to sth ) Who ____ ___ ____the house?
⑤.他的衣服烧着了。( on fire ) His clothes were_______ _______.
⑥.According the Law of Labor, bosses can’t_________ workers at will any longer.
A. fire B. hire C. fire at D. employ
diffculty n
①.我费了好大的力气才说服了他。( have difficulty in doing sth)
I________ the greatest______ ______ ______her.
②.我费了九牛二虎之力完成了我的作业。(with difficulty )
I have finished my work_______ _____ ________.
③.我轻易解决了这问题。I solved the problem______ _________ ________.(without difficulty)
④.Do you have any difficulty ________English?
A．in B.at C.for D. with
⑤.At first,the government had great difficulty ______people to leave Rio and to settle In Brasilia.
A.persuading B.persuade C.with persuading D.to persuade
4. The man was generous.
generous adj. 慷慨的；大方的；宽容的；豁达的；丰富的，丰盛的
e.g. He is generous with his money. 他出手大方。
He gave me a generous lunch. 他请我吃了一顿丰盛的午餐。
[链接] generous adv. 慷慨地 generosity n. 慷慨大方
The design of the writing on the Bb:
Unit 2 New Media
Five news media: website, radio, Tv, magazine, newspaper
Useful words and expressions: (step 3)
Homework:
1. Read the new words.
2. Keep the Language Points in mind.
3. Get reading for Speaking
Record after teaching:
Period 2 Listening(WB page 88) & Speaking(SB page 10)
Teaching Aims:
1. Train the students’ listening ability.
2. Train the students’ speaking ability.
Teaching Important Points:
1. Master the useful words and expressions in this period
2. Training the Ss’listening and speaking ability
Teaching Difficult Points:
How to help improve their listening ability
How to help improve their speaking ability
Teaching Methods:
Listening-and answering activity to help the Ss qo through the listening material
Group work to make the Ss finish the speaking task
Teaching Aids: a computer, a recorder, the Bb
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Greet the whole class.
Step 2 Listening(WB page 88)
Now let’s come to the listening. The chief editor of a daily newspaper is having a meeting with the journalists. She is telling them what she wants them to do today. Listen carefully to what is said in the text. I’ll play the tape twice. (Check the answer with the whole class)
Step 3 Speaking(SB page 10)
Now it’s time for us to be a editor of a newspaper. Here is a list of ten things that happened today( on the screen)You only need to report five of them. Work in groups to diacuss. And then I’ll ask you t act out your dialogue. You can use the useful expressions in your book.. (walk around and give them help if necessary).
Step 4 Key Words and Expressions:
1. Below is a list of ten things that happened today. 以下列出了今天发生的十件事。
本句为倒装句，正常语序应为：A list of ten things that happened today is below.
below看作副词，表示方位，当表示方位的状语或表语位于句首时，句子采用全部倒装的结构，即把谓语动词的所有组成部分都移到主语之前。这类作状语或表语的词常见的有：away, down, in, off, out, over, up, above, below, here, there及介词短语与分词。
Here is a seat for you.这儿有你的一个座位。
There goes the bell!铃响了。
Written on the blackboard are the names of those who were late yesterday.黑板上写着昨天迟到的人的名字。
2. beat是打败了对手beat-beat-beaten
例句：①He beat me in the race.(他在赛跑中赢了我。)
②We have beaten their team for 3 years.(我们已连续3年打败他们的球队。)
③My heart beat fast at the sight of her.(一看见她，我的心跳就加快。)
win─won─won
win a prize得到奖品win a war打了胜仗
win a game赢得比赛win an election选举获胜
例句：①Our team won the same 3 to 2 last night.(昨晚我们队以3比2赢了比赛。)
②Who do you think will win the beauty contest?(你认为那场选美谁会获胜？)
③beat─beat─beaten
3. France elected a new president.
elect v.t. 选举，推选
e.g. They elected a president. / They elected him as President. 他们选举了总统。/ 他们选举他为总统。
注意：若选举某人担任某职位，且该职位只有一个时，通常不用冠词。
e.g. Our classmates elected him as/to be/our/as our monitor.
They elected the old man to be chairman of the club.他们推选那位老人为俱乐部主席。
[辨析] elect, pick out, choose
elect是指通过正式手续的选举。
e.g. Roosevelt was elected four times to the presidency of the U.S.A.罗斯福四次当选为美国总统。
choose通常指在所提供的对象中，凭个人的判断力进行选择。
e.g. We had to choose between leaving early and paying for a taxi.我们不得不在早点动身和雇计程车中间作出选择。
There are ten to choose from.
pick out比较通俗，指按个人喜好或希望进行挑选，多用于有行的东西。
e.g. She picked out a scarf to wear with the dress.她挑选了一条围巾以配上她穿的衣服。
4.Food prices are going up. 食品价格在上涨。
go up上升，增长，提高
e.g. The temperature has gone up.
The lift went up to the fourth floor. 电梯升到了四楼。
Vi phrases: go up;go down; fall; drop
Vt phrases: increase; bring up; bring down; cut down;
考题:Although the prices of TV set are______，he managed to make the manager_____the price of that TV set．
A．going up；bring down B．gone up；go down
C．going up；brought down D．going down；bring up
5.A house in your city burnt down. Nobody was injured.你们镇上一座房子被烧毁。无人员伤亡。
(1) burn down 烧毁；使烧毁【强调破坏性】；（由于燃料烧尽）火力减弱
These houses were burnt down to the ground. 这些房子被烧毁。
The fire is burning down, get some more coal please.
[比较] burn up烧尽，烧光【强调动作的结果】；（火，炉等）烧起来，旺起来
e.g. Put some wood on the fire and make it burn up.
Step5.Homework:
1. Read the new words.
2. Keep the language points above in mind
3. Get ready for reading.
Step6.The design of the writing on the Bb:
Unit 2 news media
Key words and expressions(step4)
Record after teaching:
Period 3 Pre-reading/Reading/Post-reading
Teaching Aims:
1. Train the students' reading ability,especially the skills of summarizing and scanning.
2. Study and have a good grasp of some key words and phrases.
Teaching Important Points:
1. words and phrases:more than, relate to, for once, be addicated to, on all sides, inform, experienced, switch,etc.
2. Understand the passage excatly.
Teaching Difficult Points:
How to help the Ss learn more about reporters and newspapers.
Teaching Methods:
1.Fast reading to get the general idea of the text.
2.Careful reading to further understand the text.
3.Individual, pair or group work to make every student take an active part in the activities in class.
Teaching Aids: a computer, a recorder, the Bb
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Greet the whole class as usual.
Step 2 key words and expressions:
Ⅰ.翻译
1 （至少）这一次___________________2有经验的编辑 _____________
3根据以往知识作决定__________________4把…联系起来/能理解______
5交换角色_____________________6明天要召开的会议_________________
7昨天已开过的会议______________________8调整/适应_______________
9 对…有瘾_____________10 受痛苦/患病______________________
11对注意_______________12四面八方/在各方面_______________________
13 十分之九____________________
(Key:1. for once 2 an experiencededit 3. make informed decisions 4. relate to
5. switch roles for 6. the meeting to be held tommorrow 7.the meeting held yesterday
8.adapt to 9. be addivted to 10. suffer from 11. draw attention to 12.on all sides
13. nine out of ten)
II. 词汇拓展
1. difficulty---(adj)________informed---(n.) _________ 3. relate---(n.)________
4. present---(adv.)__________5 reflect---(n.) ________6 social---(n.) _________
7. tolerate---(adj.)_______ 8complete---(adv.)________9 arm---(pl.)__________
Step3 Reading
We have talked a lot about news media. Today we are going to read a passage about reporters and newspapers. Scan the text , try to get the general idea of the text. and finish pre-reading.(1 and 6)
Now please read the text again carefully, and find the answers to the questions on the screen.
1.Do newspapers and other media simply record what happens?
2.Who were asked to be interviewed? And why?
3. Whom does a reporter have to discuss with before he/she decides what to write? Why?
4. And what is the person’s job?
5. Is interviewing someone easy? What must a reporter know?
6. When an interview is finished,what should the reporter do?
7. Which of the articles that they have written do they like best? Why?
8. What could they write about if they could write any article? Why?
9. What is the basic task for a reporter?
10.What result can TV programmes and printed articles bring to us?
(check the answers)
Step 4 Listening to the text
Tell the following sentences True or False
1.Newspaper and other media just record what happens.(F)
2.The reporter has to discuss with the editor before he/she decides what to write.(T)
3.Much has been done before the reporter starts writing.(T)
4.Chen Ying’s favourite story is about an ordinary young woman.(F)
5.The media can often help solve problems and draw attention to situations where help is needed.(T)
Step 5 Discussion
Now you must have known about reporters and newspapers better. So let’s have a discussion. Look at the questios3 and 4 on page12, and work in pairs to talk about them..Then I’ll ask some of you to report. (encourage Ss to express their own opinion)
Step 5 Homework:
1. Read the text.
2. Try to remember what have been taught above.
The design of the writing on the Bb:
Unit 2 New Media
Useful expressions
Record after teaching:
Period 4 Reading
Teaching Aims:
1. Train the students' reading ability,especially the skills of summarizing and scanning.
2. Study and have a good grasp of some key words and phrases.
Teaching Important Points:
3. words and phrases:more than, relate to, for once, be addicated to, on all sides, inform, experienced, switch,etc.
4. Understand the passage excatly.
Teaching Difficult Points:
How to help the Ss learn more about reporters and newspapers.
Teaching Methods:
1.Fast reading to get the general idea of the text.
2.Careful reading to further understand the text.
Teaching Aids: a computer, a recorder, the Bb
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Greet the whole class as usual.
Step 2 Listening to the text
Step 3 Language Points:
1. Newspapers and other media do more than simply record what happens.报纸和其他媒介并不仅仅记录已发生的事情。
more than不仅仅；极为，非常；多于；难以；不能
e.g. She’s more than a teacher to us.
The boy more than smiled but laughed. 这男孩不仅是微笑，而是放声大笑了。
We are more than pleased with the results. 我们对结果极为满意。
He has more than 300 pictures.
This room is three time larger than that one.这个房间比那个房间大两倍。
The old man is two times older than I am. 这个老人的年龄比我大一倍。
That is more than I can tell. 那是怎么回事我实在难说。
2. Experienced editors and reporters make informed decisions about what events to report and how to report them.经验丰富的编辑和记者对于该报道什么事件以及如何报道作出明智的决定。
(1) 句中的experienced(富有经验的)和informed(见识广的，有知识的) 都是动词的过去分词作定词，修饰动词。单个的过去分词作定语时，通常放在它所修饰的名词前面。
e.g. a fallen tree一棵倒下的树 a broken chair一把破椅子 stolen cultural relics被盗的文物
(2) informed adj. 明智的，有知识的，了解情况的
e.g. He is a well-informed man.他是个消息灵通的人。
inform的用法:
inform sb. of sth.告知某人某事 inform sb. that/wh-…告知某人 inform sb.＋疑问词＋不定式
e.g. The singer informed us of their arrival.歌手们把他们到来的消息告诉了我们。
The nurse informed me that visiting hours were over.护士告诉我探病时间已经结束了。
Who informed you when to start? 是谁告诉你们出发时间的？
3. They also make sure that readers can relate to the stories.他们还要确保读者能理解报道的内容。
relate v.i. & v.t （和～）相关；涉及；把～与～关联起来
e.g. It is difficult to relate the two cases. 很难把两个案子联系起来。
We should learn to relate the results to the causes.我们应该学会把结果与原因联系起来看问题。
(1).所得税率与个人年收入的数额相关。(be related to)
Income tax rates _______ ________ ______one’s annual income.
(2).这封信与卖房有关。(relate to)
This letter ________ _____the sales of the house.
(3).很难将这些结果与已知的原因联系起来。(relate to)
It is hard to ______these resuts_______any known cause.
(4).有些成年人不与孩子沟通。(relate to)
Some adults _________ _______ _______children.
(5).My teacher collected all the paper that _________this subject.
A. relates to B. related to C. relating to D. relate to
(6).It is difficult _________the two things.
A. relate B. to relate C. relating to D. related to
(7).I have business _______him. ( have relations with 交往／事务 )
A. relation with B. relation to C. relations with D. relations to
(8).The report has _______him. (have relation to 关系，联系)
A. relation with B. relation to C. relations with D. relations to
key:1. are related to 2. relates to 3. relate to 4. don't relate to 5. B 6. B 7.C 8 B
4. The two reporters agreed to switch roles for once and be the interviewees rather than the interviewers in order to let us know about their work and how the news we read in made.两位记者同意交换角色，作一次受访者而不是采访者，让我们了解他们的工作，了解我们读到的新闻是怎样制作和编写出来的。
(1) for once 就这（那）一次
=For this once = just for once = this once
e.g. For once they broke the rule.这一次，他们违规了。
He beat me for once.他只有一次赢了我。
(2) rather than“而不是”（more than），不表示主观愿望，而表示一个事实，不和would连用。注意rather than后的动词要和主句中与之相当的动词在形式上一致。
例如：He ran all the way rather than walked．他一路跑而不是走。
I think Tom，rather than you，is to blame．我认为是汤姆而不是你应受责备。
Rather than take the crowded bus,he prefers to ride a bicycle to walk。
另外，rather和than还可分开使用，前后词的形式要求rather than。例如：
I am rather bored than tired．我与其说是疲惫不如说是厌倦。
Rather than还可以表示 “而不愿”的意思，此时rather than后总是跟动词原形。例如：
Rather than allow the vegetable to go bad，he sold them half price．
比较：①other than“除了……；除了……以外”，通常用于否定中。
②or rather 更确切地说；
would rather…. than / other than / rather than / or rather
(1) (春)In that case,there’s nothing you can do ________ than wait.
A. more B. other C.better D.any
(2) You can't get to the island________ by boat.
(3) She prefers to live in the country _______live in the city.
(4) I __ stay at home __ go out.
(5) He __ you came tomorrow.
(6) He arrived very late last night, in the early hours this morning.
Key :(1)B (2) other than (3) rather than (4) would rather than (5) would rather (6) or rather
5. After the interview, the reporter must present the material in an organized way and make sure that the article reflects events and opinions truthfully.采访后，记者一定要提交出组织严密的材料，并确保文章的真实反映事实和舆论。
(1) present vt.呈现；描述；介绍；赠送
e.g. When will you present your report?你什么时候提出报告？
The government presented cars to the hospitals. 政府向医院赠送了一些车。
Allow me to present Mr. Brown to you. 请允许我把布朗先生介绍给你。
(2) reflect vt. 反映；表现；反射；映出 reflection n
e.g. This letter is sure to reflect our real opinion.这封信会反映出我们的真实意见。
Her face was reflected in the mirror.她的脸映现在镜子里。
Mirrors reflect light.镜子能反射光线。
6. My favourite article is the one I wrote about the efforts to bring stolen cultural relics back to China.我最喜欢的文章是我写的一篇关于如何努力把被盗的文物带回中国。
effort n. [U,C]努力；艰难的尝试；努力的结果
e.g. He did it without effort.他毫不费力地完成那件事
[短语] make(an) effort(s)to do sth．)努力做某事 spare no effort不遗余力
with(an)effort费力地，使劲地 without effort毫不费力地
But all tllese efforts ended in failure．但是所有的努力都化作泡影。
They concentrated their efforts on building the dam．他们聚中精力建这座大坝。
I’ll spare no effort to help you．我将不遗余力地帮助你。
◇[考题]The rescue team made every_____to find tlle missing mountain climber．(上海春季高考题)
A．force B．energy C．effort D．possibility．
[解析] force表示“力量；权力”，energy表示“能量”；possibility表示“可能性”，均与语境体现出来的“竭尽全力去找失踪的登山者含义不符。这三个词均不可与make搭配。make every effort to do sth．为习语，表示“尽一切努力做某事”。[答案] C，极力
7. I want to write about people you seldom read about, for example people who have AIDS or who are addicted to drugs.我想报道那些你们很少能了解的人，如艾滋病患者或者是染上毒瘾的人。
be / get / become addicted to sth. / doing sth.对~成瘾/成癖
e.g. It doesn’t take long to become addicted to these drugs.服用这些毒品不要多长时间就会上瘾。
It’s a pity that her child has got addicted to smoking.真可怜，她的孩子抽烟上瘾了。
Some children are addicted to computer games / TV.(喻)一些孩子玩电脑游戏/看电视上了瘾。
He is addicted to practicing Chinese Gongfu.他醉心于练习中国功夫。
[精练](1). 他喜欢通俗歌曲。 （be addicted to）
He__________ rather __________ ______ pop songs.
(2).他醉心与诗歌，希望有朝一日成为一位诗人。（fall addicted to）
He ________ _________ ______ poetry and hoped one day to be a poet.
(3). 不要沉溺于电脑游戏
Don’t ______ _______ ______ _______ computer games.
(4).改错 Mr Bain was addicted to use heroin.
key:1.is addicted to 2.fell addicted to 3.get addicted to 4.using
8. We shouldn’t ignore what happens even if it is difficult for people to accept some stories.即使人们对一些现象很难接受，我们也不应该无视眼前发生的事情。
(1) ignore v.t. 不理睬；忽视
e.g. You shouldn’t ignore your father’s advice.你不该无视父亲的忠告。
I tried to tell her but she ignored me.我打算告诉她，可是她不理睬我。
(2) even if / even though即使，尽管
e.g. The young man didn’t lose heart even if he had failed many times in finding a job.这个年轻人没有放弃，尽管他多次未能找到工作。
9. The result is a better understanding of the world on all sides, leading to a future world where people from all countries are respected and different views and opinions are tolerated.结果会使人们更好地了解世界地各个方面，给人们带来一个人人受到尊重，不同观念得到包容地未来世界。
(1) on all sides(=on every side) 在各方面，四面八方
e.g. They were trapped with enemies on all sides.他们四面楚歌。
The enemy were attacking on all sides.敌人从四面八方发起进攻。
[精练]1.他们四面楚歌。(on all sides/on every side)
They were trapped---with enemies_________ _______ ________.
2.这对夫妇并肩坐着。(side by side)
The couple sat ________ ________ _________.
3.他知道他不会和黑人站一起的。(take sides with)
He knew that he would not ________ _______ _______a Negro.
4.谁是你这边的人？(on one’s side)
Who is ________ ________ ___________?
key:1. on every side /on all sides 2. side by side 3.take sides with 4. on your side
(2)tolerate v.t. 容忍，忍受，允许
e.g. I can’t tolerate that loud music / that kind of behavior.我无法忍受那么响的音乐/那种行径。
Cheating on exams cant’ be tolerated. 考试作弊是不能容忍的。
10. I would not believe it, but I might check other sources and maybe change my mind.
change one’s mind改变主意
[相关短语] bear / keep in mind 记住 call/bring to mind 使人想起 out of one’s mind 精神错乱，发狂 never mind 不要紧，没关系 have sth. in mind 记得某事，想起某事
11.Famous people are often asked for their opinions on current affairs.名人经常接受采访、被问及对时事地看法
current affairs 当前的事件；时事
affairs复数形式表示“重要事件，事务”（常用复数形式，且一般不与定冠词连用）
e.g. The minister deals with important affairs of State.这位大臣处理重要的国务。
current adj. 此刻的，现时的，当前的
e.g. current fashions时装 current events时事
Step 4 Discussion
How can we write a news report?
Homework:
1.Read the text.2.Try to remember what have been taught above.3.Work Book p89-90
The design of the writing on the Bb:
Unit 2 New Media
Language points (step3)
Record after teaching:
Period 5 Language Study & Grammar
Teaching Aims:
1. Review the words learned in Reading.
2. Grammar Study: The Past Participle used as Attribute and Predicative
Teaching Important Points:
How to guess the missing verbs and use them correctly according to the given sentences.
Help Ss master the Past Participle as Attribute and Predicative.
Teaching Difficult Points:
How to use the Past Participle correctly.
Teaching Methods:
Practising to finish each task in Word Study and Grammar.
Teaching Aids: a computer, a recorder, the Bb
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Greet the whole class as usual.
Step 2 check homework
Step 3 word study do exercise 1 on page 13
Step 4Grammar语法详释(computer)
The Past Participle used as Attribute and Predicative过去分词作定语和表语
过去分词在句中可承担形容词和副词在句中的作用，充当定语和表语。
1．过去分词作定语
(1) 在句中的位置
单个的过去分词作定语时，位于它所修饰的名词或代词前面；过去分词短语作定语时，位于它所修饰的名词或代词后面。
a broken heart一颗破碎的心 a lost dog丧家之犬 a risen sun已升起的太阳
an organized trip有组织的旅行 a broken glass被打破的玻璃杯
a trip organized by the league由共青团组织的旅行
a glass broken by the boy被这个男孩打破的玻璃杯
The excited people rushed out of the building.
They found a damaged car at the gate of the park.
(2) 所表示的时间
过去分词作定语时，所表示的动作或者在谓语所表示的动作之前发生，或者没有一定的时间性。
The letter posted yesterday will soon reach him.他很快就能收到昨天寄出的信了。
Have you read the books written by the young writer？你读过那位年轻作家写的小说吗？
(3) 语法功能
过去分词或过去分词短语作定语时，其功能相当于一个定语从句。
The stolen bike belongs to Jack.被偷的自行车是杰克的。
The bike which had been stolen belongs to Jack.
The lecture given by Professor Zhang is about environment protection.张教授所做的报告是关于环境保护的。
The lecture which was given by Professor Zhang is about the environment protection.
2. 过去分词作表语
(1) 过去分词作表语时，多表示主语所处的状态。
The door remained locked.门仍然锁着。
She looked disappointed.她看上去挺失望。
He seemed quite delighted at the good news.听到这个好消息，他似乎很开心。
(2) 常见作表语的过去分词有：upset, disappointed, drunk, amused, frightened, married, excited, experienced, interested, confused, pleased, puzzled, satisfied, tired, worried等。
(3) 有些过去分词作表语时，构成的谓语很接近被动结构。
Everything is settled down.一切都解决了。
Thank heavens! The boy is saved.谢天谢地，孩子得救了。
The town is surrounded on three sides by mountains.这座小镇三面环山。
Do exercises 1, 2, 3 on page 14
Step 5 Language Points:
1. Nine out of ten women who were interviewed about the product said they liked it.
nine out of ten(=nine in ten)十之八九，百分之九十
e.g. Nine out of ten people will not agree with you.
也可以说
Four out of the ten children there can go to school.在那里十个孩子中只有四个可以上学。
2. And I like the way the fans look up to them.
look up to尊敬，敬仰（反义：look down on轻视，看不起）
e.g. The young should look up to the old.年轻人应该尊敬老人。
3. Americans will fall in love with this game too.
fall in love with爱上（表示动作，不延续）
e.g. I fell in love with her at first sight.我对她一见钟情。
She fell in love with the house as soon as she saw it.
[比较] be in love (with) 相爱，喜欢（表示延续状态）
e.g. If you’re really in love with art, you don’t mind hard work.
Homework:
(1).Do exercises 4, 5 on page 13, and exercises 1, 2, 3 on page 91
(2). 完成句子
1． We lived in the house ________ _______ _______ ________(我舅舅们建的)
2. Any medicine _____(服用)without the advice of a doctor can cause trouble.
3. We spent two hours discussing the plan ______ _____________(她制定的)
4． Most of the people __________ (被邀请参加宴会的) were famous scientist.
5. Lessons _______________ ___________(易学) are soon forgotten.
6. The computer center _____ (开办)last year is very popular among the students in the school.
7. Have you ever been to the place of interest _________ _____(上个月我参观过的)
8． The worker _____ _____ _____ ____ ____ ____(一条腿受伤的) lay under the tree.
9. _________ _____________ (头脑冷静的) men often succeed.
10. You should thank that ____________________(心地善良的) girl.
11. 他的母亲对他的话感到很满意。His mother _________ _______ his words.
12. The result was so disappointing that we all became __________(感到失望)
Key:1. built by my uncles 2. taken 3. made by her 4invited 5. learned easily
6. opened/started 7. i visited last month 8. who was wounde in the leg/whose leg was wonded
9. Cool-hearted 10. kind-hearted 11. was pleased 12. disappointed
The design of the writing on the Bb:
Unit 2 New Media
Language points (step 5)
Record after teaching:
Period 6 Integrating Skills
Teaching Aims:
1. Learn and master the following : arm, disappoint, etc
2.Train the students' integrating skills.
3. Learn about the five basic elements in a news report
Teaching Important Points:
Train the students' integrating skills.
Teaching Difficult Points:
How to inprove the students' integrating skills.
Teaching Methods:
Asking-and-answering activity to check Ss’understanding of the two reports.
Teaching Aids: the Bb
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Greet the whole class as usual.
Step 2 check homework
Step 3 Reading and speaking
Now please read the two reports on page 15 carefully and compare them. Then discuss the questions in part 1 and part 2.(give SS enough time to do it, and let them express their ideas freely.)
Five basic elements in a news report: when, where, who, what and why.
Step 4 Language Points:
1. Brave and strong, the activists talked to workers outside the factory…
brave and strong是形容词作状语，形容词或形容词短语作状语，通常说明主语行为的原因、方式、伴随状况等。
e.g. Cold and hungry, he decided to stop and have a rest. （表原因）又冷又饿，他决定停下来休息一会儿。
Ripe, the oranges taste sweet.（表方式）这些橘子熟了，味道甜美。
2. The peaceful meeting ended when the company sent out a group of angry men armed with sticks to fight with the citizens.
arm v.t. 武装，用武器装备
e.g. The robber was armed.那个强盗有武器。
The soldiers were armed to teeth.士兵们武装到牙齿
3. I’m sure they won’t feel disappointed.
disappoint v.t. 使失望 disappointing adj. 令人失望的 disappointed adj. 失望的
e.g. The book disappointed me.这本书令我失望。
The news was really disappointing.那个消息真令人感到失望。
Are you very disappointed about losing the game?你是不是因为比赛输了而感到很失望?
Homework:
(1)Review this unit.
(2)过去分词的用法
1.I need one more stamp before my collecton_________.
A.has completed B.completes C.has been completed D.is completed
2.The first textbooks__ for teaching English as a foreign language came out in the 16 th century. A.having written B.to be written C.being written D. written
3.The Olympic games________in 77 B.C.did not include women player until 1912.
A.first playing B.to be first played C. first played D. to be first playing
4.Cleaning women in big cities usually get ________by the hour.
A.pay B.paying C. paid D. to pay
5.As soon as she entered the room,the girl caught sight of the flowers_______by her mother.
A.buying B.being bought C. were bought D. bought
6.The computer center _______last year, is very popular among the students in this school.
A.open B.opening C. have opened D.opened
7.Most of the artists _______to the party were from South Africa.
A.invited B.to invite C.being invited D. had been invited
8.There are five pairs ______,but I’m at a loss which to buy.
A.to be chosen B.to choose from C.to choose D. for choosing
9.The question now _________at the meeting are of great importance.
A.being discussed B.were discussing C. to disscussion D. are discussing
10.Here is the ______ place of the poor villagers________during the war 50years ago.
A.buied , being killed B.buried , having killed C.buring ,being killed D. burying, killed
11. The job is __________. None of us likes to do it.
A. tired B. tiring C. tire D. to be tired
1.D 2. D 3.C 4.C 5.D 6. D 7A 8B 9A 10 D 11B
The design of the writing on the Bb:
Unit 2 New Media
Language points (step4)
Record after teaching:
篇3：3B Unit19(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
通过本单元教学，学生应能熟练地运用表示“提意见和建议”的常用语；复习宾语；了解毛利人的历史和新西兰的历史、地理及风士人情。
Importance and difficulty:
1. words and expressions:
hand down, sign an agreement with, take a degree, share, times, live, go doing
2. sentences:
A. The language which the Maori speak is related to the languages of Tahiti and Hawaii.
B. This is how they keep their way of life alive.
C. In size it is bigger than Guangdong Province, yet has a much smaller population.
D. Apart from their milk, the wool from their coats is used in expensive clothing.
3. Grammar:
A. The search party found the missing child.
B. I enjoy swimming in summer.
C. I’d like to invite you to my birthday party.
D. I’ll get the letter mailed first.
4. Useful expressions:
A. You’d better ( not )……
B. You should / ought to ……
C. I suggest you ……
D. Shall we……
E. How / what about…….
Lesson 73 The Maori of New Zealand
Aims and demands:
Develop the Ss’ reading and speaking ability.
Importance and difficulty:
Have a good and deeper understanding of the text.
Teaching aid; a tape recorder and some slides
Teaching methods: reading
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Presentation
Find out how much the Ss know about New Zealand by asking a few rapid questions around the class.
T: Where is New Zealand?
----- East of Australia.
T: How many islands is New Zealand made up of ?
----- Two large ones.
T: What is the capital?
----- Wellington.
T: What money is used in New Zealand?
----- NZ dollar.
T: Name one sailor who landed on New Zealand several centuries ago.
----- Captain Cook.
T: What are the earliest people of New Zealand called? ( first settlers )
----- Maori .
T: Where did they come from?
----- Polynesia.
T: Where did the first settlers in the USA come from?
… in Australia
Step 2. Fast reading
Read the text fast and find the answers to the questions.
1. From which countries have the people of New Zealand come?
Polynesia / Oceania and Europe , mainly Britain.
2. What parts of Maori life are mentioned in the text?
Kindergartens, customs, way of life, the marae, the meeting house, family life, special days ---- huis, weddings, conferences, deaths and burials.
Step 3. Careful reading
1. Read it and do the reference
( Which words and phrases do the words in bold in the text refer to?)
2. Note making
Step 4. comprehension
1. paper comprehension
Comprehension for Unit 19 Lesson 73(3B) CDDCB BBDCC BD
1. The passage is mainly about ___.
A. why the Maori chose to settle in New Zealand
B. what the European settlers had done to the Maori
C. the history, life-style, languages and customs of the Maori
D. the rare animals and plants in New Zealand
2. The population is mainly made up of ___.
A. the Maori and Europeans
B. the Maori and Kooris
C. the Maori and Pacific Island
D. the Maori, Europeans and Pacific Islanders
3. When the Maori came to settle in New Zealand, they did NOT take ___ with them.
A. the way of life
B. dogs and rats
C. plants like the sweet potato
D. written records of their history
4. In the 19th century the Maori population dropped as a result of ___.
A. their improper way of life
B. the bad weather in the island
C. many fierce battles and diseases
D. lack of money and medicine
5. Which is WRONG about the languages spoken in New Zealand?
A. English is widely used as the official language.
B. The children in New Zealand are greatly encouraged to use the Maori language.
C. At least three kinds of languages are spoken in the country.
D. Maori children can learn to speak English at school.
6. It can be figured out that the population of New Zealand is about ____.
A. 435,000 B. 3,346,100 C. 5,5655,000 D. 170,000
7. We can learn what the text is about from ___.
A. the first paragraph B. the title
C. the last paragraph D. the whole passage
8. What did the Maori not take to New Zealand ?
A. Plants like the sweet potato B. Dogs
C. Rats D. Potatoes
9. How many kinds of languages are spoken in New Zealand according to the text?
A. one B. two C. three D. four
10. The difference between the Maori’s life and the Europeans’ life is in their ___.
A. dining habit B. clothing
C. family size D. living condition
11. What is written in details in the text?
A. Wedding B. Burial
C. Conference D. None of the above.
12. The Maori’s burial service is different from the European’s because ___.
A. they give speeches at the funeral
B. they go to see the dead
C. they share their memories of the dead
D. there’s always someone staying with the dead
2. work book
Bb:
Maori ----- Polynesia
wars
New Zealander European (British )----- Europe / Britain
Pacific Islanders----- Oceanis
Homework
Lesson 74 New Zealand
Aims and demands:
1. Get the Ss to read a text very fast in order to find out what the different sections about .
2. Train the Ss to obtain information from a diagram.
3. Develop the Ss’ reading ability.
Importance and difficulty:
1. Have a deeper understanding of the text.
2. Finish the comprehension exercise
Teaching methods: reading and understanding
Teaching aids : tape recorder and some slides
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Answer the questions:
1. What’s the other name for New Zealand? ----- Aotearoa
2. When did the first traveler reach New Zealand, 950, 1050 or 1150? -----950
3. What did early travelers bring with them?
---- Dogs, rats and plants like the sweet potato.
4. Which is warmer, North Island or South Island? Why?
---- North Island is warmer because it is closer to the equator.
5. What is the name of the earliest New Zealand people? ------Maori.
6. Where did they come from? ----- Polynesia
7. Why did settlers and the Maori fight? ----- Over land rights
Rearrange the following sentences:
1. Following his discoveries many islanders travelled 3,500 kilometres by sea in their narrow boats to this new country between 1100 and 1350.
2. As a result of these wars and diseases, the Maori population fell from 100,000 to 4,200.
3. In Maori history, the first traveler to reach New Zealand in the year 950 was a man called Kupe.
4. By 1840 about 2,000 Europeans, mainly British, had come to settle in New Zealand and the Maori signed and agreement with these settlers.
5. However, in later years there were fierce arguments over land rights and many battles were fought between the settlers and the Maori.
6. He named the country “ Ao-tea-roa”, which means “the land of the long, white cloud”.
7. They took with them dogs, rats and plants like the sweet potato, and settled mainly in North Island where the weather was warmer.
8. Their population has now increased to 435,000 , and today they make up about 13% of the population.
3-6-1-7-4-5-2-8
Step 2. Reading for general understanding ( 3 minutes )
The purpose of this task is to get the Ss to read a text very fast in order to find out what the different sections are about. It is a speed-reading exercise.
Give the Ss a time limit of 3 minutes for this exercise.
Answers: Politics – Agriculture – Sports and free time – Natural beauty – Wildlife
Step 3. Careful reading
1. Read it carefully and finish the paper comprehension exercises.
Reading comprehension for Unit 19 Lesson 74 (3B) ACBCA CABDB BD
1. Which is correct about New Zealand?
A. Before 1893 women couldn’t enjoy the same voting rights just as men.
B. There are about 50 million sheep in the country, more than 14 times the population.
C. People over a certain age can all receive a weekly “old-age pension” nowadays.
D. The government is quite successful in controlling the unemployment rate.
2. Which is not the reason for the question “Why New Zealand is thought to be an important agricultural country”?
A. Animal farming is well developed.
B. There are more sheep than people.
C. Deer are kept for their meat and fur.
D. The main exports are agricultural products.
3. According to the passage, which is most likely to happen in New Zealand?
A. The country imports wood pulp(纸浆).
B. Earthquakes will shake the country.
C. Winter vacation starts from December.
D. Farmers begin to keep deer instead of cattle.
4. There are flightless birds in New Zealand because___.
A. these birds are kept in cages for a long time and lose the ability to fly
B. they caught the strange diseases which settlers took with them
C. they had no natural enemies until the arrival of humans
D. as in Australia, the climate there is quite suitable for birds to live on the land
5. After reading the text you cannot have a picture of ___.
A. the history of New Zealand
B. the climate in New Zealand
C. the agriculture in New Zealand
D. the strange animals in New Zealand
6. What is not true about New Zealand?
A. New Zealand is the first the allow women to vote in the world.
B. New Zealand exports mainly agricultural products.
C. All the people can receive the :old-age pension”.
D. All the people above a certain age can receive the “old-age pension”.
7. What is not included in the exported agricultural products?
A. Pork B. Lamb C. Beef D. Butter
8. What fruit is implied (暗指) in the text?
A. Apple B. Grape C. Pear D. Banana
9. In New Zealand only the kiwi is ___.
A. ancient B. flightless
C. voiceless D. the national bird
10. Who made the birds flightless?
A. The birds themselves. B. Nature.
C. Some biologists. D. Natural enemies.
11. The main school holidays in New Zealand are about ____ month(s).
A. one B. one and a half
C. two D. two and a half.
12. It can be inferred that New Zealand is not an ideal place for ___.
A. having sports B. going sight-seeing
C. keeping cattle and goats
D. developing heavy industry
2. True or False statements.
a. New Zealand is an important agricultural country with a small population. In size it is bigger than Guangdong Province, yet has a much smaller population.
b. In 1893, many countries, including New Zealand, allowed women to vote.
c. In recent times the “ old-age pension” has only been paid to the poorest people because these people are usually very old.
d. The main school holidays are from mid-December till early February because the weather is usually very cold.
e. Tourists from all over the world come to New Zealand because they are attracted by the natural beauty of the country.
f. The Kiwi, New Zealand’s national bird is flight-less because this kind of bird is very huge and it cannot fly.
Answers: T F F F T F
Step 4. Practice Workbook Ex 2
Step 5. Diagram Page 40
Homework
Lesson 73~ 74
Aims and demands: Review the text and deal with the language points.
Importance and difficulty: Get the Ss know the usage of the language points.
Teaching aid: some slides.
Teaching methods: practicing and comparison
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Say as quickly as possible and tell if the following statements are True or False.
1. All the people of New Zealand came from the Islands of Polynesia in the Pacific.
2. The Maori had no written language.
3. By 1840 about 2,000 British had come to settle in New Zealand.
4. Now the Maori makes up about 13% of the population.
5. They have a population of 4, 200.
6. The Maori have given up their own customs and ways of life.
7. New Zealand is an important industrial country with a small population
8. New Zealand was the first nation in modern times to allow women to vote.
9. North Island is famous for its hot springs.
10. New Zealanders like to go swimming, sailing , horse-riding during the months of December-February.
F T F T F F F T T T
Step 2. Useful expressions
Fill in the blanks ( Lesson 73~ 74)
1. Ireland lies to the west of Great Britain. They are separated from each other by the Irish sea.
2. I have bought a dictionary for you and I’ll send it to you by mail as soon as possible.
3. The two tables are of the same size, but they are different in colour.
4. They have made much money out of keeping fish.
5. Apart from the garden, I’m quite satisfied with the house.
6. Their customs were handed down/on from generation to generation.
7. Their population has now increased to 420,000 . That makes up about 13% of the whole population.
8. I insist on him changing his learning methods, but he sticks to it.
9. Can you explain the sentences to me which are marked with red lines?
10. Would you like to stay with us for a few more days?
Step 3. Language points:
Fill in the blanks ( Lesson 73~74)
1. They took with them dogs, rats and plants like the sweet potato and settled mainly in North Island.
要下雨了，请带把雨伞。
我没有带钱，请你借我10 元好吗？
2. The language which the Maori speak is related to the languages of Tahiti and Hawaii.
relate vt. 把 … 联系起来
be related to 和 … 有联系
3. Maori family enjoy sharing what they own and looking after one another.
enjoy doing consider , dislike , finish , go ,mink , practise , risk , suggest , avoid , appreciate, feel like , give up …
4. This is how they keep their way of life alive.
alive
live
living
5. The fish is still alive .
6. This is a live fish .
7. All living things need sunlight , water and air.
8. Although he is sixty, he is still alive.
9. Many people will sleep and eat on the marae during these three days and share their memories of the dead person.
10. She is always happy and never shares his parents’ worries ( 从不分担父母的忧愁 )
我们应该共甘同苦。
We should share joys and sorrows.
11. New Zealand is an important agriculture country with a small population.
中国是一个人口众多的发展中的国家。
China is a developing country with a large population.
12. It is bigger than Guangdong province in size.
13. The two countries are of the same size, but they are different in population.
14. The main exports of the country are wool, lamb, beef butter, forest products, fruit and vegetables ( 水果和蔬菜 ).
15. Some farmers have turned tokeeping deer (养鹿).
16. Whenever he had difficulty, he turned to the teacher for help( 他就去向老师求助 ).
turn to
turn on
turn off
turn down
turn into
turn out
turn over
17. New Zealand wine is of high quality and is sold all over the world.
be of high quality =high-qualified
be of great help =helpful
be of importance =important
be of great value =valuable
18. Apart from their milk, the wool from their coats is used in expensive clothing.
19．Apart from English , he is good at French. ( Besides )
20. There were ten people at the meeting apart from me. (besides)
21. The composition is good apart from a few spelling mistakes. ( except for)
22. North Island is famous for an area of hot spring, some of which throw hot water high into the air.
23. Hongzhou is famous for its West Lake.
24. Helen Keller was famous as an American writer.
Step 4. Correct the mistakes:
1. All things are related with all other things.
(to)
2. Mary and I will share with a room. /
3. Besides from the cost, it will take a lot of time. ( Apart ) from /
4. We have reported the matter to the master but he considers it of no important. (importance )
5. In this factory the workers are paid by hour. ( by the hour ) (by hours)
6. The rice is sold by the weight. /
7. When time went on, Einstein’s theory was proved to be correct. ( As )
8. After he left school he became a teacher , but later he turned to drive. ( driving )
Homework
篇4：3B Unit17(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
通过本单元教学，学生能熟练地运用表示“请求允许”的常用语；复习表语，连习动词的用法；了解海伦 凯勒自强和她的老师的敬业精神。
Importance and difficulty;
Words : born, bring…into touch with, look back , get back, pity
Important sentences:
1. A born teacher, she thought she could turn a deaf-blind person into a useful human being.
2. What a difficult case I must have been to this young teacher!
3. One of the first things Annie did was to teach me how to play.
4. It took great imagination as well as patience for Annie to teach me to speak.
Grammar:
1. Fish goes bad easily in Summer.
2. The news sounds exciting.
3. The shop stays open until 10 p.m.
4. The tree grows taller day by day.
5. The theory proved true.
Useful expressions:
1. May / Can / Could I …?
2. I wonder if I could ……?
3. Do you mind if I…?
4. Sure.
5. Go ahead.
6. I’m sorry, but…
Lesson 65 My teacher
Aims and demands:
Develop the Ss’ reading ability.
Importance and difficulty:
Have a good understanding of the text.
Teaching method: reading
Teaching aids: Tape recorder and some slides.
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming up
Questions:
T: If a person cannot see anything at all, that person is said to be blind.
If he can’t hear anything at all, he is said to be deaf.
Do you know any people who cannot see well or can’t hear well? (Beethoven)
(later) People who are blind can learn to read books that are printed in a special way.
What is the name of this writing system?
------ Braille.
How do people read Braille books?
------ By touching raised dots on the paper with their fingers.
Talk about the picture in the text book.
Step 2. Fast reading
Read it quickly and find the answers to the questions.
1. What was the writer’s problem?
------She was deaf and blind and couldn’t speak.
2. What did the writer learn during this period of her life?
----- She learned the meaning of words, she learnt to play and to laugh.
Step 3. Comprehension
Read it carefully and do the comprehension exercises.
Comprehension exercises for Unit 17 (Lesson 65) 3B CCCBB ABBC
1. Helen Keller seemed simple-minded ___.
A. after Annie came to stay in her house
B. so she was often made fun of by others
C. because she struggled in a silent, dark world
D. just because she couldn’t hear anything
2. Helen Keller came to understand the meaning of the word “water” ____.
A. in the kitchen B. in a river
C. at the well D. in her own house
3. According to Paragraph 3 , the following mistakes EXCEPT “ ____” can be found in the picture at the top the page.
A. Helen was holding a cup, not a jar
B. Helen and her teacher seemed to be indoors, not at the well
C. Helen was smiling, not being moved to tears
D. Annie was holding Helen’s hands, not pumping
4. Annie put the writer’s hand on her face so that Helen could ___.
A. know what she looked like
B. connect the movement of her laughing with its meaning
C. laugh in the same way as she did
D. feel how happy she was when teaching Helen
5. What impressed Helen Keller most was Annie’s __.
A. patience B.wisdom C.imagination D.character
6. Annie Sullivan came to Helen’s house ___.
A. in March, 1887
B. in April, 1887
C. in May, 1887
D. when Helen was 19 months old
7. Which words in Paragraph 4 show that the writer was eager to learn more?
A. reach out B. beg for C. joy D. touch
8. As the writer learned more and more, ___.
A. she could speak
B. she enjoyed learning
C. she could “heard” sounds
D. She became a teacher, too
9. Which happened last?
A. The girl learned how to jump
B. The girl “heard” the sound that one hears on a farm
C. The girl learned words like soil, wood and silk
D. The girl met her teacher, Annie Sullivan
Correct the mistakes in the article if necessary:
Helen Keller was born a healthy normal child in 1880.
However,an illness strikes her when was only 19 months, 1.___
thus leaving her deaf, blind and unable to speak. For little 2.___
Helen, the world suddenly became a dark, frightened place. 3.___
Several years late, Annie Sullivan,a strong-minded and loving 4.___
people, became Helen’s teacher.Miss Sullivan’s teaching 5.___
changed a wild child into useful human being. 6.___
By her help, Helen Keller learned to talk with those 7.___
around her.As she was grew older, she became a writer. 8.___
People benefited her works and her courage.Helen 9.___
Keller died in 1968,and her spirit lives on. 10.___
1. paper comprehension
2. Listen to the tape and explain the phrases .
Step 4. Practice
1. Word study
2. Workbook
Homework: Workbook
Lesson 66 My teacher (2)
Aims and demands:
Develop the Ss’ reading ability.
Importance and difficulty:
Have a good understanding of the text.
Teaching method: reading
Teaching aids: Tape recorder and some slides.
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming up
What do you think of Helen’s teacher?
Step 2. Reading for general understanding
1. Where did the writer’s teacher Annie grow up?
------ In a children’s home and an institution for the blind.
2. What did Annie help the writer to do?
------ to understand words, to get information from books that were not printed in Braille, and to speak.
Step 3. Comprehension
1. Workbook
2. paper comprehension
Reading comprehension for Unit 17 Lesson 66 ( 3A ) CCCDC DBABD D
1. Annie entered an institution to learn Braille ___.
A. in 1866 B. in 1876 C. in 1880 D. in 1872
2. Which of the following is TRUE about Braille?
A. It was Annie who invented Braille.
B. It is special writing system for both the blind and the deaf.
C. Blind people can read by touching raised points on paper.
D. Annie helped to develop the writing system.
3. Why did Annie decide to go to stay with Helen?
A. Because she needed a highly paid job.
B. Because she was deaf-blind herself and sympathized (同情) with Helen.
C. Because it was the very job she had expected.
D. Because she was deeply moved by the letter from Helen’s dad.
4. Annie did NOT help Helen Keller to ___.
A. understand words
B. read books printed in Braille
C. learn how to speak
D. develop the writing system of Braille
5. Which is TRUE about the period when Annie worked as Helen’s teacher?
A. The disabled were all well educated
B. A god many books were printed in Braille.
C. Few people realized the hidden strength in blind people
D. Many deaf-blind children had the chance of being taught to speak like normal people
6. Annie would praise Helen when she ____.
A. decided to go to college
B. had a very difficult time
C. understood the meaning of words
D. did things as well as a normal person
7. Braille is a ____.
A. book for blind people
B. kind of printing for blind people to read
C. copy of reading for the deaf and the blind
D. book for the teacher of the blind people
8. Annie learned Braille because ___.
A. she had been sent to study in an institution for the blind
B. she wanted to teach the blind people
C. she wanted to be the writer’s teacher
D. she loved the blind people
9. How did Annie treat the girl?
A. She always pitied and praised her.
B. She treated her with much care, great patience and encouragement.
C. She treated her just like normal child.
D. She treated her with imagination.
10. How did Annie teach the girl?
A. She spelled words into the girl’s hand.
B. She put the girl’s hands in her face and let the girl feel the movements of her lips and throat.
C. She let the girl hear her voice.
D. Both A land B.
11. What words that Annie said helped the girl to be successful all through her life?
A. Never fail.
B. Never be disappointed.
C. Never forget to read Braille.
D. Keep on beginning.
Step 4. Note making
1. What did Annie learn to do?
----To read/ learn Braille, teach deaf-blind children (and spell out words by hand.)
2. What did Annie teach the writer?
Skills: Understand words, read Braille; speak
Ideas: blind people should be treated like normal human beings; keep on trying until you succeed.
Step 5. Writing
Story telling------ write a passage according to these pictures. You may begin like this:
Ann Sullivan was born in 1866 and became an orphan when she was young. She spent her childhood in a children’s home. Then she went to an institution for the blind. There she learnt…Braille and studied the teaching of deaf-blind children. One day the head of the institution for the blind handed over a letter to Ann. The letter came from Helen Keller’s parents. They wanted to invite a teacher for Helen. Ann was glad to accept the invitation. Ann taught Helen by asking her to touch the teacher’s face, throat and lips so as to know the meaning of the words and to form speech. Later, Helen could say “mother” , which made her parents very happy. In the school, Ann sat beside Helen in every class during her school years. She spelled out for her the things that the teachers taught, because most books were not printed in Braille at that time.
Lesson 65~66 My teacher
I. Describe the life of Annie Sullivan using information from the text.
1. Date of birth
2. Her childhood
3. Her education
4. How she became the writer’s teacher
II. Describe how Annie Sullivan taught the little girl .
1. How did the little girl learn her first word?
2. What had Annie done in order to teach the little girl some water?
3. How did Annie teach the little girl to laugh, to jump and so on?
4. What did Annie encourage the little girl to do and how did Annie help her?
I. suggested answers
1. Annie was born on April 4th, 1866.
2. Her family was very poor. When she was eight years old, her mother died and her father disappeared two years later. Annie, together with her brother, was sent to a children’s home. But unfortunately, her brother died there later.
3.When she was fourteen, she left the children’s home and entered an institution for the blind. There, she learnt Braille, which is a kind of printing that blind people can read by touching groups of raised points that are printed on paper.
4. One day the school where Annie was received a letter. The letter asked for a teacher for a seven-year-old girl who at the age of 19 months had become deaf and blind. Annie considered this was just the kind of demanding job she wanted.
II. suggested answers
1. It happened that one day the little girl was holding a jar while Annie pumped water. As the water flowed onto the little girl’s hand, Annie kept spelling w-a-t-e-r onto the girl’s other hand with her fingers. Suddenly the little girl understood!
2. Many times Annie had tried to spell words into the little girl’s small hands in order to teach her some words.
3. One day Annie came into the girl’s room laughing happily. Then she put the girl’s little hand on her face and spelled l-a-u-g-h. Then Annie touched the girl lightly on her arm and made her burst into laughter. Next Annie took the girl by the hand and taught her how to jump. She then immediately spelled the word j-u-m-p for the girl.
4. Annie encouraged her when the little girl made up her mind to go to college. At school, Annie sat beside her in every class. She spelled out for the little girl the things that the teachers taught. Annie herself read the books to her by spelling into her hand what was written in the books.
Lesson 65~66 My teacher ( Language points )
Aims and demands:
Grasp the important language points
Importance and difficulty: let the Ss know the usage of them
Teaching aids: some slides
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Language points:
Fill in the blanks:(Lesson 65~66)
1. Some people thought the writer was simple-minded because she was deaf and blind.
2. Being a born teacher she could turn a deaf-blind person into a useful human being.
3. I understood what the teacher was doing. That mean: The teacher reached my understanding.
4. I reached out to Annie’s hand to beg for new words.
5. She touched me lightly on the arm and made me burst into laughter.
6. My teacher took me by the hand and taught me how to jump.
7. She also brought me into/in touch with everything that could be felt---- soil, wood, silk.
8. As I look back upon these years, I am struck by Annie’s wisdom.
9. Later, an operation helped her to get back part of her sight, but she remained at the institution for six years more.
10. Annie considered this was just the kind of demanding job she wanted.
11. Annie was among the first to realize that blind people never know their hidden strength until they are treated liked normal human beings.
Never …until 只有… 之后才 ，比 not … until 的否定意味更强
12. I owe thanks to Annie for this priceless gift of speech.
13. My teacher’s gifted instruction lived on after her death.
14. Annie often said, no matter what happens, keep on beginning.
Step 2. Language points ( on the Bb )
1. simple-minded 头脑简单的
absent-minded 心不在焉的
noble-minded 思想高尚的
small-minded 气量小的
2. a born teacher 一位天生的老师
3. reach one’s understanding 达到、触及
reach out ( one’s hand ) for sth. 伸手去够、、、
4. burst into laughter
burst out laughing
5. take sb. by the hand
touch sb. on the arm
hit sb. on the head
hit sb. in the face
v. +sb. on/ in / by + the + part of a body
6. bring…… into / in touch with 使、、、触摸， 使、、、接触
7. look back upon / on
8. strike –struck – struck 给、、、印象
strike –struck –stricken
9. get back return to a former condition 恢复
come back 回来
move backwards or away 后退
regain 收回
10. for six years more
for six more years
for another six years
11. a demanding job 要付出努力的工作
12. not …….until 直到、、、才
never ……until 只有、、、之后才
13. owe……to sb 欠某人某物（钱，债）
owe thanks to sb. for sth. 归功于、、、 对、、、感激
14. live on 继续存在， 流传下去
live on sth. 以、、、为食
15. no matter ……
16. keep on doing 不可接表示静止状态的-ing形式
keep doing
(It’s not allowed to say keep on waiting / sleeping/ sitting)
Step 3.Practice ----- Exercises
Fill in the blanks with a proper word ( Lesson 65~ 66)
1. Beethoven was gifted in music, so he was thought to be a born musician.
2. He reached out and took down a dictionary from the shelf.
3. The boy reached out his hand for an apple.
4. At last they reached a decision. ( an agreement )
5. When she arrived home, she began to do cooking.
6. She touched the baby lightly on the arm in order to make her burst into laughter.
7. The stone hit him on the head, and he was sent to hospital at once.
8. This can bring me into / in touch with many workers.
9. Her love of music brought her into touch with the pop. Star.
10. As we looked back upon the school years we spent together , we were very excited./we were filled with excitement.
11. He looked back upon / on his childhood with mixed feelings.
12. All of us were struck by the professor’s speech.
13. The performance of the singers struck the audience greatly.
14. She has got her strength back after her illness.
15. I will get back at 7 o’clock this evening.
16. I decided to get back the dictionary.
17. I need five minutes more to finish the job.
I need five more minutes to finish the job.
I need another five minutes.
18. Although this was a demanding job which others were unwilling to do, she didn’t refuse it.
19. Don’t get off the bus until it stops. 停车之前不要下车。
Never get off the bus until it stops. 停车之前千万不要下车。
20. ----How much did you owe to the American couple? Shall I pay it for you?
---- Thank you. I can manage it myself.
21. We all owe our happy life to the Party.
22. This custom will live on for centuries.
23. LeiFeng is dead, but he will live on in the hears of the people forever.
24. No matter what you do, do it well.
25. Don’t give up , keep on trying.
26. The teacher kept on asking the students questions until the bell rang.
27. He caught such a bad cold that he kept coughing all morning.
Homework :Do the workbook exercises
篇5：3B Unit18(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
通过本单元教学，学生能熟练地运用“打电话”的常用语；复习第13~17单元的语法项目；了解办公设备现代化和有关放火安全的知识。
Importance and difficulty:
1. words and expressions:
rush sb. off his feet, change, action, repair, work on, fix up
2. important sentences:
A. It is better to ask for help at the beginning rather than to wait until a busy period when everyone is rushed off their feet.
B. What is more, this “information line” operates 24 hours a day.
C. It did not take the firefighters long to pot out the fire, and they at once started to look for causes of the fire.
D. They had to work inside the ship, cutting away old metal, fixing new metal plate, drilling holes, laying electrical and phone wires and fixing new pipes for water and steam.
3. Grammar: review –ing form, to do form and predicative
4. Useful expressions:
A. May I speak to …?
B. Hello. Who’s that speaking?
C. I called to tell you…..
D. Hold on, please.
E. Wait a moment.
F. Can I take ( leave ) a message?
Lesson 69 The office
Aims and demands:
Develop the Ss’ reading ability
Importance and difficulty: Have a deeper understanding of the text.
Teaching aid: tape recorder and some slides
Teaching methods: reading, speaking
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Riddle
I can store and recall as much information as possible, and I can work at a very high speed. In modern times, you can’t work without me. What am I? ( computer )
Step 2. Warming up
T: Where can you find computer?
S: They are mostly found in offices……
T: What else may you expect find in a large modern office?
( write these words on the blackboard and read after the teacher)
the office
fax machine
photocopier
word processor
answering machine
choose the right title for each section
Step 3. Deal with the text
T: What is the fax machine? How does it work?
S: When you place a sheet of paper in a fax machine, the machine “reads” the writing on the page and changes the shapes of letters into electronic signals. It then sends these signals down an ordinary telephone line to another fax machine, which changes the signals back into the shapes of letters.
T: What are the advantages of sending a fax?
Ss: Speed. You can send texts, pictures, diagrams, designs maps and so on .
T: What are the disadvantages of sending a fax?
Ss: It is expensive and not private. ( it can be read by anyone)
T: What is the photocopier? How does it work?
Ss: It can copy a long report and sort the copies and pin them together.
T: What can modern photocopying machines do?
Ss: Modern machines can make the copy bigger or smaller , lighter or darker and copy onto both sides of the paper.
T: What is the word processor? How many parts is the word processor made up of?
Ss: It is made up of three parts . ( a typewriter keyboard, a printer and a computer )
T: What are the advantages of a word processor?
Ss: You can make changes easily and can print a report very quickly.
T: What is the answering machine?
Ss: It is a telephone with a tape recorder.
T: What are the advantage of an answering machine?
Ss: It can receive messages when no one is in the office and can give information.
Step 4. Listening for general understanding
Listen to the tape and write down the headings above the right sections of the text.
Step 5. Comprehension
1. Work book on Page 93
2. Paper comprehension
Homework
Comprehension exercise for Unit 18 Lesson 69 (3B)
I. Main facts: DBAC
Read fast to get a general idea of the passage and fill in the following blanks with one of the four choices below.
A. The word processor
B. The fax machine
C. The answering machine
D. The photocopier
1. ____ is a type of machine used to make copies from newspapers, books or reports.
2. ____ is used to send messages including words , pictures, designs and maps.
3. ____ is a kind of machine used to type materials, save them for future use and make changes if necessary.
4. ____ is used to record telephone messages when the receiver is absent.
II. Further comprehension CCADC DBBD
1. Which is WRRONG about learning to use office equipment?
A. It can make the work in offices go smoothly .
B. It is necessary for beginners in offices.
C. It should be learnt during a busy period.
D. It may help you to get a promotion (普升机会).
2. Which is correct about sending a fax?
A. It can be done only during working hours.
B. Sometimes it might take a week or so.
C. It isn’t a good choice to send top-secret information by fax machine.
D. Reports in English cannot be faxed.
3. A word processor ____.
A. can type a long report and make changes
B. can produce colour copies when necessary
C. can send information both at home and abroad
D. includes a keyboard, a photocopier and a computer
4. ____ can be used to answer a phone call automatically (自动地) when you are out.
A. The photocopier B. The fax machine
C. The word processor D. The answering machine
5. What is one disadvantage of sending a fax?
A. We can send a fax only in the office hours.
B. Message sent by a fax are hard to read.
C. We cannot send secret information through a fax machine.
D. Foreigners cannot understand Chinese letters sent by a fax.
6. What can’t a word processor do?
A. Typing a letter.
B. Printing documents.
C. Coping a on report.
D. Sending picture.
7. What does “be rushed off one’s feet” mean in paragraph 1?
A. be on business B. be busy and tired
C. be tired out D. run out of the office
8. The writer says “The fax has greatly changed office work, especially in China.” Because ____.
A. it can send information quickly
B. it is much easier to change Chinese characters into electronic signals
C. it can do a lot of work for the Chinese people such as making copies, posting letters
D. it makes office work easy to do
9.“The fax has greatly changed office work,especially in China.” The underlined word means ____.
A. properly B. immediately
C. slightly D. particularly
Lesson 70 What causes the fire
Aims and demands:
Aims and demands:
Develop the Ss’ reading ability
Importance and difficulty: Have a deeper understanding of the text.
Teaching aid: tape recorder and some slides
Teaching methods: reading, speaking
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Presentation
Talk about the picture
T: What may cause a fire?
---- smoking, playing with fire ……
T: What is often used to put out the fire?
---- Water, CO……
T: What kind of gas do we breathe?
( Name some of the gases in the air we breathe. )
---- Oxygen, hydrogen……
People may be in danger if there is not enough oxygen. But too much oxygen may cause danger to people , too.
Step 2. Reading for general understanding
Read the text and find out :
1. Where did the fire happen?
----- In a ship which was in a port in Scotland for repairs.
2. What started the fire?
----- A worker fixed the air-line to a supply of oxygen instead of compressed air.
Step 3. Problem solving
See which pair of Ss can find out the correct answer before the others.
---- The man actually connected the air-line to the oxygen supply line.
Step 4. Comprehension
1. put these events in the correct order
9-12-6-13-1-4-11-8-3-10-14-7-5-2
2. workbook Ex I
3.reading comprehension
Comprehension for Unit 18 Lesson 70 (3B) BDBCD ACAB
1. An extra team of men were sent to repair the ship because ___.
A. this ship was a huge ship
B. this ship needed to be repaired quickly
C. they were skilled workers
D. there was a lot of work to do
2. The man took a long time to connect the rubber pipe to the air supply pipe because ___.
A. he smoked a cigarette during the working hours
B. he had to drill holes and lay electrical wires first
C. he found something strange in the air and stopped to have a check
D. the fittings did not match
3. There was a strange smell when one man lit a cigarette because ___.
A. the cigarette had the smell itself
B. the smell was caused by the oxygen
C. there was something wrong with the man’s nose
D. the ship was beginning to burn
4. Which of the following is true?
A. The fire caused great damage to the ship.
B. There was an explosion happened inside the ship.
C. No damage was done to the deck at the end of the ship.
D. The fuel on ship caused the fire.
5. What measures were taken to prevent a fire accident?
A. Talks on safety were given to new workers.
B. Smoking was not allowed in the workplace.
C. All the supply lines and taps were marked with signs and warnings.
D. Both A and C.
6. In the ship the “air-line” provides ____.
A. compressed air B. water and steam
C. fuel and gas D. fresh air
7. When the fire broke out, ____.
A. some men sounded the fire alarm
B. all the men jumped into the sea
C. most of the men managed to escape
D. they fought against the fire
8. The men’s cigarettes burned strangely and tasted bad because ____ .
A. there was too much oxygen inside
B. something was wrong with the cigarettes
C. oxygen had a strong smell
D. lots of compressed air was inside
9. What was the real cause of the fire?
A. The third person struck a match for a cigarette.
B. The air-line was fixed to a supply line of oxygen instead of compressed air.
C. Too many workers smoked in the ship.
D. The fittings the workers had used to repair the ship didn’t match.
4. slides
Rearrange the following events ( Lesson 70 )
a. It took him some time to connect the long rubber pipe to the air supply pipe that ran round the port, but at last it was done and as a result work was able to progress much faster.
b. Half an hour later, another man struck a match for a cigarette and this time the whole of the inside of the ship caught fire.
c. They had to work inside the ship.
d. A navy ship was in a port in Scotland for repairs.
e. It was important to carry out the work quickly, so an extra team of men were asked to work on the repairs one evening.
f. Another man lit a cigarette but it burnt strangely and so he too put it out.
g. One man was told to fix up an “air-line” to provide compressed air for the machines they were using.
h. After three hours, the men stopped for a meal break. When work continued, one man lit a cigarette as he was working, but, finding it had a strange taste, he put it out.
d-e-c-g-a-h-f-b
Step 5. practice ----- Ex 2
Homework
Lesson 69~70
Translate the following sentences (Lesson 69~70)
1． 一旦他作出决定就不会改变。
Once she made the decision, she wouldn’t change her mind.
2． 我到过那儿一次。
I have been there once.
3． 这是她父亲曾经工作过的地方。
This is the place where her father once worked.
4． 该去的是約翰而不是杰克。
John should go rather than Jack.
5． 这些鞋子穿起来很舒服，但并不漂亮。
These shoes are comfortable rather than pretty.
I love swimming rather than skating.
I decided to write rather than ( to ) telephone.
We ought to check up, rather than just accept what he says / accepting what he says.
6． 与其让这些蔬菜烂掉，他宁愿以一半的价格把他们卖掉。
Rather than allow the vegetables to go bad, he sold them at half price.
Would / had rather do sth than do…
Would / had rather sb. did…
I would rather you knew that now than afterwards.
7． 他们播种忙得个不可开交。( rush sb. off one’s feet )
They are rushed off their feet with the sowing.
8． 没有必要对这个计划作出修改。
It is not necessary to make any changes in the plan.
9． 我觉得是我该采取行动的时候了。
I felt it ( was ) time for me to take ( an ) action.
10． 我没有去看望王先生，因为那天下大雨. 再说，我身边也没有他的地址。
I didn’t go to see Mr. Smith , because it was raining hard. What’s more, I didn’t have his address.
11． 中国有许多人正在从事一项“希望工程”，帮助穷苦孩子们上学。
Many people in China are working on a “Project Hope” , helping poor children to go to school.
12． 他在致力于发明一种办公用的新式机器。
He is working on inventing a new type of machine for office work.
13． 他不得不工作到六十多岁。
He has to work on until he was sixty.
14． 政府给无家可归的人提供食宿。
The government provided food and shelter for those who were homeless / the homeless.
The government supplied (provide ) the homeless with food and shelter.
15． 他们在忙着安装电灯。
They are busy fixing up the lights.
Translate:
A. He fixed up the broken chair. 修理
B. I can easily fix you up for the night. 给…... 安排住处
C. We have fixed up a date for the picnic. 确定
D. I’ve fixed up a visit to the theater for next Friday. 安排
E. Do I have to fix up to go to the party. 打扮
16． 花了我一整天的时间修理这台彩电。
It took me a whole day to fix up the colour TV set.
17． 你应该争取尽快赶到那儿。
You should try to get there as soon as you can.
You should try to get there as soon as possible.
18． 许多人逃出大火着火了。
Many people escaped from the big fire, with their clothes on fire.
19． 老师走进教室，手里拿着一本书。
The teacher came into the classroom, with a book in his hand.
( book in hand )
20． 她似乎（已经）听到了这件事。
She appeared / seemed to have heard about it already.
It seemed / appeared that she had already heard about it.
21． 房子烧了，准是有什么原因。
The house was burned down. There must have been some cause.
22． 这婴孩昨夜哭个不停，他准是得了病。
The baby kept crying last night . He must have been ill.
篇6：写作常用句型(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
1.there be
There is a tall tree in front of our teaching building.
There are some students playing football on the playground.
2. think/find it + adj for sb to do sth
(1).I find it necessary to take down notes while listening.
(2).I feel it important to have some working experience.
(3).I found it impossible for me to work out all the problems in such a short time.
3. not…until
(1).I didn’t know the truth until she told me what happened.
(2).Yesterday I didn’t go to sleep until midnight.
4. Some…others
(1).Everyone is busy in classroom. Some are reading, others are writing.
(2).There are many foreign students in our class. Some of them are from Europe, others come from America.
5. not only…but also
(1).In just three years, she had not only finished all the lessons, but also received her doctor’s degree.
(2).Forests can not only fresh the air but also reduce noises.
6. such…that / so…that
(1).He is such a good student that everyone likes him.
(2).We were so deeply moved that we could not fall asleep that night.
7.too…to…
(1).They were too angry to say a word that day.
(2).He is too young to go to school.
8. in order to
(1).He worked very hard in order to realize his dream.
(2).In order to get there on time,we set off early in the morning.
9.be about to do sth when…/be doing sth when…
(1).I was about to go out when the telephone rang.
(2).I was walking in the street when I heard a lady cry ”Help,help“.
10.used to
(1).He used to live in Shanghai.
(2).There used to be a tree in front of my house.
11.see/hear/watch/find sb do sth/doing sth
(1).I heard someone laughing.
(2).I saw him put the key in the lock,turn it and open the door.
12. have some difficulty in doing sth/with sth
Do you have any difficulty in understanding spoken English?
13.be busy doing sth/with sth
He was busy getting ready for his journey.
练习一：根据上下文关系用连接词把下列各句连接起来，组成一个单句、并列句或复合句。
1.a) Go to see the doctor at once.
b) Your cold may get worse.
Go to see the doctor at once, or your cold may get worse.
2. a) Alice was the first to complete her paper.
b) Alice made quite a few mistakes in her paper.
Alice was the first to complete her paper, but she made quite a few mistakes in it.
3. a) We were about to start off last night.
b) The phone in the living room began to ring.
We were about to start off last night when the phone in the living room began to ring.
4. a) Unfortunately, John’s car broke down on the way home.
b) John had to stop a car for a lift.
Unfortunately, John’s car broke down on the way home, so he had to stop a car for a lift.
5). a) He has made great progress in his studies.
b) All the teachers praise him.
He has made such great progress in his studies that all the teachers praise him.
6. a) Some people waste food.
b) Other people haven’t enough food.
Some people waste food, while others haven’t enough food.
7. a) It’s too late to go to the cinema now.
b) I have an important meeting to attend after lunch.
It’s too late to go the cinema now. Besides, I have an important meeting to attend after lunch.
8. a) Your aunt has no other thought but what is best for you.
b) I have no other thought, either.
Neither your aunt nor I have any other thought but what is best for you.
练习二：1、用but,then,instead,the next moment,when填空：
The accident happened at 7:15 on the morning of February 8, . I was walking along Park Road towards the east when an elderly man came out of the park on the opposite side of the street. Then I saw a yellow car drive up Third Street and make a sudden right turn into Park Road. The next moment the car hit the old man. He fell down with a cry. But the car didn’t stop to save the old man. Instead，it drove off at great speed.
2、用at last,then,so,up to now,that,when填空：
Don’t Lose Your Courage
Never shall I forget the first English lesson given by Miss Liu. On that day, when she entered the classroom, we found that she was a young and beautiful lady with a big smile on her face. Then she introduced herself saying that we should call her Miss Liu instead of Teacher Liu, a moment later, she let all of us go to the blackboard and say something about ourselves in English in turn. When it was my turn, I felt so shy and fearful that I didn’t dare to say a word before the class. She came up to me and said kindly, “Don’t be afraid. I believe you can do it. Come and have a try.” My face turned red when I heard that. At last, I went to the blackboard and was able to do it quite well. She praised for what I had done. Up to now, I can still remember her words in the first English lesson: “Practice makes perfect. Don’t lose your courage when you meet with difficulties. Try on and on until you succeed.”
篇7：Listening for workbook(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Part 1
Before a record is accepted by the Guinness Book of World Records, it must pass the following tests. First of all, there must be at least two witnesses. The witnesses must be known to the public, so they can’t be simply friends or members of your family. In fact, relatives are not allowed to act as witnesses to a Guinness world record. The best witnesses are usually people who work for the city or government, such as policemen, judges, or leaders. The witnesses must read the Guinness rules before the attempt is made, and then write and sign their statements. Second, you must be able to prove that you broke the record in some other way, usually by sending in an article about the attempt from the local newspaper. It’s also important to take pictures of the record attempt and film it if possible. If you want to break a record, the most important thing to remember is to ask for the rules before you do anything. The Guinness Book of World Records has rules for all sorts of attempts, and you will need to know exactly what you should and shouldn’t do. The editors at Guinness can also help you by giving you the latest information about a certain record. If you are trying to break an existing record, you need to know if the record has already been broken. If you are trying to set a new type of record, you need to find out if the editors will accept it. If the record is dangerous, you must know about strict safety rules and follow them. There are many strange records in the Guinness Book of World Records, but the editors will not allow any records that are very dangerous.
Part 2
Even if you do set a new record, it isn’t sure that your record will be included in the book. There are a few basic rules for Guinness records. First, officials must be able to measure the record. Second, as mentioned before, independent witnesses must observe the record and send in a statement. Third, a record must be objective. That means that a record such as “most beautiful girl” or “best friend” won’t be accepted. A record should also be interesting to as many people as possible. Records that have to do with things that happen only once, such as “the first…,” won’t end up in the book. It is also important that the editors can make rules so that anyone who wants to try to break the record will have a fair chance. If these basic rules are met, the record will be accepted as a Guinness world record. However, a record won’t appear in the book unless it is chosen by the editors. The editors of the Guinness Book of World Records have to make many difficult decisions. People are very creative and send in all kinds of exciting records. It isn’t always easy to choose the right ones for the book. The book is read by people all over the world, and the editors must select records that represent the spirit of the Guinness Book of World Records-that is, amazing feats and achievements that show just how wonderful the world of world records is!
Unit2
LISTENING TEXT
H: Henry M: Mike, an elephant hunter
H: Mike, what was it that you heard about my brother’s journey?
M: I heard that he went looking for Solomon’s Mines.
H: Solomon’s Mines? Where are they?
M: I don’t know. I know where they’re said to be.
H: Tell me, please!
M: Well, South African elephant hunters usually don’t care much for the life and culture of native blacks. But sometimes you meet a man who takes the trouble to listen to them, and understand the history of this dark land. It was such a man who first told me the story of Solomon’s Mines, now thirty years ago. His name was Brown. I listened carefully to him, for I was young at the time, and this story of an ancient civilisation and its treasures took a great hold upon my imagination. He asked me whether I’d ever heard of the Suliman Mountains up in the northwest of the country. He said that that’s where Solomon really had his mines, his diamond mines. I asked him how he knew that. He answered that an old witch had told him all about it. She said that there were great wizards among the people who lived across those mountains. The wizards had learnt what they knew from white men a long time ago. They also had the secret of a wonderful mine of “bright stones”.
H: So did you go and look for that place?
M: No, I didn’t. I laughed at this story at the time, but I didn’t forget it. Twenty years later I heard something more about it from a man passing through. When he left he said that if we would ever meet again he would be the richest man in the world. One evening, while sitting in front of my tent, I saw a figure, apparently that of a European, for it wore a coat, coming out of the desert. The figure crept along on its hands and knees, then it got up and walked a few yards on its legs, only to fall and crawl again. Who do you suppose it turned out to be?
H: That man, of course.
M: Yes, or rather his skeleton and a little skin.
“Water! please, water!”he begged.
I gave him water with a little milk in it, and then he fell asleep. He had a fever and in his dreams he talked about Suliman’s Mountains, the diamonds, and the desert. “There it is!”he cried, pointing with his long, thin arm, “But I shall never reach it, never. No one will ever reach it!”
Unit 3
Listening text
Part 1
(Woman, Australian accent)
Bush fire
An Australian woman is talking on a radio programme about her escape from the bushfires near Sydney in 1994.
The first thing I did when I woke up in the morning was to watch the TV news. I could see that the situation was bad, and they showed a map where the fires were. Outside in the garden I couldn’t see the sun, as the sky was full of smoke.
I decided I’d better prepare to leave. My daughters were staying in town and my husband was abroad, so it was up to me to decide what to do. I packed a suitcase of clothes and another case of useful things. It’s difficult in this kind of situation to know what to take with you. So, I took my passport and my bankbook and all the money I had. I took also my diary, my address book and my camera. Finally I took our wedding photographs, as I didn’t want to lose those.
Out in the garden the sky was getting blacker, and the wind which had been blowing hard for two days was getting stronger. I could now hear the sound of the fire which was only a mile or two away. I was expecting the police to drive by and warn people. Suddenly I noticed little pieces of burning wood falling out of the sky. They landed on the ground and started to burn the grass. I didn’t wait a moment longer. I got into my car and drove down the road. The smoke was thick and at times it was difficult to see the road. Animals were running across the road, trying to escape the fire. There were dogs, a few horses, and lots of kangaroos. Five miles down the road I came to a long bridge over the river. Once on the other side, I knew I was safe.
Part 2
(A = Radio announcer; male or female, Australian accent)
A: Good morning, listeners. Still hot and dry today and we would like to remind you that people in the following areas may need to leave their homes: Green Hill, Jonestown, and Wesley. The fire is still burning and we advise you to stay tuned for more information. You may have to leave the area if the winds change, so please take the following actions:
If you have a car, check that it is working properly and park it where you can easily get to it. Close all doors, roll up the windows, and leave the keys in the car. Put emergency supplies in the car. You will need water, some food, a first-aid kit, a radio and a flashlight. Put important documents, such as your bankbooks and passports, in a plastic bag.
Make sure that you are wearing good clothes. Put on heavy shoes, long pants, a long-sleeved shirt and gloves. Bring a towel that you can use to protect your face.
Call a friend or relative who lives in a safe area and ask if you can stay with them.
Close all windows and doors in your house and remove the curtains.
Turn off the gas.
Fill buckets, bathtubs, and other containers with water.
If you are asked to leave the house, you must do so immediately. Bring only what you need and tell someone when you leave and where you are going. Try to stay calm and listen to the radio for instructions. Choose a road that looks safe and keep an eye on the fire and the wind.
Unit 4
Listening text
G = Guide V = Visitor
V: Excuse me, can you tell us something about the history of Kew Gardens?
G: Botanical gardens have a long history in the UK, beginning with the foundation of the Oxford Botanical Garden in 1621. Kew Gardens was developed (built) in the 16th century. International importance came under the guidance of Sir Joseph Banks. He changed Kew from a royal collection of strange plants to a serious scientific research centre.
V: So what is the purpose of Kew Gardens today?
G: The motto forming the inspiration for Kew Gardens is simple but clear: “All life depends on plants.” The main purpose of Kew is to come to a better management of the earth’s environment. We try to do that by increasing knowledge and understanding of plants. After all, they form the basis of life on earth.
V: How can Kew Gardens reach this goal?
G: Kew wants to achieve this by:
developing a global collection of plants and show it to the public;
undertaking worldwide research into botany;
supporting the conservation of plants in the UK and overseas;
and informing and educating the wider public about Kew Gardens and their work.
V: If I may ask, what is there to see at Kew Gardens?
G: Kew has many plants in glasshouses and more than 20 different specialized gardens, such as the Rock Garden, Rose Garden, Woodland Garden and the Winter Garden.
V: I hear that they also have a Grass Garden. What can be interesting about that?
G: The Grass Garden shows a great number of different grasses. In economic sense, (Economically speaking) the grass family is one of the most important plant families. It provides most of our food, feeds our cattle and provides building materials such as bamboo and straw. Only three different bamboos are shown in the Grass Garden. More can be found in the Bamboo Garden. Over 120 species of bamboo planted there come from all over the world.
V: Well, I’m afraid that’s a bit boring for me. I think I’d have a look at the Rose Garden.
G: Of course, the Rose Garden attracts most visitors. It has 54 rose beds, each containing a different variety of rose. The roses are all arranged by the colour of their flowers. Shades of red are closest to the Palm House, while the lighter-coloured roses, such as the white and yellow ones, are planted near the edge of the garden.
Unit 5
Listening text
Part 1
Harry, Jenny, and Brian are discussing their advertisement plans for a new product.
H = Harry; J = Jenny; B = Brian
H: So, how much money have we got to spend?
B: Seven hundred and fifty thousand pounds. Jenny, what do you suggest?
J: I suggest that we use mainly TV, cinema, and print.
B: I see, magazines and newspapers. Can you give us your reasons?
J: Sure. First, our product looks good. So it would be a waste of money to use radio. Second, our product moves well, and it moves fast. So I want people to see it on the roads in our ads, going through the hills, that kind of thing.
B: What about advertising boards?
J: No. I prefer magazines and newspapers, and we haven’t got the money to do all three. So people will see the ad on TV and in the cinema. Then they’ll be able to read about it when they’re sitting down, reading their newspapers and magazines.
H: I get the idea. Then customers can read the detailed product information and check the prices.
J: Exactly.
H: So no advertising boards. When do you want the advertising to start, Brian?
B: May the 1st. That gives us three months to run to August 1st when most people like to buy their new cars.
J: I see. So we’re talking about three months. And have you thought of a headline?
H: What about this one: “The new Century 505 - the car you always promised yourself”?
Part 2
Four people in an advertising firm are discussing a future advertising programme.
B= Bob
A: OK. Our plan is to produce an advertisement for this computer which is made by one of China’s biggest computer producers, FFQ Computer Corporation. Any ideas?
B: I think it would be a good idea to have comments from people who are already using it. They can express their satisfaction with the product.
C: Well, maybe that’s not such a good idea. Do you think managers want to read what users think about a new piece of office equipment?
D: I agree with Bob. I think we should have a picture of the computer and give a description of the product.
B: I’m afraid I can’t agree with you. That’s a good way of giving information, but it’s not a good way of persuading people. For one thing, it’s boring, and people aren’t going to read an ad that looks boring. For another thing, one computer looks very like another. People aren’t going to remember the name of the product.
A: So what exactly are you suggesting?
B: I suggest that we ask users of this machine what they think about it. We can photograph them using it too. Then we can put their comments at the top of the advertisement in big print. We can bring in some humour too. People enjoy reading humorous ads.
D: The disadvantage with carrying out interviews is that it may take a long time. No problem, we can do some telephone and email interviews with our users.
C: How can we find out who are using these computers?
A: Easy. I’ll ask the company for a list of recent customers.
Unit 6
LISTENING TEXT
R = Reporter O = Mrs Ouyang
Mrs Ouyang runs a little restaurant in southern Yunnan. Five years ago she lost everything in an earthquake. Listen to her experiences and how the restaurant was rebuilt.
R: Mrs Ouyang, five years ago a heavy earthquake struck this area and destroyed almost all buildings in this village. The earthquake also hit your house badly. Can you tell us what happened?
O: In two weeks’ time it will be exactly five years ago that the earthquake destroyed our village. My husband and I had been running a restaurant for several years. Before that, he had worked as a taxi driver. All his savings had gone into the restaurant, and on that terrible day everything was destroyed. My husband was killed in the second shake. He shouldn’t have gone back into the restaurant. It was a stupid thing to do, but he thought he would have enough time to save a few important things.
R: What happened in the weeks after the quake and how did you get over it?
O: I moved to a nearby village with my sister. The death of my husband was of course the worst thing. I cried for many days. I wished I had died in his place. I lost all hope of a happy life.
R: What made you decide to reopen the restaurant?
O: There were two reasons. First of all, I had to make a living. But more important, I did it to honour my husband. The restaurant had been his great achievement. I felt there was no better way to remember him than by reopening the restaurant and continuing the business.
R: Was it easy to reopen the restaurant?
O: No, it wasn’t. My friends and relatives put some money together, a total of about 30,000 yuan. I received 8,000 yuan of financial aid from the local government and 25,000 from a foreign disaster relief organisation. I was also able to take out a loan of 50,000 from the bank. With the money and all the help I got, I opened the restaurant on the same location where our old one had been.
R: Do you often think about the disaster?
O: Yes, I do. I thought the earthquake was the day my life ended, even though I had not lost my life. But look here, I managed. I did not know I had the strength to pull through.
Unit 7
LISTENING TEXT
S = Cook O = Oliver B = Mr Bumble
Nine-year-old Oliver lives in a workhouse where the boys are given three meals of thin porridge a day, with an onion twice a week, and half a roll on Sundays. The workhouse is run by Mr Bumble, the headmaster. The room in which the boys are fed, is a large stone hall. The cook, assisted by one or two women, uses a big spoon to pour the porridge into the bowls. One spoonful, and no more -- except on holidays, when two spoonfuls and a piece of bread are given.
The bowls never need to be washed. The boys clean them with their spoons till they shine again, and when they have performed this operation, which never takes very long, the spoons being almost as large as the bowls, they sit staring at the cook. Boys usually have good appetites. Oliver Twist and his companions suffered this slow starvation for three months. At last they got so wild with hunger, that one boy, who was tall for his age, said to his companions, that unless he had another bowl of porridge per day, he was afraid he might some night eat the boy sleeping next to him. He had a wild, hungry eye; and they all believed him. The boys hold a meeting, casting lots who should walk up to the cook after supper that evening, and ask for more. The lot falls to Oliver Twist.
The evening arrived; the boys took their seats. The cook served the porridge, and the boys prayed. The porridge was eaten, and the boys whisper to each other, and nod at Oliver, while his next neighbours push him. Child as he is, he is desperate with hunger, and feels miserable. He rises from the table and advancing to the cook, bowl and spoon in hand, he says:
O: Please, sir, I want some more.
C: What!
O: Please, sir, I want some more.
The cook was a fat, healthy man; but he turned very pale. Amazed, he stares at Oliver before aiming a blow at his head with the large spoon and screaming for the headmaster.
C: Mr. Bumble, I beg your pardon, sir! Oliver Twist has asked for more!
B: For MORE! Calm down, sir, and answer me clearly. Do I understand that he asked for more, after he had eaten his supper?
C: He did, sir.
B: That boy will be hung. I know that boy will be hung. I was never more convinced of anything in my life, than that that boy will come to be hung.
Unit 8
Listening text
1 Part 1
(Female; since this is supposed to be a Chinese student, I suggest that we use a Chinese person who speaks English well.)
A: I am an International Business major at a Finance and Economics University. My major courses focus on international trade and finance, but English is also very important. Many of the textbooks we use are in English and some of our courses are taught in English, either by Chinese professors or visiting foreign teachers. At first, it was very difficult to understand what the teachers were saying. We take most of our courses here in China, but we also have the opportunity to study abroad for one year. Our university cooperates with universities in Europe, New Zealand, and the USA. I would like to study in Europe, perhaps in Germany or France, because I believe that the European Union will be an important business partner for China in the future. If I study in Germany or France, I can also learn a third language, which would be very useful.
The most difficult thing, in my opinion, is to understand all the technical terms. I was pretty good at English in middle school, but we only learned everyday English. Now I have to read long articles and textbook chapters that deal with difficult issues. Some of the words are only used in business, so most dictionaries don’t explain what they mean. I sometimes fell as if I had two majors-English and business. First I have to understand what the terms mean in Chinese, then learn the English words for them. Still, I like my major and I think that it will help me find a good job. My dream is to work in a Chinese import and export company and travel around the world.
2 Part 2
(Male; since this is supposed to be a Chinese student, I suggest that we use a Chinese person who speaks English well.)
B: Before I went to college, I thought that university life would be fun and easy. My friends told me that we would have lots of fun once we passed the entrance exam. If anyone ever says that to me again, I will let them know how wrong they are! Sure, it’s fun to be a university student, but it is also hard work. We have a lot of homework, and we have to write many papers and essays. I’m an English major, so most of my courses are about English. The first two years, the courses were similar to studying in middle school. We learnt more grammar and vocabulary, but we also had spoken English classes. In my junior year, I began studying other courses. I chose Linguistics because I am interested in languages, and I also took a few non-major courses. I like English best, but I know that I also need to learn more about other subjects.
Studying a language in college is different from studying other subjects. It is difficult to improve, so you have to spend a lot of time on reading, writing, and speaking. You almost have to “live in English,” that is, you have to use English all the time, not just in class. Our university offers a lot of help: there are many books, DVDs, and tapes that we can borrow, and there are different activities that help us practice our English, such as debate competitions, the university radio station, and conferences and meetings. I decided to become a teaching assistant for one of my foreign teachers. As a teaching assistant, I meet with a small group of freshman students every week. The meeting is their homework for their speaking class, and my job is to lead the discussion and help the students with their English. It is a wonderful way to practice my English-you learn a lot when you have to help others-and I enjoy making friends with students from other majors.
Unit 9
Listening text
Part 1
In , the World Health Organisation, WHO, warned of a possible outbreak of another serious disease which may be even more deadly than SARS. The WHO believes that it is likely that bird flu will spread to human beings in the next few years. If it does, up to seven million (see note 1)people could die from the disease.
Diseases like bird flu are caused by viruses, that is, tiny things which change and become more dangerous over time. When a new type of a common virus changes, it may be able to get past the body’s immune system. If that happens, humans are in great danger until a cure or treatment becomes available.
There have always been viruses and people have always gotten sick, of course, but as we saw with (???What’s your question? As explained in the next sentence, SARS spread very quickly etc.) SARS, the situation is more difficult today. People travel more than ever before, which means that the diseases can spread quickly and across large areas - in fact the whole world.
Scientists are already working on drugs that will prevent or limit the effect of a new virus, but the process takes time. It is just as important to make sure that countries, especially poor countries, are prepared to deal with the disease. New diseases usually affect poor areas the most, so we must help develop health care in all countries.
One reason for the WHO warning is that big new diseases tend to happen regularly, usually every 20 to 30 years. In the 20th century, there have been three large outbreaks: the Spanish flu in 1918-19, which killed between 20 and 40 million people(note 2); the Asian flu of 1957, killing one million (note 4) people; and the 1968 Hong Kong flu, which killed about 750,000 people (note 3). It has been 36 years since the Hong Kong flu, so scientists and doctors think that the next deadly challenge is just around the corner.
Part 2
There are three kinds of viruses that cause flu: A, B, and C. Type A is the virus that causes bird flu. As the name suggests, the virus is usually found in birds. It can also infect humans, pigs, horses and other animals. There are several different kinds of the Type A virus. (Only Type A has several kinds? Yes. Only type A has “subtypes,” but both B and C are “groups” of viruses. If you think it is confusing, or unnecessary, you can delete the stc. Influenza Type B Unlike influenza A viruses, these viruses are not classified according to subtype. Influenza Type C These viruses are not classified according to subtype.) Type B viruses are usually found only in human beings. They have been responsible for some flu outbreaks, but they are not considered as dangerous as Type A viruses. Type C viruses are not considered very serious. They are found in humans, but do not cause serious illnesses.
The most dangerous thing about the flu viruses is that they change. When humans are infected with a virus, the body develops a defense for it. If viruses didn’t change, we would not have the worry about the viruses we know. Unfortunately, every new generation of virus is slightly different from the older ones. That means that our body doesn’t recognise the virus and can’t protect itself from it. This kind of change is not very fast and doctors and scientists can change the medicines we use to help prevent the virus from causing serious illness.
The other kind of change, however, happens very quickly and is more serious. If a virus changes in this way and becomes a new type of virus, the body is defenceless. The virus can spread easily from one person to another and reach far across the world. Fortunately, this kind of change doesn’t happen very often.
The WHO now believes that a new, dangerous virus will appear soon and that we must prepare the best we can. We must improve health care in all countries and cooperate with each other so that we can discover and prevent new viruses.
Unit 10
Listening text
G: Welcome to the Mark Twain House and Museum. Mark Twain is America’s most famous writer. Do you know any books written by Twain?
S1: Ehm, The Adventures of Tom Sawyer and eh, the Adventures of Huckleberry Finn.
G: Yes, very good. Twain wrote these books while he lived in this house. He loved the house because it reminded him of his youth, and from the window he could hear the sounds of his own children and their friends playing on the banks of the river.
M: Is the house still the way it was when Twain lived here?
G: Yes. The house has been restored to the way it was when Twain lived here, between 1881 and 1891.
M: How long will the tour take?
G: The tour takes about two hours, and the group must stay together. Please, don’t touch anything.
M: Oh, can you make it a bit shorter? I don’t think the kids will stay quiet for such a long time.
G: Fine. Entering the house from the south, we are now in the hall. Immediately on the right is the drawing room, a rather formal room, where Twain received guests. The door on the left leads to the guest bedroom. The two doors in front lead to the rooms on the north side of the house: the dining room through the door on the right, and the library through the door on the left. Let’s first take a look in the library.
S2: I think I don’t want to see the library.
M: Shut up, Dave.
G: As you can see, the room called the library does not very much look like a library as we know it. The library is one of the nicest rooms in the house. Here, Twain recited poetry or read aloud stories to his family and friends.
S1: Look, they’ve got greenhouse.
G: Yes. The small room on the west side, off the library was filled with large, green plants. Twain’s daughters called it The Jungle. From the library, we can pass on to the dining room. Twain and his family had most of their meals here. The kitchen is located off the dining room, to the north.
M: Can we have a look at the kitchen, please?
G: I’m afraid the kitchen is closed to the public until the summer of next year.
M: Oh, what a pity.
G: Let’s go and have a look upstairs.
M: I think the children are getting tired. What is there to be seen upstairs?
G: The second floor has three bedrooms, another guest room and the schoolroom. The third floor has a servants’ room, a guest room and the largest of the rooms, where Twain wrote his books.
M: Shall we go upstairs?
S1: I want to go to the bathroom.
G: You can have a look at the bathroom on the second floor.
S1: Can we use it?
G: I’m afraid not.
M: Shall, we just go and have a look at the school room then?
S2: No, thanks. I want to go home.
M: Well, OK then. Let’s visit the museum shop. Then you can go to the toilet, and we can eat an ice-cream before we go home.
Unit 11
LISTENING TEXT
Dialogue 1
T: Teacher J: Jeff
T: Take a seat, Jeff. What can I do for you?
J: Well, I’d like to have another talk with you about my career choices.
T: If I’m remembering well (not wrong), you are going to be a sales assistant, right?
J: Yeah, well. I’ve changed my mind again. I want to become a vet. I really like working with animals.
T: Oh, but that’s quite a big change from what we talked about last time. Are you sure about this?
J: Yes. I think working as a vet I can earn much better wages.
T: But Jeff, look here. You aren’t that good at maths, and last time you said going to college was not for you. How will you be able to do that? (The purple parts seem to be not closely related to becoming a vet?)
J: I will work very hard.
T: Listen, Jeff. This may be a disappointment, but I think this is not a good idea. I know it sounds good, but it requires many years of study to become a vet. I’m not sure whether you can manage that. Think it over, will you?
Dialogue 2
L: Lizzy M: Ma Lin
L: Hi, Helen. How are you doing? It’s only a few more months.
M: A few more months? What do you mean, Lizzy?
L: The exams, of course! Aren’t you getting nervous?
M: Nervous, why?
L: Well, don’t you think it’s all (they’re) important?
M: It’s ( They’re) important, but why should I worry? I think I’ve always been quite a good student, so I think (delete this?) I have nothing to fear.
L: Quite good is not good enough, you know. If you want to go to Peking University, you’ve got to come out first.
M: I don’t want to go to Peking University. I want to go to a local university, here in our own province.
L: How can you say that? You’ve got to try your best.
M: I will, but I’ve already made up my mind. I don’t want to live in a big city far from home. Even if I get a top score, I will stay here. You know, studying at a local university you’ll have less competition and better chances of graduating as the No 1. (more opportunities)
Unit 12
Listening text
Part 1
Conversation at a private education institute between Julian (J) and a female teacher (T)
J: Good morning, I saw your advertisement in the paper for Chinese courses and I dropped by to get some more information.
T: Great, which course are you interested in -General Chinese or Business Chinese?
J: Well, I’m not sure, what’s the difference between them?
T: The General Chinese course is for beginners. It covers everyday situations – you know, shopping, booking tickets, ordering food in a restaurant, things like that. It’s very popular with people intending to visit China for a holiday.
J: I see, so is it mainly Chinese conversation, or does it include learning to read and write as well?
T: It mainly deals with spoken Chinese for beginners, but students do learn to recognise about 300 characters – enough to read simple passages.
J: Mmm, and the Business Chinese course?
T: That’s a more intense course for people who need to use Chinese for business situations (delete “situations”?). Most of the students work for corporations who have projects in China. It teaches a specialised vocabulary that’s used in meetings, reports, letters and so on. There’s a lot of speaking practice in this course too, but it places more stress on developing reading and writing skills than the General Chinese course.
J: Is it suitable for beginners?
T: Well, some beginners do choose this course, but they find the workload quite tough. I suggest you take the General Chinese course first because most students find it helps them to have a basic knowledge of the language.
J: I see. And what about the cost? . . . [fade out]
Part 2
Professor Smith is giving an informal presentation to a group of students aged about 17 or 18.
Hello everyone, thanks for coming. Well, we all know that exams are stressful and cause anxiety. Today, I’m going to explain what happens to your body when you feel anxious, and then give you some advice that might be helpful to you.
To start with, it’s important to understand that anxiety is a normal, natural response to stress or fear, and in fact it’s quite useful. Anxiety causes physical changes which prepare your body and mind to face challenges. So feeling anxious about an exam is okay and actually helps you to perform well.
Anxiety becomes a problem, however, if you experience it too frequently or over a long period of time. In this situation, it becomes difficult to concentrate and you may find you get upset easily or lose confidence. It’s also common to suffer from extreme tiredness and to have difficulty sleeping.
Now, I recommend a 3-step approach to beat anxiety: Firstly, use breathing exercises to reduce your body’s physical stress. Secondly, use positive thinking methods to calm your mind and improve your concentration, and thirdly, plan your study schedule using the “Eating an Elephant” approach.
[titters and ‘eating an elephant?’ from audience]
What do I mean? Well, if I asked you to eat an elephant, you’d probably feel you couldn’t do it. You’d start to worry, feel stressed and experience anxiety. But if I gave you an elephant steak – say, about this size – could you eat it?
[murmers of agreement and ‘yes’ from audience]
Yes, so eating an elephant is easy if you cut it into smaller pieces and just eat one piece at a time. And when you study you should “cut up” your workload into small pieces and concentrate on one piece at a time, rather than the “whole elephant”.
Ok, let’s look at each of the 3 steps in more detail . . .[fade out]
Unit 13
Listening text
Dialogue 1 Two teenage girls
J: Julie L: Lucy
L: Hi Julie, Oh no! Aren’t you ready yet? You know, Colin will be offended if we’re not on time.
J: Sorry, but I can’t make up my mind what to wear. What do you think – this or the dress?
L: Well, the blue skirt and pink blouse are very pretty, but I think your red dress is better for a party, it’s more elegant.
J: Right, the red dress it is, have a seat, I’ll only be 5 minutes.(Can we say so?) Its quite common in informal speech
L: Ok, but be quick . . .Oh what a lovely necklace!
J: Thanks, my grandmother gave it to me, and before that it belonged to her mother. It’s over a hundred years old.
L: Really? But the way it shines it looks like new!
J: That’s because it’s a real diamond, don’t you know that diamonds last for ever, they never look old!
L: I didn’t know that th (???) … Look lets go, and you can tell me about it on the way, it’ll be embarrassing if we’re the last to arrive.
Dialogue 2 Two teenage boys
D: Hello Alan, what’s that you’re reading?
A: It’s called The Woman in White.
D: Oh, that’s a novel by Wilkie Collins isn’t it; we’ve been reading about the Moonstone in class. Is the Woman in White a detective story too?
A: Well sort of, but in this story the person who investigates is not a policeman like Sergeant Cuff, he’s an art teacher.
D: What is it about?
A: Well, I haven’t finished yet, but at the beginning of the book the art teacher meets a mysterious woman dressed in white while he is out walking one night. It turns out that the Woman in White looks very similar to his student – Laura - so he tries to find out more about her. He discovers that the man Laura has just married knows the Woman in White and is responsible for some terrible things that happened to her. It seems that Laura’s husband is a very wicked man.
D: Sounds exciting!
A: Yes, I hope the art teacher finds out the truth before Laura’s husband does anything bad to her.
D: Mmm, can I borrow it after you finish it?
A: Sure, it may take me a while though, because it is in English and I have to read slowly.
Unit 14
Listening text
Part 1
A bee-keeper talks about collecting honey from bees.
Once upon a time, bee-keepers killed their bees every autumn. Why? You may ask. Well, the answer is this. To get some honey, bee-keepers and farmers used to put out small wooden boxes in a corner of the farmyard. Bees would come and fill the box with honeycomb. However, there was no way of getting the honey out without killing the bees. So they used to burn a chemical close to the box in order to kill the bees and then take the honey.
Now, bee-keepers use beehives to collect honey. In the beehive there are a number of wooden squares with spaces between them which can be lifted out. In late summer, the squares, which are now full of honeycomb, are lifted out. The squares are put in a special machine and turned round and round very fast for several minutes. Turning the squares round and round like this forces out the honey. The honey is then collected and poured into jars. After that, the empty squares are returned to the hive for the bees to fill with honey the following year.
Bees need food to live through the winter. That’s why they make honey. Bee-keepers can do one of two things. Either they can leave some of the honey in the hive for the bees to eat during the winter. Or else they can remove all the honey and provide the bees with a mixture of sugar and water for the bees to eat instead.
Part 2
J : James, a birdwatcher, R: Reporter
(Forrest sounds and birdsong in the background)
R: Welcome to Poyang Lake in northeastern Jiangxi. We are here with a group of people who have come to look at the famous white cranes that nest here every year. Before we talk more about the cranes, we will ask James, one of the birdwatchers, to tell us about his hobby. Hello, James.
J: Hello. It’s a beautiful morning, isn’t it?
R: Yes, it is. James, you have been a birdwatcher for many years. What made you choose this hobby?
J: Well, I’ve always loved the outdoors. When I was a child, my mother would always tell me about the birds we saw. I wanted to learn about the birds, too. This hobby is a great way to combine travel, learning, and exercise.
R: Why are you here in Jiangxi today?
J: As you know, Poyang Lake is the largest freshwater lake in China. There are some 116 species of birds that coming Poyang Lake in winter. After spending the winter here, they return home. It’s a paradise for birdwatchers!
R: Why do the birds choose this place?
J: Well, it’s warm here, and there’s lots of water and food.
R: So this must be a very important place for the birds?
J: Yes, it is. The government has made laws to protect the birds and to make sure that this remains a
safe place for birds in winter.
R: Many of us know that the famous white crane comes to Poyang Lake in winter. What can you tell us about the white crane?
J: It’s one of the fifteen species of crane in the world. China is home to eight or nine of the species, including some rare and very beautiful cranes like the white crane. It is one of the most endangered crane species, and we must do what we can to protect it. The white crane divides its time between Russia and China, and Poyang Lake is one of the most important places for them.
R: Thank you. Now let’s go look at the birds!
Unit 15
Listening text
X: Xiaoyi – young adult female radio presenter *
J: Jiawei – young adult male radio presenter *
C: Chen Yu – a male middle school student*
L: Liu Yue – a female middle school student*
Part 1
J: Hi, it’s Sunday, 20 past four and it’s time for 16:20, the weekly youth culture programme for young adults presented by young adults. I’m Jiawei . . .
X: And I’m Xiaoyi. Welcome to 16:20.
J: We hope you are having a good weekend. We’ve got a great programme for you today, so sit back for the next two hours and enjoy!
X: Yes, indeed. We’ll be reporting on spring fashions, including all the latest trends that appeared in the Shanghai Fashion Week. And then it’s Jiawei’s regular “Sports Round Up” when he’ll be bringing you all the news from the world of sport.
J: Yup, and this week I’ll be taking a special look at winter sports and talking to Wang Lei, China’s top snowboarder.
X: All right! You know, I really want to try snowboarding sometimes. Now, don’t forget that at 5:50 it’s “Sounding Off’, when you can phone in and tell us what you think about a current issue. Today we’ll be discussing the Internet and young people. There’s been a lot of talk recently about kids spending too much time on-line, and even becoming addicted to some games. We want to hear your views, so give us a call on 5628 3131.
J: Yeah, how can we solve this problem? Let’s hear your suggestions - the phone lines are open. That’s 5628 3131. But right now, let’s have some music. It’s time for “Listener’s Choice”.
Part 2
J: Listener’s Choice is your chance to hear the music you wanna listen to. So send us your requests.
X: First up is a request from two students at No 3 Middle School in Nanchang: Chen Yu and Liu Yue wrote to us saying . . .[reading] “ Please play something by the 12 Girls Band. We think the girls are great, and we really like the way they are mixing traditional sounds with pop music.” Thanks for your email guys, we totally agree with you.
J: We certainly do. For anyone listening who doesn’t know, the 12 Girls Band is a group of 12 young - and very beautiful - women who are using traditional musical instruments in a new way. Their music is a mixture of old and modern styles.
X: Isn’t it great that this is a type of music that all the family can enjoy together, from the very young to the elderly!
J: In fact Xiaoyi, it’s a type of music that people all over the world are enjoying together. The 12 Girls Band is so popular in Japan that all the tickets for 32 concerts were sold in just 10 minutes!
X: Wow, so what have you got for us to listen to?
J: Well, I’ve been listening to their album “Eastern Energy”. It’s a fantastic CD, with so many great tracks, but I finally decided on the 12 Girls Band’s cover version of a hit song by the British group “Coldplay”. It’s called “ Clocks”.
X: OK then. For Chen Yu and Liu Yue and everyone at No 3 Middle school in Nanchang. Here is “Clocks” from the 12 Girls Band’s album “Eastern Energy” . . .
[Musical extract from the start of track “Clocks”, Eastern Energy album, 12 Girls Band]
Unit 16
Listening text
Extracts from a presentation given by a female careers advisor.
Part 1
So, you’ve seen a job you want. You sent in your application and now you have been invited for an interview. What should you do and say to make your interview a success?
Well, first of all, consider the way you present yourself. When we meet someone for the first time, we get an instant impression about what type of person he / she is. This happens in the first five minutes, and once we have decided, we don’t usually change our opinion. So when an employer meets an applicant for a job, those first five minutes are vital.
To make a good impression, you need to pay attention to two things: the way you look and your body language.
Appearance is very important, so think carefully about what to wear. This will depend on the type of job you are applying for, but as a general rule, I’d recommend that men should wear a tie. I think it’s best to avoid jeans and casual trousers; they might make some employers think you also have a “casual” attitude towards work. Women, please don’t wear short skirts or anything too tight, and don’t choose anything that is too decorated – keep it simple.
Decide what you are going to wear a few days before the interview. This will give you time to check your clothes and make sure there are no stains on them or buttons missing.
Remember the “look” you are aiming for is neat, clean and tidy. And if you look good, you will feel confident.
Part 2
Now a few tips on body language.
Two very important things that will happen in the first five minutes of your interview are the handshake and eye contact. Both of these are important if you are to make a good impression.
You should look the employer straight in the eye as soon as you enter the room, give him or her a friendly smile and shake hands firmly. (Some people think a weak handshake shows a weak personality, so do give a nice firm grasp.)
Don’t sit down until invited, and then sit up straight and look interested. Leaning forward slightly when the interviewer is speaking is a good way of showing you are listening carefully, and don’t forget to keep as much eye contact as possible throughout the interview.
You will probably feel quite nervous about your interview – don’t worry, that’s completely natural. However, nervous tension can affect your body language. Please watch out for this. It is quite common that you move about in your chair and gesture with your hands a lot, so sit fairly still and hold your hands gently together in your lap if necessary.
One last hint: Our body language always shows when we aren’t telling the truth – our eyes and body move in different ways – and some interviewers are quite skilled in spotting this. A lot of us have a tendency to, er, expand the truth a bit when we want to get that great job, but believe me honesty really is the best policy!
篇8：3B Unit 20(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demand:
通过本单元教学，学生应能熟练地运用表达“有关订计划”的常用语；复习宾语从句；了解印度民族主义领袖甘地的生平和印度人民反抗殖民主义斗争的历史。
Importance and difficulty:
1. Words and expressions
Design, permit, think up , make a point , more than badly , throw off, lack , struggle
2. Sentences:
A. Even before India won independence from its British rulers, it was clear that Gandhi was the key figure and leader in the struggle of 380 million Indians to govern themselves.
B. He was a model of a different kind of political leader.
C. It was the duty of everyone to disobey this law, but without using violence.
D. On his return to India he had the chance to travel to South Africa to work on a law case.
3. Grammar
A. We elect him monitor of our class.
B. I ordered them to go away at once.
C. I can hear the girl singing.
D. We consider him to be a great leader.
4. Useful expressions
A. What do you plan to do?
B. Why do you think it is possible….?
C. I decided …..
D. I insist on….
E. I will…..
Unit 20 Lesson 77 Gandhi : His life
Aims and demands:
1. Develop the Ss’ reading ability
2. Get the Ss know something about Gandhi’s life
Importance and difficulty:
Have a deeper understanding of the text.
Develop the Ss’ reading skill.
Teaching aid: tape recorder and slides.
Teaching method: reading and understanding
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming up
( Listen to a tape <听力强化训练> page 5 )
T: Where did these voices come from?
------ Perhaps they were on a strike or they were gathering in a place to ask for sth.
T: What did they want to have ?
----- The blacks wanted to be equal as whites.
Apartheid means ( policy of ) racial segregation ( in South Africa ).
T: Once in South Africa, blacks were badly treated by South African whites. Blacks had not rights to vote. They were not allowed to take the buses or trains for whites. Do you think the blacks and whites are equal?
----- No. Of course not.
T: The blacks were lack of equality. And this is called the racial discrimination.
T: Do you any great leaders who led the black people to let them live a better life?
----- Lincoln , Martin Luther King , Gandhi ……
T: Who were they ?
T: Do you know anything about? Where was Gandhi born?
----- He was born in India.
T: India was once ruled by the British . It was Gandhi who led the Indians to govern themselves.
Today we are going to read Gandhi’s life.
Step 2. Reading for general understanding
I. Questions:
1. In which countries did Gandhi work for the liberation of Indians?
------- India and South Africa.
2. What successes did Gandhi gain?
------ He became a lawyer; he won a victory over the Pass Law in South Africa: he won a victory over the law that did not allow Indians to make salt: he won independence for India.
II. Find out what happened to Gandhi in the following years:
In 1869 Gandhi was born in India.
In 1882 Gandhi was married at the age of 13, following the local custom.
In 1888 He sailed to England in September 1888.
In 1891 Gandhi became a lawyer.
In 1915 Gandhi returned to India and was honoured as a hero.
In 1948 Gandhi died on January 30 th ,1948.
Step 3. Careful reading
1. Do the comprehension exercises ( WB and paper comprehension )
Reading comprehension for Unit 20 Lesson 77 (3B) CBBDD CAC
1. This text is about ___.
A. Gandhi’s political life B. Gandhi’s family life
C. Gandhi’s life D. Gandhi’s professional life
2. What custom is mentioned in the text?
A. Dining B.Marriage C.Family D.Education
3. Gandhi had traveled from ___ to India.
A. England, India and South Africa
B. India, England and South Africa
C. India, South Africa and England
D. South Africa, India and England
4. Gandhi was ___.
A. a lawyer
B. a leader for equal rights
C. a leader in the struggle of Indians to govern themselves
D. all of the above
5. Gandhi did not want his people to get equal rights trough ___.
A. articles B.publicity C.marches D.violent fights.
6. Gandhi was ___ when India won her independence.
A. over 80 B. over 60 C. over 70 D. over 65
7. Gandhi was shot by ___.
A. an Indian who was against his ideas
B. a white man who hated him
C. an Indian who was sent by the British government
D. a white spy from England
8. The two movements in paragraph 5 are actually ___ movements.
A. economic (经济的) B. cultural
C. political D. Educational
2. Note making
Step 4. Practice ( Wb )
Step 5. Interview
Homework
Lesson 78 Gandhi: His beliefs
Aims and demands:
1. Develop the Ss’ reading ability
2. Get the Ss know something about Gandhi’s beliefs
Importance and difficulty:
Have a deeper understanding of the text.
Develop the Ss’ reading skill.
Teaching aid: tape recorder and slides.
Teaching method: reading and understanding
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Questions:
1. Where was he born?
2. How old did he get married?
3. When and where did he go to study law? ---- In England in Sep. 1888.
4. Later he went to South Africa. Why did he go there?--- to work on a law case
5. How long did he stay there ? ---- 20 years
6. Did he do any writing at that time?
7. What did he write?------ He wrote about socialism in newspaper and started a magazine call “ Indian Opinion”.
8. When did he return to India? ---- 1915
9. What kind of things did he persuade Indian people to do?----- to be independent, to make their own cotton cloth to refuse to buy cloth made in England, to make their own salt
Step 2. Presentation
T: What do you think of Gandhi?
T: He was so great a man that all Indians respected him and he had become “father” to all Indians.
Step 3. Fast reading
Read the text fast and do the comprehension exercises:
1. text book ---Page 46 ( true or false )
2. reading comprehension
Reading comprehension for Unit 20 Lesson 78 I (3B) DCACB DCB
1. Gandhi was not ___.
A. a clever lawyer B. a determined fighter
C. a political leader D. a common leader
2. What drove Gandhi to struggle against all the unfairness?
A. His material desire.
B. His religious (宗教的)belief.
C. His belief in truth.
D. Other people’s expectations.
3. We can infer from the text that Gandhi seldom __.
A. lied B. talked with others
B. made mistakes D. praised himself
4. The first sentence in paragraph 2 means that ___.
A. he refused to be famous
B. he never made use of his position
C. he didn’t work for his personal interests
D. he liked to be a common person
5. Gandhi’s efforts for equality didn’t enable all Hindus to _____.
A. draw water from the same village well
B. be dressed the same
C. go to the same temple to pray
D. marry each other
6. Paragraph 5 talks about ___.
A. how Gandhi fought for the equality of women
B. how many unfair laws existed at that time
C. how people could escape from the punishment for their beliefs
D. how people should fight against unfair laws
7. The word “father” in paragraph 6 means ___.
A. all Indians became his sons
B. all Indians regarded him as their father
C. all Indians respected him
D. all Indians felt that he was above them
8. Einstein’s words mean ___.
A. Gandhi was only understood by few people
B. Gandhi was so great and outstanding that he can hardly be imagined
C. Future generations will not believe in his ideas
D. Gandhi could only be understood by the people of his times.
Reading comprehension II (Lesson 78) 3B ACDBC
1. Gandhi decided to live as a poor man because he ___.
A. did not have expensive tastes
B. valued ordinary people much
C. didn’t want to make money
D. believed in non-violence
2. What did Gandhi mean by “the force of truth”?
A. Great attention should be paid to the equality of women.
B. When people made mistakes he should admit them willingly.
C. Everyone should disobey the unfair law,, if any, but without using violence.
D. Everyone should be prepared to do heavy work , from leaders to the poorest peasants.
3. Which can be inferred from the 6th paragraph?
A. At that time the Indian burial customs were quite unusual.
B. Gandhi’s death aroused great unrest among the Indian people.
C. It seems quite ridiculous that he called for non-violent resistance , but was violently killed.
D. Gandhi was deeply loved and respected by his people, who showed great sorrow for his death.
4. What can be inferred from the last paragraph?
A. Future generations will no longer believe in his ideas.
B. His contributions to the world are so great that it’s beyond our imagination.
C. Albert Einstein thought nobody but himself really understood Gandhi.
D. Gandhi could only be understood by the pjeople of his times.
5. “The secret lies in the title of the book…” The underlined word refers to ___.
A. how he became such a successful political leader
B. how he got over so many failures or difficulties in his life
C. why he was regarded as a model of a different kind of political leader
D. why he entitled his book The Story of My Experiments with Truth
Questions
1. What did Gandhi mean by “ the force of truth ”?
---- If an unfair law existed, it was the duty of everyone to disobey this law, but without using violence.
2. Which event is described in the text?
----- The Indian customs following his death.
Step 4. Careful reading
Read it again and do the comprehension 3 ----Page 46
Describe the character of Gandhi using the information from the text
1. His simple life: He refused to make any personal gain from his political work. He decided to live as a poor man and not to possess wealth. When he travelled across India, he travelled “hard-seat, unreserved”, together with peasants and other ordinary people. In cities he refused to travel in a rickshaw. He ate simply and never ate meat. He rose early in the morning and worked at his wheel, making cotton thread.
2. His interests: Gandhi was interested in all spiritual matters, not only in the Indian gods. All his life he reached out for the truths of spirits and gods.
3. His belief: Gandhi believed that one should be able to “love the most ordinary being on earth as oneself”. Gandhi hated the custom that had divided Hindu society into separate groups for thousands of years and his goal was to end this.
Step 5. Practice
Workbook --- Ex 2
Homework
Lesson 77
Aims and demand: Grasp the usage of the language points
Step 1. Text reviewing
T: Where was Gandhi born? ----- India.
T: Following the Indian local custom, what age should one get married? ----- 13
T: That is to say. Gandhi got married at 13.
T: What age is the Chinese boy / girl usually married?
Do you want to know my age of marriage ? ----- That’s a secret.
What age are you going to get married?
1. marry sb.
be married
get married
be married to sb.
T: Try to guess : When did I get marred?
When did your parents get married?
How long has his / her parents been married?
What is your father? ---- a worker, a teacher……
Then his mother has been married to a worker for … years.
他们是战争结束时结婚的。
They got / were married at the end of the war.
---你和露西结婚多久了？--- 了。
--- How long have you been married to Lucy?
--- For twenty years.
T: Gandhi sailed to England to study law and stayed there for 3 years. As soon as he came back to India , what did he do?
----- On his return to India, he had the chance to travel to South Africa to work on a law case.
T: What is the first thing you will do on your arrival at home this Friday afternoon?
2. on one’s return …
on one’s arrival …
on the enterance …
on hearing …
on reaching…
他一到机场就听到了这个消息。
He heard the news on his arrival at the airport.
他一听到这个消息就赶回家。
On hearing the news , he hurried home.
老师一进来，学生就起立。
The Ss stood up on the entrance of the teacher. ( true )
……………… on entering the teacher. ( wrong )
3. work on = be engaged in sth.
work on = work continuously
我们正在制定一个新的旅行计划。
We are working on a new plan for travel.
他在实验室里一直工作到午夜。
He stayed in the lab and worked on till midnight.
He worked on in the lab until midnight.
T: What made him change his life?
--- The chance to travel to South Africa to work on a law case made him change his life.
This experience was to change his life.
4. “be + 不定式” 通常表示计划安排要做的事
I’m go meet him at the airport.
（本文）表示不可避免将要发生的（命中注定的事）
Worse was to come.-------( “Roots”) Page 8
还可表示命令（父母让子女做的事）
You are to do your homework before you watch TV.
T: This experience was the turning point in his life. Listen to the tape and deal with the following language points.
5. insist on doing
insist that
He insisted on going there alone.
He insisted that he should go there alone.
He insisted that he was right.
He insisted that he had finished his homework.
6. play an important role in…
play an important part in …
7. be put in prison
be thrown in prison
8. have a gift for …
9. think up 想出 ，编出 ( invent , make up )
think of （考虑）打算，想出，想到，想着，想起
think about （考虑）回想（过去）， 考虑某事是否可行
think over 仔细思考一遍
think of ……as 把……看作
Most of the masters thought of their slaves as animals that could be bought and sold.
Mary, are you thinking of marry Tom?
Who thought of/ up the plan?
We mustn’t think about your this matter any more.
I’ll think about your suggestion, and give you an answer tomorrow.( if it is possible )
Think over, and you’ll find a way.
10. with the purpose of 怀着……的目的
for the purpose of 为着……的目的
on purpose 有意地
11. following this 在。。。 之后
T: What will happen following the examination?
-----The result will come out.
T: What will happen following the heavy rain ?------ The river will be flooded.
Following the hot weather?----- Crops will die.
Step 2. Exercises
Correct the mistakes: ( Lesson 77)
1. Joan is going to marry with Hubert.
2. Gandhi was married at the age of 13, followed local custom.
3. Followed the doctor’s advice, my father has given up drinking.
4. The villagers still following the customs of their grandfathers.
5. In his return to India he had the chance to travel to South Africa.
6. In reaching the city he called up Mr. Smith .
7. After he returned home, he was honoured for a hero.
8. He had a gift in thinking up ways of making political points.
9. He was thrown off a train for insisting traveling in the whites-only section.
10. For twenty years he played important role in working for equal rights for Indians.
11. South Africa passed further laws were designed to make life difficult for non-whites.
12. Some of the Indians publicly burnt their permits and many of them were put in the prison.
13. Thousands of Indians, joined him when he led a march to the coast, on the purpose of “making a little salt.”
14. Follow this , 60,000 Indians , including Gandhi, were put in prison.
Lesson 78
Step 1. Deal with the language points
1. (translate) Gandhi was much more than a clever lawyer, a fine speaker, a determined fighter for human rights and a political leader.
甘地远不只是一位聪明的律师，优秀的演说家，坚定的人权战士和一位政治领导人。
他们俩远不只是同学，他们还是知心朋友。
Both of them are much more than schoolmates, they are close friends.
They were more than glad to help.
他们是极其乐意帮忙的。
This more than satisfied me.
这使我深感满意。
2. lie in 在于
T: He didn’t pass the exam, where did the problem lie?
Ss: It lies in his laziness.
(translate)那就是真正的危险所在。
That is where the real danger lies.
3. reach out for
他伸手从书架上取下一本书来。
He reached out for a book from the top of the shelf.
4. (translate ) One should be able to “love the most ordinary being on earth as oneself.”
“……就象爱自己一样去爱世界上最普通的人。”
being c生物（特指人）
a human being/ human beings
Men , women, and children are human beings.
All birds and animals are living beings.
on earth 在世界上，在人世间
in the world 。。。
他们认为自己是世界上最聪明的人。
They consider themselves the wisest men on earth.
北京将成为世界上最大的城市。
Beijing will become the largest city on earth in area.
5. take up arms
6. as follows 固定词组 “如下” 以引出下文
他们的建议如下：。。。
Their suggestions are as follows.
hardly
hard
There is hardly any wine in the bottle.
He hardly works at all.
He works hard at his lessons.
Such …as 象。。。这样的，诸如。。。这类
他曾经希望做一名象甘地那样的领袖。
He wished to be such a leader as Gandhi.
这样的照片应该由博物馆保存。
Such a picture / photo as this should be kept in museum.
Step 2. Exercises
Fill in the blanks with a correct word ( Lesson 77~78)
1. He was busy ____ his work and did not notice me come ____. with, in
2. We should take ___ arms and fight ___ the Japanese invaders. up , against
3. Alice Green has been married ____ John Smith ___ ten months. to for
4. Diligence leads ___ success and failure often lies ____ laziness. to in
5. He demanded an end ___ the British rule ____ India. to over
6. Please let me go on ___ my work __ peace. with in
7. He reached __ his pocket __ some money. Into for
8. ___ last the enemy had to give ___ and we won the battle. at in
9. ___ her return __ the office, she began to work. On to
10. The notice reads ___ follows. as
Choose the correct answer ( Grammar exercises for object complement ) Lesson 77~78
1. Jane devoted her life ___ the sick.
A. to caring for B. to care for C. to caring D. caring for
2. The mother wanted her son ___ without delay.
A. to operate B. to be operated on C. to operate on D. being operated on
3. The father forbade the child ___ out of doors during his absence.
A. to go B. go C. goes D. will go
4. She was glad to see her child____.
A. taking care of B. taken care C. taken care of D. take care of
5. When she returned home, she found the window open and something____.
A. stolen B. missed C. to be stolen D. to steal
6. Although he tried, Bob still couldn’t make himself ____ .
A. being heard B. hearing C. heard D. hear
7. We can depend on the workers ___ the plan.
A. carried B. to carry C. carry D. carrying
8. The government calls on us ____ our production.
A. increased B. increasing C. increase D. to increase
9. Do you hear someone ___ at the door?
A. knocked B. knocking C. to knock D. knock
10. Did you notice the boy ___ the street just now?
A. crossed B. to cross C. cross D. crossing
ABACA CBDBC
篇9：unit 13 The USA(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
一、教法建议
1. 目的与要求
这是一篇说明文。通过教学的每个环节实现以下三个目的：
（1）了解有关the USA , New York的一般情况，如：人口，历史，政府以及the bison等
（2）帮助学生学习掌握本单元的重点词汇和短语；
（3）在帮助学生提高阅读能力的同时，帮助指导学生如何运用英语介绍某一地区（城市或国家）的能力并能缩写课文（100-150 words ）.
本单元的能力目标：
a.理解课文大意，能回答有关问题；
b.能复述课文；
c.将课文改写成100-150 words短文；
（以上能力目标，a. 三会， b. 二会，c.一会。）
2. 本单元重点知识：
(1)单词和词组：tear v. turn v. rot vi. shoot n.
tear down ,turn away ,have an effect on
take the possession of ,a handful of ,give in ,
make an agreement with ,have trouble with ,
now that ,
(2)呈现与训练：
① tear : to break by pulling apart 撕开，撕裂
tear down :to destroy a building 拆毁（建筑）
Paper tears easily . 纸容易撕破。
She tore the table cloth in half . 她把那块桌布撕成两块。
The boy tore the letter open . 把…撕开
He tore the picture into pieces . 把…撕成碎片
John torn up his test paper so that his mother wouldn’t see his low grade . 撕碎
They tore the old building down in order to build a new one . 拆毁
② turn v. or link v.
turn是一个常用词，可以构成许多词组。如：
turn on / off / up /down (用于电流水的)
开 / 关 / 开大 / 开小
turn up : appear
The pop star didn’t turn up at the party . 出场
turn away (本单元为”to refuse to admit “)
从……赶走；拒绝（某人进入）（本义为“把……转开”）
The hotel porter turned away anybody who wasn’t wearing a collar and tie . 拒绝……进入
He turned up his coat collar to keep out the wind . 翻起
She turned away in horror at the sight of so much blood. 转身不看
I turned in bed all night ,I couldn’t sleep because of the heat . 辗转反侧
She turned the car into a narrow street (onto the highroad ). ……开进一条狭小街道（开上高速公路）
I found that the milk had turned sour . 变酸（link v. ）
The young soldier didn’t turn against his country ,instead he gave his life to his country . 背叛
Mary picked up a wallet on her way home and she turned it in to the teacher the next morning . 上交
The thief was turned over to the police. 移交
He is a good man you can turn to for help . 求助
这类词和词组很多，要学会读懂上下文的内容，准确理解，找到一个词组的本义，转义和喻义，这对扩大词汇量和提高阅读能力很有好处。
③ rot vi. : go bad corrupt 烂，腐败；Vt. 使……烂
Some apples rotted on the tree .
The wood of the stairs has rotted away in pieces .
④ shoot n. 幼芽，幼枝；
shoot vi. vt. 开枪，射中；
（shot作名词是“开枪，枪声”的意思）
There are a lot of new shoots on the tree .
The old man heard two shots walking through the woods.
The soldier fired a shot . ……开了一枪
The man shot at the bird ,but he didn’t shoot it .
那个人向着鸟开枪，但是没有射中
⑤ have an effect on 对……产生影响
Punishment will have a bad , but not a good effect on a child who does something wrong .
⑥ take the possession of 占有；夺取
⑦ a handful of 少量的
⑧ give in 屈服，让步
⑨ make an agreement with 与……达成协议
⑩ have trouble with 因苦恼；同……有矛盾
now that 既然
3. 本单元应掌握的难点知识：
（1）常见的主语形式：
一般说来，英语句子中的主语形式常见的有以下八种：
A bison is a large animal found on the American plains .（名词）
This is the room Mr Lu Sun once lived in .（代词）
She is a quick girl .（人称代词）
The old are taken good care for in their own family . （形容词）
Two times five is ten .（数词）
Fishing is interesting . （动名词）
To save money now is impossible to us students .（不定式短语）
What surprised me most was that it seemed to be a few days before a new house was set up . （主语从句）
以上有关主语八种形式需要在阅读和练习中熟记并掌握。
（2）主语和谓语的一致性问题
主语和谓语的一致性问题是大多数学生学习英语时遇到的最大的困难之一。一个句子中的谓语动词必须与这个句子中的主语人称，数的形式保持一致关系。例如，句子中的主语是单数形式，其谓语动词用单数形式。这种主谓一致的划分归纳起来有以下八种。
① 由and连接的名词作主语时
a. 如果由and连接的两个名词（不同概念）作主语时，谓语动词要用复数形式。如：
Tom and Jack live in Room 305.
Both you and I are to be sent to Tibet.
What he said and what he did agreed with each other.
b. 当and连接的两个名词指同一个人、同一件事或一概念，这时and后面的名词前没有冠词，其谓语动词用单数形式（这里and相当于as well as ）。如：
The singer and composer is coming to our school .
那位歌唱家兼作曲家将来我们学校。
Bread and butter is often served for breakfast in our dining hall .
（比较：The boy and the girl were given a book each .每个同学都分得一本书。其中 “each”是同位语，句中主语为复数。）
我们食堂早点经常供应奶油面包。
常见的由and连接的两个名词指由一个概念的形式有：the needle and thread针线，salt and water盐水，the or and knife刀叉，soap and water肥皂水，iron and steel钢铁等。
C. 由and连接的两个并列主语为单数概念。主语前面分别由each , every ,no等词来修饰时，其谓语动词为单数形式。
Each doctor and each nurse was sent for .
把所有的医生和护士都清来了。
Every boy and every girl is able to go to school in that village .
在那个村子里所有的孩子们都能上学。
注意：more than one和many a 修饰的单数名词后面的谓语用单数形式，但其意义是复数。
如：
More than one student is fond of folk- music .
许多学生喜欢民间音乐。
Many a boy enjoys playing foot-ball .
许多男同学喜欢踢足球。
② 当主语后面接说明主语的修饰词或插入语时，谓语动词的数不受修饰成份的影响，仍同主语的关系一致。
这些修饰成分常见的有：with, along with , togeth whit (和…一起)；as well as (还) ；like (像)；no less than (不亚于)；rather than (而不是)；more than（多于)；as much as (如…一般多)；but ,except（除了……）；besides (除了……还……)；including包括；in addition to（另外）等引导的一个修饰结构，放在主语后面。如：
The old man , along with his two grandsons, often have a walk in the evening .
Jenny , as well as her friends , is going abroad .
The house ,including the garden and the garage ,was sold out .
③ 当集合名词作主语时
根据句子内容，谓语动词可以是单数也可以是复数形式。在这一用法中，要注意正确判断主语是“整体”概念，还是“个体”概念。
如：# The whole nation regard Premier Zhou Enlai as one of the greatest leaders .
(句中 “nation” 表示“全国人民”谓语用复数)。
注: 集合名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数还是复数，取决于它强调的内容，如果一个名词作为一个整体看待，谓语动词用单数形式，表示“全体一致的行动”或者“群体关系”；当谓语动词表示“身份”、“情感”或强调“每个成员”时，用复数形式。如：
The audience was in good order .
观众保持良好的秩序。（指整体状态）
The audience were greatly encouraged .
观众们深受鼓舞。（指具体的人）
常用的集合名词有：group ,class ,team ,family ,nation ,army ,crowd ,audience ,public, government , majority（大多数）等。
有些集合名词如people、cattle（牛群）等在任何情况下都与谓语动词的复数形式搭配。
④ 就近原则
以连词or either…or neither…nor not only…but also…连接的名词或代词作主语时，谓语动词与其相邻的那个名词的数一致。
如： # Among the boys ,one or two are able to jump 1.6 metres .
在这些同学中，一二个人能跳过1.6米。
⑤ 以 “某些不定代词或表示数量的词 + of + 名词”的结构，谓语形式要与of 后的名词保持一致。
常见的这类词有：all , some , a lot , plenty , any , part ,the rest ,one-third percent + of
如： 70 percent of the surface is covered with water .
70 percent of the farmers have impoved their living conditions .
⑥ 有些不定代词或表示数字的名词修饰的名词或词组作主语时，句中谓语动词用复数。这类词组常用的有：few (of ) , a few , both , both of ,a number of + 复数名词+谓语动词（复数）
如： # Few of the students were in the classroom yesterday , for it was Sunday .
昨天教室里没有几个人，因为是星期日。
[注]：在 “ a number of + 名词（复数）” 结构中，“复数名词”是中心词，“a number of ”作定语，谓语用复数形式；而在 “ the number of + 名词（复数）” 结构中， “the number “是“中心词”，谓语动词用单数形式。如：
A number of questions were always asked when the manager got to his office .
The number of the students in this school is 1,560.
[注] 当 “the number”.表示“…数量或号码”时，谓语动词用单数。如：
The number of the key is 207.
⑦ “the + 形容词（分词或数词）” 结构起名词作用时
如果这个结构表示的是一类人，谓语动词用复数形式；如果这个结构表示抽象概念（或具体的某一个人），谓语用单数形式。如：
The young are able to create their own future.
There was an old lady and a young girl in the park . The young was the daughter of the old .
The wounded were taken to hospital without delay .
⑧ 表示重量、距离、金钱，一段时间及由one and a half修饰的复数名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式。如：
Twenty dollars isn’t enough to buy the book .
Ten miles isn’t far .
Five times six is thirty.
One and a half apples was left on the plate .
二、学海导航
如何培养和提高作答单项填空题的能力。
单项填空题主要考查中学阶段所学词法和句法中常见的语言内容，试题具有信息量大，综合性强，突出语言的交际能力等特点。回答单项填空题，不能单纯从语法规则入手，而是要求考生必须从题干提供的语言环境出发，综合所学的语言语法知识正确判断。建议参考以下三个步骤：
1.认真阅读提纲，了解大意；
2.根据句中所缺部分和四个选项的概念和形式，判断考查什么；
3.从提纲的内容和选项的形式两个方面进行匹配，达到内容和形式的统一。如：
________want to work in Xinjiang after graduation.
A. Not only Ann but also her friends B. Neither Ann nor Tom
C. Either Ann or her friend D. Nobody but Ann
答案：A
解析：此题句子大意是“……想毕业后去新疆工作”根据句中所缺部分和四个选项不难看出此题考查的是主谓一致问题。句中“want”是一般现在时复数形式，那么，此句的主语应是复数形式；四个选项是D是单数，故与本题要求不符；A，B，C三项都是由连词连接的两个名词作主语。根据“就近原则”（见主谓一致问题4）答案为A。
另外，进行自我训练时，要注意按高考要求的时间（12分钟）完成25个单选题。并查出造成失误的原因。如：知识不准确；偏重语法而忽视内容；或受母语的干扰等原因造成的失误。发现问题，抓住重点，集中一段时间重点突破。
三、智能显示
1. 检查方式
（1） 按课文有关人口，历史，政府等分项复述课文，然后，再复述全文；
（2） 群体复述课文 ( Retell in group )
（3）改写课文
2. 同步训练
① 课文要点训练
I. 单词拼写（计分10）
1. Many Europeans e______ the continent of Africa in the 19th century. 1___________
2. The moment old Jonh put a h________ of sweets on the chair by the bed , little Tom ran towards to it . 2___________
3. India gained i_______ from Britain in 1947. 3___________
4. Marx once said that labour c________ man itself . 4____________
5. After reading the letter from her boss , Jane t______ it up and threw
it into the dustbin. 5____________
6. I wouldn’t think it w______ to ask him join the club─he’ll only refuse. 6____________
7. Bob was a shy boy ,and he always sat a _____ from the other children. 7____________
8. This medicine has an u_____ taste , but it is of great help. 8____________
9. Ann asked Jim to give up smoking not only because she o___ to the smell. 9___________
10. About 70 percent of the p_______ in China are peasants . 10___________
Ⅱ. 单项选择（计分15）
11. Will you please ______ the radio ? The baby is sleeping.
A. turn off B. turn down C. turn up D. turn on
12. The husband coughed day and night .It’s the wife’s fault for giving______ to him so that he didn’t stop smoking .
A. up B. off C. in D. out
13. -Why ______ they ______ the building?
-Because another new one is to be built there .
A. have been destroyed B. did pull down
C. do remove D. are turning down
14. -It is the people who ______ history.
-And labour ____ man itself .
A. create created B. created invented
C. discover made D. invent creates
15. ─I have much difficulty _______ maths.
─Well , I have some trouble________ the English pronunciation.
A. in with B. in learning with C. with in D. in in
16. -You shouldn’t ______ from the girls in your class.
-But I don’t like ______ .
A. keep away being laughed at B. keep to laugh at
C. turn away to be laughed at D. return laughing
17. Last year some over _____ buildings ______ in the city.
A. 20-story were set up B. 20-storey set up
C. 20-storied had set up D. 20-floor had been set up
18. The old mother was _______ to hear that her daughter had a ____ journey.
A. pleasant pleasant B. pleased pleased
C. pleased pleasing D. pleased pleasant
19. -The young mother ______ her baby Jimmy.
-Really ? My brother ______ Jimmy , too .
A. calls names B. named is named
C. named was named D. called calls
20. Old Jack made a living _____ waste paper ,while his brother _______on slaves .
A. by selling made money B. to sell was rich
C. with lives D. on earns his living
21. _____ about three hundred people _____ the local illnesses ____ in that area.
A. As is known to us die from one year
B. It is said that die of a year
C. As we know are killed per year
D. It is reported that kill every year
22. _____ you are unwell , I’ll go to the meeting instead .
A. Because B. For C. Now that D. Though
23. We come to realize that we have to try our best to create a new life _____ our own and ______our own .
A. with , by B. on with C. of by D. for on
24. Don’t you think what to learn in class ____ the same effect ____ the character of the students ______ what to learn through practice ?
A. has on as B. have for as C. is in that D. are to from
25. Which of the following is NOT correct ?
A. Japan faces the Pacific on the east .
B. Taiwan lies in the east of Fujian belonging to China.
C. North of the United States lies Canada .
D. Britain stands to the northwest of France.
（2）语法训练（主谓一致）：
Ⅲ.单项选择
26. All of the work _____ finished and neither the teacher nor the students _____ enough time now .
A. is , has B. is , have C. are , has D. are ,have
27. What I saw ______ two boys running after the thief .
A. is B.are C. are D. were
28. This exercise on agreement of subjects and verbs ______ easy for you .
A. is B. was C. was D. were
29. Here _______ the papers you ask for .
A. is B. was C. were D. are
30. There ______ to be many arguments on both side.
A. seems B. is C. seem D. are
31. Half of the money ________ to you and half of the books _______ to you , too .
A. belong, belong B. belongs , belongs
C. belong, belongs D. belongs, belong
32. Taking pictures _______ not only young men but also many of the old people .
A. are interested in B. are interesting
C. interests D. is interested in
33. Ten minutes _______ more than enough time to complete this exercise.
A. are B. is C. were D. was
34. One hundred and fifty pounds _______ what you should weigh.
A. are B. maybe C. should be D. is
35. You are the one who ______ wrong that Susan is one of those people who ______ out of their way to be helpful .
A. are , goes B. are , go C. is , go D. is , goes
36. Where and when to go ______ Jack since his graduation from college .
A. has been troubling B. has been troubled
C. have troubled D. have been troubling
37. Six eights _____ forty- eight , while six times nine _____ fifty - four .
A. is , are B. are , is C. is , is D. are ,are
38. Nobody but you _______ going to London on business next month.
A. are B. were C. is D. was
39. It ________ Tom and John who ______ here yesterday preparing for today’s experiment.
A. were, were B. are , were C. was , were D. is , were
40. None of the four boys ______ a good swimmer two years ago , but now all of them ______ able to swim across the river .
A. was , are B. is , are C. are , are D. was ,is
Ⅳ. 完型填空（计分20）
Chicago --- lying in the east of the USA--- is a rather young American city . It was 41 completely rebuilt 42 the Creat Fire of 1871. One’s first impression of the city may 43 streams of cars running to and 44 on the highways , skyscrapers and the wide green water of Lake Michigan , 45 lies to the northeast of the city . The 46 of the city is over 228 square miles 47 a population of about 3 million .
The 48 of Chicago on the whole is almost the same as 49 of Beijing with 50 hot days in summer , 51 and fresh days in 52 and icy but often 53 days in winter . The spring in Chicago is 54 changeable in temperature. For instance, I saw a snowfall in early 55 this year 56 some of the flowers were already in 57 bloom . Chicago is also famous 58 its frequent strong winds , and 59 it has got the name of “ the 60 City .”
41. A. most B. almost C. mostly D. merely
42. A. before B. since C. after D. when
43. A. have B. mean C. be D. include
44. A. from B. above C. down D. along
45. A. when B. that C. which D. where
46. A. land B. measure C. area D. size
47. A. having B. with C. for D. and
48. A. climate B. weather C. temperature D. season
49. A. which B. it C. the one D. that
50. A. fairly B. rather C. much D. too
51. A. colorful B. colorless C. colour D. coloured
52. A. spring B. winter C. fall D. summer
53. A. clean B. clear C. cleaning D. clearly
54. A. little B. bit C. a lot D. a little
55. A. April B. May C. January D. June
56. A. and B. but C. when D. while
57. A. full B. filled C. filling D. full of
58. A. as B. for C. of D. with
59. A. in fact B. in a word C. as a result D. above all
60. A. Snowy B. Windy C. Rainy D. Sunny
V. 阅读理解（计分25）
（ A ）
Christopher Columbus discovered America on the 12th of October , 1492. He had spent eighteen years in planning for that wonderful voyage which he made a cross the Atlantic Ocean .The Spanish king and queen ,who were interested in finding a sea route to India ,offered him ships and men so that he could carry out his plan . He crossed the Ocean and discovered strange islands ,inhabited ( vt. 居住于) by people unknown to Europeans .He believed these islands to be part of India.
Early in 1493, Columbus returned to Spain. There was great rejoicing（欢庆）in the country , and he was hailed（欢呼）as the hero who had made an epoch-making discovery .Crowds of people lined the streets to do him honour , and the king and queen welcomed him to their palace. Never had such respect been shown to any common man.
61. Christopher Columbus discovered America ________.
A. on the 12th of November
B. more than 800 years
C. at the beginning of the fifteenth century
D. by the end of the fifteenth century
62. He had spent ______ in planning for the wonderful voyage .
A. eighteen days B. eighteen months
C. eighteen years D. much time
63. Finally the Spanish king and queen offered him ships and men so that _____.
A. he would have faith in himself
B. he could work out his new plan
C. he could display his courage
D. he could put his plan into practice.
64. He crossed the ocean and discovered strange islands , inhabited ______.
A. by a people unknown to Europeans
B. by a people already known to Europeans
C. by Europeans
D. by his fellow-countrymen
65. After returning to Spain he was hailed as the hero ______.
A. who had conquered（征服）nature
B. who had made an epoch-making discovery
C. who had discovered a new planet
D. who had made a great invention
（ B ）
The United States became a rich industrial nation toward the end of the 1800s . There were more goods ,more services , more jobs ,and a high standard of living . There was more of everything, including problems .One problem was monopoly（垄断）. In some cases ,several companies that made the same product would agree not to compete with one another .They would all agree to charge the same price .These agreements made it impossible for buyers to shop around for lower prices for certain products .
Some people decided that huge companies had too much power and controlled too many markets . Because of their wealth and power , they could see to it that governments passed laws favorable to them . Many people believed that monopoly and price fixing were bad for buyers and bad for the country so that they should be broken up .
Such laws and government action didn’t entirely do away with monopoly. Nor did they stop the growth of huge companies . But they did show the American people had decided that some of the changes that taken place were harmful .
66. From paragraph 1, we can know that big companies ______.
A. produced certain kinds of goods
B. sold the same goods at the different prices
C. formed only one big company
D. reached and agreement on prices
67. Because of the agreements between big companies ,______.
A. people had to buy things at certain shops
B. the prices of their goods were much lower
C. people had no choice but to buy goods at fixed prices
D. there were fewer markets in some states
68. According to the laws passed by the national government , companies _______.
A. were not allowed to control the markets
B. could not force people to buy their products
C. should have fixed prices for their products
D. must produce the same kind of goods for the same markets .
69. Some American people thought that ________.
A. the government should make some of the huge companies much smaller
B. the country’s industry was growing too rapidly
C. shops should have the same price for the same kind of goods
D. their country’s getting rich was both good and bad to the people.
70. Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage ?
A. Big companies could not have any effort on the governments .
B. A certain number of markets were still controlled by big companies .
C. Many Americans were worried about the changes in their country.
D. Some of the laws were in favor of buyers .
短文改错（计分15）：
One afternoon in April , 1912, a new ship set off 71_______________
from England to America on it first trip . It was one of 72_______________
the largest and first ship at that time . 73_______________
It was cold , but the trip was pleasant and people are 74_______________
enjoying themselves . The next day was even cold . People 75_______________
could see icebergs here or there . It was night , suddenly 76_______________
the man on watch shouting “Look out ! Iceberg !” 77_______________
It was too late ,a ship hit the iceberg and came to 78_______________
a stop . There that was a very big hole in the ship and 79_______________
water began to come .Slowly the ship stated to go down . 80_______________
参考答案：
1. explored 2. handful 3. independence 4. created 5. tore 6. worthwhile 7.apart 8. unpleasant 9. objected 10. population
11-15. B C D A B 16-20. C A D B A 21-25. B C D A B 26-30. B B A D C 31-35. D C B D A 36-40. A B C C A
41-45. B C D A C 46-50. C B A D B 51-55. A C B D A 56-60. D A B C B
61-65. D C D A B 66-70. D C A D A
71. √ 72. on it --- on its 73. ship ---ships 74. Are --- were 75. Cold---colder 76. or --- and 77. shouting ---shouted 78. a ship --- the ship 79. that 80. come --- come in
Unit 13 The USA
一、 同步题库
(一)单项填空
1.Their wedding yesterday. Many friends came to congratulate them on their marriage.
A.was taken place B.was to happen C.took place D.would hold
2.Since he is ready to help you, you should say“thank you”.
A.at last B.at first C.at most D.at least
3.Mr Smith with his wife goes to the cinema .
A.day by day B.now and again C.here and there D.day and night
4.Drivers,of course,want to travel miles with petrol and
hours.
A.many,a little,few B.more,fewer,less
C.more,less,fewer D.many,less,fewer
5.The rain has my new dress.
A.damaged B.hurt C.destroyed D.failure
6.He was sorry to fail again in the driving test. His only was that he was too nervous.
A.reason B.cause C.regret D.failure
7.Good advice is price.
A.over B.cause C.destroyed D.ruined
8.The basin of water won't freeze, the temperature is well above zero.
A.unless B.because C.even if D.as though
9. put the medicine the little boy can't reach it.
A.Do,where B.Don't that C.Just,which D.Do,there
10.Rather than on a crowded bus,he always prefers a bicycle.
A.to ride,riding B.ride,to ride C.ride,ride D.riding ride
11.You can fly to London this evening you don't mind changing planes in
Paris.
A.except B.if C.until D.unless
12.It's rule that comes home first cooks the dinner for the whole family.
A.who B.somebody who C.whoever D.anybody
13.Beautifully ,the little girl tried to make herself .
A.dressed,noticed B.what will man look like
C.dressed,noticing D.dressed,notice
14.The weather turned out to be very good, was morethan we could expect.
A.what B.which C.that D.if
15.No one can be sure in a million years.
A.what man will look like B.what will man look like
C.man will look like what D.what look will man like
(二)用合适的介词或副词填空
1. my horror,I noticed two men trying to break my office.
2.- the same,I expect you'll come to visit my hometown.
-I'm looking forward that.
3.Farmland is becoming smaller day day several reasons.
4.Don't drive into the bush plenty of water and never throw your cigarette
of the window .
5.We must try all means to get rid flies.
6.Generally speaking,a newly-built house is likely to fall ,
the case of an earthquake.
7. 1920,people from Italy have come to Australia great numbers.
8.The village used to be rather poor.One every three children could
not go to school and most families were debt.
9.-How do farmers round their sheep or cattle?
-It depends the size of their farms.
10.No one has far been brave to enter the forest alone.
(三)改正下面句子的错误(无错的句子不要改；有错的句子中每句只有一处错误)
1.The long fence is used to keeping out a kind of wild dog.
2.Cattles are kept in some countries mainly for beef.
3.They pay peasants very a little money to work in the fields for them.
4.He had to have a job, or go hunger.
5.Their mother can't afford to feed them to meat and fish every day.
6.New types of plants have been developed in Egypt to grow in desert land.
7.Live by hunting, they are very experienced at killing wild animals.
8.In area, Australia is about the same size of the USA, which has more than thirteen times as many people.
9.In Australia fruit and vegetables are grown in areas where is enough water.
10.What surprised me was that he spoke English so well.
11.Mr White slowed down his car, for he saw a blind man cross the road.
12.Why did she keep on wipe her eyes with a damp towel?
(四)完形填空
Agatha Christie seldom went out at night. She never(1)the night when she met a(2)many years ago.
That evening she was (3)to a birthday party which (4)until 2 o'clock in the
morning.Agatha(5)in the quiet street alone.Suddenly from the shadow(阴影)of a (6)building a tall man with a sharp knife in his right hand (7)out at her.“Good morning,lady,” the man said in a (8)voice,“I don't think you wish to (9)here!”
“What do you(10)?”Agatha asked.
“Your earrings(耳环).Take them off!”
Agatha suddenly had a (11)idea.She tried to cover her necklace (12)the collar(衣领)of her overcoat while she used(13)hand to take off her earrings and then she quickly(14)them on the groud.“Take them(15)let me go.”The robber(16)that the girl didn't care for the earrings at all,only trying to (17)the necklace.He thought the necklace (18)cost more,so he said,“Give me your necklace.”
“Oh,sir,It's(19)worth much.Please let me(20)it.”“Stop rubbish(废话).Quick!”
With (21)hands,Agatha took off her necklace.As soon as the robber (22),she picked up her earrings and ran as (23)as she could to one of her friends.The earrings (24)480pounds and the necklace the robber had taken(25)was worth six pounds.
1.A.minded B.forgot C.remember D.regretted
2.A.friend B.murderer C.robber D.stranger
3.A.invited B.asked C.going D.walking
4.A.delayed B.ended C.began D.lasted
5.A.walked B.drove C.waited D.watched
6.A.small B.dark C.old D.low
7.A.looked B.shouted C.stepped D.ran
8.A.loud B.low C.die D.cry
9.A.suffer B.quarrel C.die D.cry
10.A.like B.mean C.want D.say
11.A.bright B.foolish C.funny D.safe
12.A.under B.by C.with D.below
13.A.her right B.her left C.the other D.another
14.A.dropped B.put C.laid D.threw
15.A.and B.but C.so D.then
16.A.knew B.saw C.observed D.thought
17.A.wave B.hid C.defend D.protect
18.A.would B.must C.should D.could
19.A.really B.actually C.even D.not
20.A.wear B.keep C.have D.take
21.A.nervous B.little C.shaky D.beautiful
22.A.signed B.permitted C.disappeared D.nodded
23.A.calmly B.quietly C.quick D.fast
24.A.worth B.valued of C.sold D.cost
25.A.away B.out C.off D.down
答案：(一)1-5 C D B C D 6-10A C B A B 11-15B C A B A
(二)1.To,into 2.All,to 3.by,for 4.with,out either 5.by,of 6.less,down,in 7.Since,in 8.in,in 9.up,on 10.so,enough
(三)1.keeping鰇eep 2.Cattles鯟attle 3.去掉a 4.hunger鰄ungry 5.to鰋n 6.对 7.Live鯨iving 8.of鯽s 9.is前加there 10.对 11.cross鯿rossing 12.wipe鰓iping
(四)1.B 2.C 3.A 4.C 5.A 6.B 7.D 8.B 9.C 10.C 11.A 12.C 13.C 14.D 15.A 16.B 17.D 18.A 19.D 20.B 21.C 22.C 23.D 24.D 25.A
篇10：英语单词游戏64(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
1抢读字母
这是一个训练学生认读字母的游戏，教师将全班分成若干小组，然后逐个出示字母卡片，学生们举手抢答，教师让最先举手的学生读出该字母，读对的给该组记10分，最后得分最多的组为优胜。
2抢答字母组
将全班分成两个小组，并把两套字母卡片分别发给各组学生。游戏开始，教师用中文说：”乐谱的七个调“，”美国“，”圆心和半径“，”中华人民共和国“，持有这些字母卡片的学生应立即站起来并举起字母”ABCDEFG，“USA”，o，r“，”PRC“等，答得既快又准的组获胜。
3看谁快
这是一个训练学生听字母的游戏，将全班分成两组，一组学生持大写字母，另一组学生持小写字母，教师快速念字母，要求持有该字母的学生迅速站起来，最先站起来的人得两分，后站起来的得一分，没站出来的得零分，得分多的组获胜。
4听音辨字母
这是一个训练学生辨别字母的游戏。教师可将读音易混的字母分别写在板上，如GJOW，等，共准备2～4套，同时将学生分成2～4个小组，每组抽一名学生到前面向全班站好，教师发给每人一套卡片(2～4张为宜)，游戏开始，教师念其中的一个字母，学生应立即找出并高举起该字母，先找对的得2分，后找对的得1分，没找对的不得分，最后得分多的组为优胜。
5听音摘字母比赛
这是一个训练学生听认字母能力的游戏，教师先把所学过的大小写字母写在卡片上，按大小写把卡片分成两组贴在黑板上，然后把学生分成两组。游戏开始，每组的第一名学生上黑板前等候，教师说出一个字母，这两名学生就立即摘下教师所念的字母，放到讲台上，一人摘大写字母，另一人摘小写字母，摘得对而快的得2分，对而慢的得1分，不对的不得分，在教师念第一个字母时，各组的第二名学生应上前等候，在第一名学生摘完字母后，教师立即说另一个字母，游戏接着进行，最后得分多的组为优胜。
6图形中找字母
教师在黑板上画一些图形，让学生找出其中所含的字母，例如：
CDIO bdpq CIDO EFHIL
7宾狗(Bingo)
这是一个训练学生听写认读字母能力的游戏，每个学生准备一张纸，并在上面画一个井字，将纸分成九格，然后教师随便念九个学过的字母，学生边听边将字母填在格子中，随便填在哪个格里都行。学生填好后，教师再打乱顺序逐个念这九个字母，学生边听边在听到的字母上画圈，当画的圈在横行、竖行或对角线上成一条直线时，学生便可以边喊”宾狗(Bingo)“边将纸举起让教师检查，最先喊”宾狗“并写得准确的获胜。这个游戏还可以用于音标，单词或数词等。
8传递字母
每一纵排为一组，全班分成若干组，教师分别发给每一组最后一排的学生一张纸，上面写一个字母或字母组(如：KG-PV)，在教师说”开始“后，最后一排的学生即用耳语把卡片上的内容告诉前面的学生，这位学生再把听到的内容告诉前面的学生…这样依次进行下去，最后第一排的学生把所传的字母或字母组写到黑板上，传得最快，最准确的组获胜。
9跟我走
这是一个训练学生按字母表顺序记忆字母的游戏。开始前，先把字母卡片发给学生。然后说出一个字母(如：M)，持有该字母卡片的学生站出来并说：
I am M Follow me ,please.持有字母N的学生应立刻站在持M卡片学生的后面，并说：I am N. Follow me. please，依次类推，对的给10分，错的不给分，这个游戏也可以倒着排次序，也可说 I am M. Who is before me? 持字母L的学生应立刻站在持M卡片学生的前面。
10字母排次序
这是一个训练学生记忆字母顺序的游戏。教师点名，并出示一张字母卡片。被点名的学生立即读出这个字母，并说出一个包含该字母读音的单词接着由被点名学生的前一位学生说出这个字母的前一个字母，和一个含有该字母读音的单词，然后由被点名学生后面一位学生说出这个字母的下一个字母和含有该字母的单词，如：被点名学生：B-bag，前面的学生：A-apple，后面的学生：C-cat凡说错或接不上的就给该组记负分。
11字母排顺序接力赛
把两组20个字母大小写的卡片打乱次序贴在黑板上，一边一组。然后将全班分成两组(或按男女分组)，游戏开始，各组依次上来一个学生，以接力的方式，一人移动一个字母，按字母表的顺序重新排列，看哪组最快最准确。
12快说字母对抗赛
将全班分成若干小组，对抗赛在两个小组中进行，在教师宣布游戏开始后，第一组的第一名学生立即说出一个字母(如C)，第二组的第一名学生应立即说出下一个字母D。说错或不能迅速说出字母的记负分，最后哪组扣分最少为优胜。
13字母排队
每人发一张字母卡片，教师说一个字母(如C)，则持字母C及其后四个字母(DEFG)的学生应立即站出来按次序排好队，如班级人数较多，也可以将学生分成两组进行竞赛。
14大写找小写
教师在黑板上贴出一组大写字母，每组找一名学生到讲台上来，教师发给他们打乱次序的小写字母卡片，在教师宣布”开始“后，他们要尽快按大写字母的次序把小写字母贴在黑板上，贴得最快最准确的组获胜。
15 抢凳子
教师将学生分成两组，分别发给26个字母大写和小写的卡片，并在台前摆放五张凳子围成一圈，游戏开始，教师说出三个字母，同时开始播放音乐，两个组中持这三个字母卡片的六个学生应立即上前并围着凳子小跑；音乐一停就抢凳子坐好，组内三个人都抢到凳子的，给该组记10分。
16 字母滚雪球
这是个训练学生记忆字母能力的游戏，把学生分成若干组或男女两组。游戏开始，第一位学生说一个字母(如：B)第二位学生在后任意加上一个字母(如：BE)然后依次进行(如B…BE…BEX…BEXG…BEXGL…)，说错了就被淘汰，说得多而准确的小组为胜。
17猜字母
全班分成若干组，教师给学生们出示一些字母卡片(如10个字母)，让学生们认读后，教师任意抽出一张卡片放在背后，依次让各组的学生猜，猜对的组得10分，然后教师再出另一张继续让学生们猜，各组第一排的学生都猜过后，第二排的学生接着猜，最后看哪一组得分多。
18 字母书写传递比赛
这是一个训练学生书写字母的游戏，以每一排为一组，将全班分成若干组，教师分别发给每组最后一排的学生一张纸片，上面写有一个字母，只允许这个学生看这个字母，在教师说”开始“后，最后一排的学生即用手指把纸片上的字母写在前面学生的背上…这样依次进行下去，最后第一排的学生把所传的字母写到黑板上，传得最快最准确的组获胜。
19字母书写对抗赛
在黑板上挂一张字母表，参赛的两个组各派四人到前面，面对全班站好队，游戏开始，甲组的第一名学生转过身面向黑板，乙组的第一名学生在字母表上任意指一个字母，甲组的第一名学生看清后，便在该组第二名学生的背上用手指写这个字母，然后让第二名学生把这个字母说出来，说对的记10分，游戏继续进行，由甲组的第一名学生指字母，乙组的第一名学生书写，乙组的第二名学生猜字母，最后得分多的组获胜。
20 找元音
教师给学生们一些既有元音字母，又有辅音字母的卡片，每个学生持一张，教师说”开始“后，持有元音字母卡片的学生应立即举着卡片，到前面来按次序站队，这游戏也可将全班学生分成两组进行竞赛，按正确次序先站好队的组获胜。
21 找伙伴
教师发给学生们字母卡片，每个学生持一张，然后让持有含相同音素的字母的学生站在一起，如教师说音素，则持有F，M，N，S，X等字母的学生应立刻到前面站在一起。
22 摘苹果，学音素
教师先在黑板上挂一张长满苹果的果树挂图，每个苹果上都写有一个字母，再出示几个篮子，每只篮子都贴有一个字母，如S，A(或K)E(或P)，然后找几名学生上前面来，把果树上的苹果摘下来，将含有相同音素的字母放入相应的篮子里，如：将写有F，M，N，X等字母的苹果放在贴有字母S的篮子里，将写有B，C，D，V等字母的苹果放入有字母E(或P)的篮子里，最快最准确的获胜。
33抢读单词
这是训练学生从认读单词能力的游戏，教师将全班分成若干小组，然后逐个出示一些单词卡片或图片，学生们举手抢答，教师让最先举手的学生读出该单词并说出其中的意思，或将图片上的单词读出来拼出来，读对说对拼对的给该组记10分，得分最多的组为优胜。
34看图猜词
以每一纵行为一组进行竞赛，教师先出示一些单词的图片，然后收起来，再从中抽出一张放在身后，由每组的第一名学生轮流猜，可以问：“Is it a plane (bus, bike)?”回答：Yes it is.或No，It isn’t.等。哪个组猜对了就给记10分，然后接着往下猜，第一排的学生猜过后第二排接着猜，最后得分最多的组为优胜。做这个游戏时，还可以找一位学生来主持，由他让学生们猜。
35看图写单词
这是让学生们复习学过单词的游戏，教师事先把需复习的20个单词用简笔画画在小黑板上或大白纸上，先不要让学生们看见，然后将全班按前后左右四人一组分成若干小组。竞赛开始，教师将小黑板或白纸挂起来，让学生们看一分钟，然后收起来，再给学生们两分钟时间将看到的单词写出来，写得最多最正确的组获胜。
36相同词首单词拼读赛
将全班分成若干小组，教师说一个字母(如：D)，第一组的第一名学生立即站起来，说出并拼出三个(也可以是五个或十个，视学生词汇量的多少而定)以字母D打头的单词，如：desk,dog,door等，念不出或念错要扣分，这位学生说完后，教师念另一个字母，由第二组的第一名学生说。这样依次进行下去，最后看哪组得人最多为胜，做这个游戏时，也可以让两组的学生轮流说字母(如由第一组的第一名学生说字母，由第二组的第一名学生答)这样就成了对抗赛，注意不要说Q，X，Z等字母。
37拼单词对抗赛
将全班分成若干小组，对抗赛在两个小组中进行，在教师宣布游戏开始后，第一组的第一名学生立即用中文说出一个单词(如：自行车)，第一组的第二名学生应立即将这个单词说出来，说错或不能迅速说出单词的记负分，最后哪组扣分最少为优胜。
39相同元音单词拼读对抗赛
将全z班分成若干小组，对抗赛在两个小组中进行，游戏开始，教师说一个单词(如：bike)，第一组的学生A应立即站起来，说出一个含相同元音(即元音［ai］的单词)，如：five，说出词义并拼出来，说不出，说错词义拼错要扣分，这位学生说完后，教师念另一个单词，由第二组的学生A站起来说，这样依次进行下去，最后看哪组得分最多为优胜。做这个游戏时，也可以让两组学生轮流说单词(如由第一组的学生A说一个单词，由第二组的学生A答)，这样就成了对抗赛。
40拼读单词列队比赛
将全班分成两组，教师发给每个学生一张字母卡片，不常用的字母(如Q，Z)可以一人多拿几张，游戏开始，教师说一个单词，如ship，或出示一张轮船的图片，两个组持S，H，I，P字母的学生应立即站到讲台前按顺序站好队，先按正确次序排好队的为优胜。
41单词接龙
将全班分成若干组，每组来一个学生在黑板上写出一个以某字母为词首的单词，前一个单词的词尾字母作下一个单词的词首字母。在规定时间内哪一组接的词最多为优胜。如：pen-nice-eight-tea-an-no-or-right-teacher-radio-on-nor等。
42猜袋中物
教师从书包中拿出一件东西放入一只不透明的袋子里，由每组的第一名学生轮流猜，可以问：“Is it a banana(an apple, orange)?”猜对了为优胜。
43换宝
教师准备好一些单词卡片(有的写中文，有的写英词)和图画。将卡片和图画放入一只不透明的袋子里。游戏开始教师说，袋子里装的是许多宝物，让学生们上来轮流摸宝，如果摸到的是写有英文的卡片，则要英译汉；如果是中文，则要汉译英并拼读出来；如果是图片，则要看图说英语。
44看图猜词大家答
教师先出示一些单词的图片，然后收起来，请一名学生到前面猜，猜的学生面对全班，再请另一名学生上前站在他身后，抽出一张图片高举在手中。猜的学生可以问全班：“Is it a plan(ship,bike)?”等，全班学生答：“Yes.”或“ No.”猜对后可以换另一位学生继续猜。
45猜颜色
教师先准备一些单词的图片。如白色的飞机，红色的小汽车，黑色的鞋，绿色的上衣等。游戏开始，请一名学生到前面来猜，猜的学生面对全班站立，再请另一名学生上前站在他身后，抽出一张图片高举在手中并说：“This is a plane(car).What colour is it?Please guess.”猜的学生可以问全班：“Is it red (black)?”等，全班学生答：“Yes.”或“No.”猜对后可以换另一位学生继续猜。
46缺了什么
这是训练学生记忆力的游戏。教师出示一些实物，放在讲台上，让上来猜的学生先看半分钟，然后背向讲台面向学生站立，再让另一位学生上来取走一样东西。然后说：“Pease guess What is missing?”猜的学生要在10秒钟内用英语把缺的东西说出来。
47传递单词
每一排为一组，全班分成若干组，教师分别发给每一组最后一排的学生一张纸，上面写个单词。在教师说开始后，最后一排的学生即用耳词把纸上的单词告诉前面的学生，这位学生再把听到的单词告诉前面的学生…这样依次进行下去。最后，第一排的学生把所传的单词写到黑板上，传得最快，最准的组获胜。
48找对子
教师将20个单词的图片贴在黑板上，另外将20张对应的单词卡扣着放在讲台上，然后让参赛的两组学生逐一上来抽卡片，抽出卡片后先要举给学生们看，然后把黑板上相应的图摘下来并将单词读出来，找对读对的得2分，找对读错给1分，找错了的不得分，卡片全部抽完后，得分多的为优胜。
49摸鼻子
这是训练学生听单词并快速作出反应的游戏，在学了单词nose,ear,eye,leg,hand,arm,finger等单词后，教师可快速说出这些单词，学生听到指令便用手触摸这个部位，最快最准的获胜，当学生做得非常熟悉后，还可以增加难度，可要求学生听到哪个单词不许摸哪个部位，如教师说“nose”，学生不可以摸鼻子，但可以摸眼睛，耳朵，嘴等其它部位，这个游戏可以用竞赛的形式进行，每组抽一名学生到前面作动作，做错了就被淘汰，最后剩下的一人或两人为优胜。
50听单词做动作
这个游戏的玩法与“摸鼻子差不多，在学了run, walk, sit, stand, swim, skate, play, football, play, basketboll等动词和动词词组后，教师可快速说出这些动词或词组，学生听到便做动作，最快最准的获胜，这个游戏同样可以用竞赛的形式进行，每组抽一名学生到前面做动作，做错了就被淘汰，最后剩下的一人或两人为优胜。
51宾狗(Bingo)
这个游戏的玩法与游戏(7)相同，每个学生准备一张纸，并在上面画一个井字，将纸分成九格，然后教师随便念九个学过的单词，学生边听边将单词写在格子中，随便填在哪格里都好。学生填好后，教师再打扰次序逐个念这九个单词，学生边听边在听到单词上画圈，当画的圈在横行、竖行或对角线上成为一条直线时，学生就可边喊“宾狗(Bingo)”边将纸举起让教师检查，最先喊“宾狗”写得准确的获胜。这个游戏还可以用于数词，也就是说，教师可以随意念九个数词来代替九个单词，让学生填入格子中。
52报电话号码对抗赛
以下几个游戏都是训练学生说数词能力的，这个游戏的玩法是：将全班分成若干个小组，对抗赛在两个小组中进行，参赛的每个学生都要准备一张纸，上面写一个六位数的电话号码，在教师宣布游戏开始后，第一组的第一名学生立即出示他手中的号码，第二组的第一名学生应立即用英文将这个号码说出来，然后该学生出示手中的号码，第一组的第二名学生应立即将这个号码说出来，说错或不能迅速说出的记负分，最后哪组扣发最少为优胜。
53猜年龄
教师事先准备好一批人物的图片，如Mike,Kate等，在图片的反面写上数字，如5，8，11，15等。这个游戏可以每一纵行为一组进行竞赛。由教师或一位学生出示一张图片，由每组的第一名学生轮流猜，可以说：“Is he(she)twelve(eleven)?”等。哪个组的学生猜对了就给该组记10分，然后接着往下猜。第一排的学生猜过后第二排接着猜。最后哪个组得分最多为优胜。
54加减运算对抗赛
将全班分成若干个小组，对抗赛在两个小组中进行，在教师宣布游戏开始后，第一组的第一名学生立即出一道加减题，如：Three and four.等，第二组的第一名学生应立即用英文将答案说出来，如：seven,three等，然后，该学生出另一道题，由第一组的第二名学生回答，答错或不能迅速答出的记负分，最后哪组扣分最少优胜。
55猜袋中东西数
将全班分成若干小组，每组抽一人到前面，背对着班级。教师拿一个袋子，并向学生们借一些书本，铅笔，钢笔，橡皮等，放入袋中，然后让各组学生轮流猜袋子里东西的数目，猜对的给该组记10分。
56找邻居
教师让全班学生依次报数，然后用汉语说一个数，如“三十六”则三十六号学生应立即起来并用英语报数“thirty-six”，然后前面一号(35号)和后面一号(37号)就要相继站起来，用英语说“thirty-five”和“thirty-seven”。这个游戏也可以分组竞赛，教师可将学生按左右分成两组，一组报单数，另一组报双数，在教师说一个数(如“二十七”)后，某一组中的27号学生应首先站起来用英语说“twenty-seven”另一组中其后面一号(28号)的学生要紧接着站起来，用英语说“twenty-eight”，不能迅速站起来或是说错了的要扣分，最后扣分最少的组为优胜。
57拍七
将全班按纵行分成若干组，每组派一至二人到前面围成一圈，教师任意指定一个学生开始说one，然后依次让第二个two说，第三个说three…说到seven,seventeen…或七的倍数(如fourteen,twenty-one等)时，就不报数而用拍手代替，该拍手时报了数，或者报错了数字，就被罚下去。游戏重新开始，直到剩下最后两个人，给这两个组记10分。做这个游戏，还可以与记单词结合起，可以在该拍手时说一个刚学过的比较难记的单词，如language等，说错了要被罚下去，并换一个单词重新开始游戏，这样不仅可以帮助学生读英语单词，还可以复习单词，这个游戏除了可以分组竞赛外，还可以在全班进行。
58找出不合群的单词
教师说一组单词(如car,bus,jeep,sheep)，比一比谁能最先挑出意义上不合群的词。上述单词中sheep不合群,因为car,bus,jeep,属于交通工具一类的，而sheep属于动物一类的词。
59增减字母变单词
教师说出或出示一个单词，要求学生增加或减少一个字母使其变成另一个单词，如：it-its,read-red.这个游戏也可以进行抢答。
60变换字母次序组成新单词
教师说出或出示一个单词，要求学生变换字母次序使其变成另一个单词，如：east-seat,这个游戏也可以进行抢答。下列单词可供参考，are-ear;read-dear;meat-team;stop-spot;now-won等。
61分拆单词链
教师出示一个单词锭，如there door under，要求学生在一定时间内将单词链拆成最多的单词。如：the, he, her, here, there, red, door, or, run, under.
62词中有词
教师给出一个单词，根据该单词中的字母，组成新单词，看谁组成的单词多，例如：late(5):a, at, ate, let, tea下列单词可供参考，括号中的数字是可组成的最低单词数：team(5),table(10),woman(10)answer(10),strong(10),mountain(20),honest(15),nothing(15),father(20),cart(5).
63反义词(同义词，对应词)拔河赛
首先要做一“拔河绳”，方法是在投影仪或磁性黑板上画一横线，中间位置画一竖线作为“界河”，左右划五个小格最外边的两个小格作为“界河线”。将一只棋子放在中心线上作为绳的中心，若没有磁性黑板，可以在黑板上横挂一绳子，绳子中间挂一红纸环作为绳的中心。然后将学生分成若干队，由其中两队进行拔河，游戏开始，甲队的第一人说出一个词，乙队的第一个人应立即说出其反义词(同义词或对应词)，要是他说对了，棋子(或红纸环)要向甲方移动一格，要是他说不出或说错了，棋子(或红纸环)要向乙方移动一格，然后乙队的第一个人说一个词，由甲队的第二人说出其反义词(同义词或对应词)，当棋子移动了五格，到达乙方界河边时，甲方胜利了。
64s名词复数拔诃赛
这个游戏的玩法和上一个游戏差不多，只是甲队第一个人说一个单词后，乙队的第一个人要说出并拼出这个单词的复数形式，胜负的确定也和上面的游戏一样。
篇11：高三英语词汇双解及用法(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Unit 1 That must be a record
Words and expressions
beard n. the hair which grows on a man's face (下巴上的)胡须；络腮胡子
Sailors often grow beards. 船员常爱留胡子。
cheetah n. 猎豹；印度豹
sailfish n. 旗鱼
voyager n. 航行者；航海者；航天者；旅客
tight adj. firm so that you can not untie or undo it easily 紧的；牢固的
These shoes are too tight----I need a bigger pair. 这鞋太紧--我需要一双大一点的。
tightrope n.[c] 拉紧的绳索/钢索
a tightrope walker 走绳索 (表演) 者
gorge a deep, narrow passage with steep rocky sides; a ravine 峡谷
the Three Gorges 三峡
edition n.[c] form in which a book is published 版本；版次
The first edition of Robinson Crusoe was printed in 1719.
《鲁滨逊漂流记》第一版是在17出版的。
moustache n.[c] 髭(蓄在上唇之须)；小胡子=(美)mustache
have [wear] a mustache [a pair of mustaches] 留着小胡子 [留着八字胡]
Urumqi [uXrumqi] n. 乌鲁木齐(即迪化,中国新疆自治区首府省会)
brewery n. an establishment for the manufacture of malt liquors, such as beer and ale
啤酒厂 pl. breweries
conclude vt. to bring or come to an end 结束
The meeting was concluded yesterday. 会议昨天结束了。
vt. come to an idea after thinking 推断出；断定
We concluded that the animal was dead as it did not move.
我们断定这只野兽是死的，因为它一动也不动。
hire vt. pay to use something, or to use someone's help 租；雇佣
He hired a car with a driver. 他租了一辆带司机的汽车。
send in send to the proper person or authority; hand in 递送；呈送；提交
Have you sent in your application? 你的申请书送上去了吗？
set down to write down; copy; record in writing or printing 写下；抄下；记下
You had better set your idea down before you forget it.
你最好在未忘记以前把你的想法写下来。
feat n. an act of skill, endurance, imagination, or strength; an achievement 技艺；本领
feats of horsemanship 马术
a notable act or deed, especially an act of courage; an exploit 功绩
a feat of arms 战功
length n.[u] the distance from one end to the other 长；长度
What is the length of the car? 这辆汽车有多长？
hectare n. a metric unit of area equal to 100 ares (2.471 acres) 公顷 [等于100公亩(2.471英亩）]（合十五市亩）
athletic adj. of, relating to, or befitting athletics or athletes 运动（员）的
athletic sports 体育运动
adj. physically strong; muscular体格健壮的
an athletic girl 身强力壮的女孩
fade vi. to lose strength, colour, freshness, etc. 凋谢；褪色
Flowers fade when they come to an end. 花儿开过就凋谢了。
vt. cause to lose colour 使褪色
The sunlight has faded my tie. 阳光晒得我的领带褪了颜色。
in a row 一个接一个地；连续不断地
sit in a row 坐成一排
in the first place adv. 首先；第一
account n. saying or writing about what happened 叙述；描写；报道
He has given me an account of what happened. 他对我讲了事情的经过。
n. a record of money owned or owed in a bank, hotel, etc. 账目；账户
A shop keeper must keep accounts. 店主必须记账。
attempt vt. to try 尝试；试图；努力
They attempted to finish the work within a month. 他们试图在一个月内完成这项工作。
n. the act of trying 企图；试图
He made an attempt to pass the exam, but it was too difficult.他试图通过考试，但考试太难了。
suitable adj. right for a person, happening, place, etc合适的；恰当的
Thick clothes are not suitable for hot weather. 厚衣服不适于热天穿。
apply for ask for 申请; 请求
He applies to the consul for a visa. 他向领事申请签证。
inspect vt. look at something carefully 检查；细看
Ted inspected the car before he bought it. 特德仔细看了那辆车之后才买。
vt. visit people or places to see that work is done well 视察；参观
Several years later, they heard that Napoleon himself was coming to inspect them.
几年以后，听说拿破仑本人要来视察他们。
confirm vt. make certain 证实；确认
The statement is confirmed by testimony. 这个说法由证据所证实了。
certificate n. piece of paper with writing that tells something about someone 证书；证明
I received this certificate when I passed the exam. 我考试及格以后领到了这份证书。
gradual adj. happening slowly and step by step; not sudden 逐渐的；逐步的
It didn't happen suddenly; the change was gradual. 这事情不是突然发生的，是逐渐变化的。
blank adj. empty; with no writing on it 空白的
Give me a blank sheet of paper, please. 请给我一张空白的纸。
n. a space left empty or to be filled in 空白处
Fill in the blank with prepositions. 用介词填空。
enthusiastic adj. with enthusiasm 热情的；热心的
The imperialists are enthusiastic about the war. 帝国主义者热衷于战争。
bid n.[c] the amount offered or proposed; an offer or proposal of a price投标；出价
Bids were invited for building the bridge. 为新桥的建造而进行招标。
vi. to make an offer to pay or accept a specified price 投标 (bid; bid)
Several companies will bid for/on the contract. 数家公司要投标争取合约。
decade n.[c] a period of 10 years十年
Prices have risen steadily during the past decade. 过去十年中价格已稳步地上涨。
committee n. small group of people chosen by others to plan and organize委员会
The bill has passed through the committee. 该提案已在委员会通过。
fascinate vt. to attact; to charm 使入迷；吸引
The monkeys in the zoo fascinated me. 动物园里的猴子使我着了迷。
burst vi. to break because of the force inside 炸破；胀破
The bag was so full that it burst open. 袋子那么满，都胀裂了。
vi. explode 爆炸
I had an accident when a tyre burst. 车胎爆了，我出了事故。
burst into begin suddenly or violently 突然开始；爆发出
They were so moved that they burst into tears. 他们都感动得哭了起来。
underline vt. draw a line under a word, sentence, etc.在（词、句子等）下面划线
Underline all the sentences you do not know. 在你不懂的句子下面划一条线。
globe n. anything round like a ball 球状物；地球；地球仪
I'm interested in studying the globe in my spare time. 闲暇时我对研究地球仪很感兴趣。
bush n.[c] plant like a short tree, with many branches灌木
My coat caught in a bush. 我的衣服被矮树丛钩往了。
n.[u] wild country with small trees 灌林地带；荒野
There is much bush in Australia and Africa. 在澳洲和非洲有许多未开发的丛林。
spaceman n. 宇航员；太空人
ramp n. an inclined surface or roadway connecting different levels. 斜面；斜坡
a place where a sharp change in level or direction occurs 弯道
skilful adj. experienced 熟练的；有技巧的；灵巧的
The child has become skillful in reading and writing. 那个小孩变得善于读写。
He is skillful with his fingers. 他的手指灵巧。
skateboard n. long piece of wood or plastic on wheels on which one stands while it runs quickly over the ground 滑板
skateboarder R n. 玩滑板的人
administration n. management, especially of business affairs; the activity of a sovereign state in the exercise of its powers or duties 经营；管理；行政
permission n.[u] allowing someone to do something允许；许可；同意
May I have permission to leave early? 可以让我早点走吗？
schoolmate n. a companion or an associate in one's school 同学；校友
They are my schoolmates. 他们是我的同学。
grandparent n. a parent of one's mother or father; a grandmother or grandfather (外）祖父（母）
recently adv. lately; not long ago 最近地；近来地
This book was published recently. 这本书是最近出版的。
familiar adj. usual, that you often see, hear, etc. 熟悉的；常见的
I am familiar with this idea. 我晓得这个意见。
The singer is familiar to every one of us. 这位歌唱家是我们大家熟悉的。
capture v. catch and hold someone or something 捕获；占领
Our army captured 1,000 of the enemy. 我军俘虏敌军一千人。
to attract and hold 吸引
tales of adventure that capture the imagination 引起想象的探险故事
centre on/upon 将某人/谋事当作中心/重点
factor n. any of the things that cause or bring about a certain result因素；要素
Time is an important factor to consider in cooking. 烹调过程中掌握时间是很重要的。
concentrate vt. bring together into one place 集中
We concentrated our forces against the enemy's position. 我们集中兵力攻击敌人的阵地。
vi. meet in a common centre 集中
He's tired and can't concentrate. 他累了，注意力不能集中。
concentrate on fix one's efforts and attention on把…集中在…上；全神贯注于
We are concentrating our efforts on socialist construction. 我们正集中力量建设社会主义。
helmet n. a head covering of hard material to protect the head头盔；钢盔；防护帽
The man on the motorcycle wore a helmet. 骑摩托车的人戴了一顶头盔。
teenage adj. of, relating to, or applicable to those aged 13 through 19 十几岁的；
青少年的
a teenage girl 一个十几岁的女孩
truly adv. really; sincerely; genuinely 真正地；真诚地；真心地
Are you truly happy in your work? 你真的对你的工作满意吗？
We are truly sorry for the inconvenience. 我们真心为不便感到抱歉
delight vt. make someone very pleased, happy, etc.给人快乐；使欣喜
Her dancing delighted everyone. 她的舞蹈使人人高兴。
n.[u] great pleasure or happiness 快乐；欣喜
She read the book with delight. 她读了这本书感到非常满意。
delighted adj. very pleased; happy高兴的；快乐的
I am delighted to see you. 见到你很高兴。
energetic adj. 精力旺盛/充沛的；充满活力的
an energetic person 精力充沛的人
an energetic performance 充满活力的演出
cautious adj. careful 小心的；谨慎的
The students should be cautious not to make any mistakes in spelling.
学生们拼写时应非常小心，以避免发生错误。
outgoing adj. eager to mix socially with others; friendly好交际的；外向的
an outgoing personality 开朗的性格
register v. to enroll officially or formally, especially in order to vote or attend classes; to set down in writing; record 登记；注册；记录
He registered the birth of his child. 他登记了孩子的出生日。
skim v. to read or glance through (a book, for example) quickly or superficially浏览；略读
The book is worth skimming through. 这本书值得浏览一下。
the Tour de France 环法自行车赛
Unit 2 Crossing limits
Words and expressions
evaluate vt. to examine and judge carefully; appraise; to ascertain or fix the value or worth of 评价；估计
The research project has only been under way for three months, so it's too early to evaluate its success. 这个研究项目进行了不过三个月,所以要对它的成绩作出评价为时尚早。
various adj. of different kinds各种各样的；不同种类的
There are various ways of cooking rice. 做米饭有各种不同的方法。
in the name of acting for 以…的名义；代表…
We're very glad to greet you in the name of the Chinese people.
我们非常高兴以中国人的名义向你们致意。
key adj. of crucial importance; significant 关键的；极重要的
key decisions 意义重大的结论 the key element of the thesis 论文的中心成分
origin n. beginning; start of anything 起源；来源
What was the origin of Man? 人类的起源是什么？
n. parentage, birth, or ancestors 出身；来历
He is a researcher of working class origin. 他是工人出身的研究员。
equip vt. put in a place, or give someone, all the tools, instruments, etc. that are needed 装备；配备
Our factory is equipped with modern machines. 我厂是用现代化机械装备的。
endeavor n. an earnest attempt 努力；尽力
We make every endeavor to satisfy our customers. 我们尽全力使顾客满意。
v. to attempt by employment of effort 努力；尽力
We must always endeavour to improve our work. 我们总要努力改进自己的工作。
puzzle n. problem; something that is difficult to understand; game where you must find an answer 难题；谜
It is a puzzle to me how he could come here. 我不知他是怎么到这里来的。
vt. make you think a lot because you do not understand it 使困惑；使糊涂
I am puzzled by the difficult question. 我被难题难住了。
wealthy adj. having much wealth富有的；富裕的
Wealthy men are not always happy. 有钱人未必总是幸福的。
Asian adj. native of Asia 亚洲(人)的
What's the difference between the Asian elephants and African elephants?
亚洲象和非洲象有什么不同
n. a native or inhabitant of Asia 亚洲人
in exchange for in the place of something that you have given to someone 交换；互换
I'll give you three sweets in exchange for an apple. 我拿三块糖换你一个苹果。
spice n. things like ginger, pepper, cinnamon, cloves, etc. that are put into food 香料；调味品（如姜、胡椒等）
Pepper is a spice. 胡椒是一种调味品。
Arab n. a native of Arabia 阿拉伯人
adj. of the Arabs or Arabia; Arabian 阿拉伯(人)的
westernmost adj. 最西 (端) 的
African n. a native or inhabitant of Africa 非洲人
adj. of or relating to Africa or its peoples, languages, or cultures 非洲(人)的
ambassador n. a diplomatic official appointed a as representative by one government to another 大使；使节
He was appointed ambassador to Japan. 他奉派为驻日大使。
Roman adj. of or relating to ancient or modern Rome or its people or culture
罗马(人)的
n. a native, inhabitant, or citizen of ancient or mod
ern Rome 罗马人
empire n. a group of countries under one ruler, usually an emperor 帝国
the Roman Empire 罗马帝国
rhinoceros n. 犀牛
horn n. a hard, pointed thing which grows on the head of some animals（羊、牛、鹿等动物的）角
Horns are usually in pairs, one on each side of the head.
角一般都是成对的，在头部两侧一边长一个。
n. an instrument for making loud warning noises 喇叭
The taxi driver blew his horn to tell us that he had arrived.
出租汽车司机按喇叭告诉我们他到了。
wander vi. to go from place to place with no special purpose 漫游；闲逛
The boys wandered around the town with nothing to do.
那些男孩无所事事，在镇上到处闲逛。
motherland n. one's native land 祖国
awareness n.[u] 觉察；意识；知道
awareness of one's ignorance 意识到自己的无知
existence n.[u] being 存在；生存
The tree owes its existence to soil. 树木依赖泥土生存。
accurate adj. conforming exactly to fact; errorless 准确的
deviating only slightly or within acceptable limits from a standard 精确的
Is this watch accurate? 这只表准吗?
navy n. all the warships of a country, with officers and men 海军
the army, navy and air force 陆、海、空军三军
treasure n. store of gold, silver, jewels, money, or other valuable things 财宝；财富
They were looking for buried treasure. 他们在寻找埋在地下的财宝。
fleet n. big groups of ships; a number of ships, airplanes, automobiles etc. moving together 舰队；船队；机群；汽车队
The Sixth Fleet of the United States Navy was ordered to the South Sea.
美国海军第六舰队受命驶向南海。
command n. an order; the act of commanding 命令；指挥
The policeman gave the command to stop. 警察下令停下。
n. ability to control; mastery 控制；精通
He has a good command of English. 他英语掌握得很好。
vt. order; control 命令；指挥；控制
The policeman commanded the car to stop. 警察命令汽车停下。
set sail (from/to/for) on a voyage 启航；扬帆
The liner set sail for New York at 8:30. 轮船在八时半启航开往纽约。
royal adj. of or relating to a monarch. 王室的；皇家的
a royal family/palace 王室/宫 a royal house 皇家
embassy n.[c] place where embassy people live and work 大使馆
To go to the United States, you must get a visa at the U.S. embassy.
你必须从美国大使馆得到签证才能去美国。
zebra n.[c] an African mammal related to the horse and having dark stripes on a light body 斑马
The zebra is a kind of horse that lives in Africa. 斑马是生活在非洲的一种马。
in return in exchange 作为回报
She presented me a dictionary in return. 她送给我一本词典作为答谢。
symbolic adj. of, relating to, or expressed by means of symbols or a symbol象征的；
符号的
The dove is symbolic of peace. 鸽子象征和平。
symbolic language 符号语言
volunteer n. someone who volunteers to do a job or to join the army 自愿者
That man is a volunteer fireman in this town. 那个人是这个镇里的志愿消防队员。
v. offer to do a job that is unpleasant, difficult, or dangerous 自愿从事
Two men volunteered to search for the missing climber.
两个人自告奋勇去寻找那位失踪的登山运动员。
radium n. a chemical element that gives off rays 镭
Radioactivity is a special quality of radium. 放射性是镭的一种特性。
sum n. an amount obtained as a result of adding numbers 总数；和
Eleven is the sum of six and five. 十一是六加五的和。
n. amount of money一笔（金额）
He paid a large sum for the house. 他出一笔巨款买了这所房子。
dam n.[c] a barrier constructed across a waterway to control the flow or raise the level of water 水坝；堤
There are several dams across the Huai River. 淮河上有几座水闸。
bring up look after and educate children, etc 教养；培养
I was brought up by my aunt. 我是我姑姑抚养成人的。
introduce to notice or consideration, mention 提出
Why don't you bring this up at the meeting? 你何不在会上提出这个问题？
horizon n. line where the earth or sea seems to meet the sky 地平线
The sun sank below the horizon. 太阳落到地平线以下了。
navigation n. the act of navigating; the passage of ships, etc. over the sea, etc. 航行；航海；航空
aerial navigation 空中航行；航空 ocean navigation 远洋航行
Korea n. peninsula in east Asia, extending south from northeast China 朝鲜；韩国
suggest vt. give someone an idea; say that something will be possible 建议；提议 I suggested that we (should) hold a meeting tonight. 我提议我们今晚开个会。
vt. bring to mind 使人想起；暗示
Smoke suggests fire. 有烟就有火。
accomplish vt. finish something; complete; carry out 完成；实现
You have accomplished a purpose. 你达到了目的。
apart from prep. with the exception of; besides 除…外；除…外还
Apart from the cost, it will take a lot of time. 除了费钱以外，还要花很多时间。
sickness n.[u] the condition of being sick; illness 疾病
Viruses and germs cause most sicknesses. 病毒与细菌引起大部分的疾病。
n.[u] be overcome by a feeling of sickness 恶心
unable adj. not able to do something不能的；不会的；无能为力的
He was unable to walk. 他不能走。
the Himalayas n. 喜马拉雅山脉
sacred adj. of god or religion; holy神圣的
A church is a sacred building. 教堂是一个神圣的处所。
Sherpa n. 夏尔巴人(西藏的一种族)
Tibet n. 西藏
honesty n. the condition or quality of being honest; freedom from deceit or cheating
诚实
(prov.) Honesty is the best policy. （谚）诚实为上策。
dedication n.[u] the act of dedicating奉献
His dedication to teaching gained the respect of his students.
他对教学的奉献得到了学生们尊敬。
n.[c] words used in dedicating a book or other work 题献；献词
The book's dedication reads ”To Mother". 本书献词写道：“献给母亲”。
ideal adj. very best, exactly right 完美的；理想的
This place is ideal for a picnic. 这个地方野餐最理想。
refer vi. speak about something 谈到；涉及；所指
This is not the dictionary which I referred to. 这不是我所指的那本词典。
vt. hand over to (someone) for a decision; send or direct to (someone or something) for help or action 呈交；提交
We refer the question to them. 我们把这个问题提交他们处理。
refer to 提到
Don't refer to that problem again, please. 请不要再提那个问题了。
run out become exhausted or used up; come to the end of a supply, etc. 被用完；耗完
The aircraft will run out of fuel in another hour. 飞机再过一小时燃料就将用完。
technological adj. 技术的
technological development 科学技术的发展
aircraft n. machine that flies; aeroplane; helicopter 飞行器；飞机
arise vi. happen; start发生；产生 (arose; arisen)
How did the quarrel arise? 争吵是怎样发生的？
vi. move upward; ascend 向上；上升
When I started off, the sun was arising. 我出发时太阳正在升起。
evidence n.[u] proof; something that shows what has happened and why it has happened 证据；证明
There is no evidence that he is guilty. 没有证据证明他有罪。
chairman n. the person who is in charge of meeting 主席；董事长
chairman of the meeting 会议主席 a bank board chairman 银行董事长
praise vt. say that something or someone is good表扬；称赞
The teacher praised Tom for his homework. 教员表扬汤姆的家庭作业做得好。
n. the act of saying that a person or a thing is good, words expressing admiration, applause
赞美；称赞 He had a lot of praise for Tom's work. 他十分称赞汤姆的工作。
Christopher Columbus [XkristRfR kRXlVmbRs] 克里斯托佛哥伦布(西班牙航海家)
Marco Polo [XmQkRu XpRulRu] 马可波罗(意大利旅行家)
Ceylon n. 锡兰(现称斯里兰卡)
Unit 3 The land down under
Words and expressions
Canberra n. 堪培拉(澳大利亚首都)
outback n. [the ～] (澳大利亚)内地 adj. 内地的
territory n. land that belongs to one government 领土；领域
This island is our territory. 这个岛是我国领土。
Queensland [‘kwI:nzlEnd] n. 昆士兰 (澳大利亚州名)
Victoria n. 维多利亚(澳大利亚州名)
Tasmania [tAz’meniE] n. 塔斯马尼亚(岛)（澳大利亚地名）
Aborigines n. (尤指澳大利亚的)土著居民
strait n. a narrow piece of water connecting two larger bodies of water 海峡
The strait is narrow. 这个海峡很窄。
Torres [‘tRrEs]Strait 托雷斯海峡
islander n. an inhabitant of an island 岛上居民
fellow adj. being of the same kind, group, occupation, society; having in common certain characteristics or interests 同事的，同类的
fellow workers 同事
n. people of the same sort, friends; a man 同类；伙伴；家伙
We are fellows at school. 我们是同学。
What a nice fellow he is! 他是个多么好的人啊！
Portuguese adj. 葡萄牙（人）的；葡萄牙语的 n. 葡萄牙人；葡萄牙语
Dutch adj. 荷兰(人)的；荷兰(语)的 n. [the ～] 荷兰人；荷兰语
claim vt. say that you should have something 要求
He can fairly claim to have more. 他可以正当地要求多给些。
vt. to say that something belongs to you 认领
I lost my umbrella, but claimed it at the lost property office.
我把伞丢了，后来在失物招领处认领回来了。
vt. state as a fact, despite objections; assert; maintain 声称
He claims to have written the article in two days. 他声称只用两天就把文章写成了。
n. a demand for something to which one has a real or supposed right 要求
They made a claim for higher pay. 他提出更高报酬的要求。
criminal n. a person who has done something seriously against law 罪犯；犯人
The judge imposes a punishment on the criminal. 法庭处罚这个罪犯。
adj. law breaking 犯罪的
Criminal parents could corrupt any child. 犯罪的父母可使孩子变坏。
govern v. to make laws for a country, to rule统治；治理
Who governs this country? 谁治理这个国家？
governor n. someone who rules a state or province 州长；省长；总督
Who is the Governor of Hong Kong? 香港总督是谁？
newcomer n. one who has only recently arrived 新来的人；新手
a newcomer to the big city 刚来到大都市的人
a newcomer to politics 政界的新人
as a consequence (of) in consequence 作为/由于……的结果；因而
She worked hard at her lessons and as a consequence got high marks.
她努力学习功课，因而得了很高的分数。
resemble vt. to exhibit similarity or likeness to 像；类似
She resembles her mother in the way she moves her hands when she talks.
她说话时打手势的动作像她妈妈。
commonwealth n. 共和国；联邦；共同体
the Commonwealth of Australia 澳大利亚联邦
diverse adj. differing one from another; different 不同的；多种多样的
have diverse interests 有多种兴趣
transform vt. change the shape of someone or something; make something look different 改变；转变
Heat can transform water into steam. 热能使水变为蒸汽。
immigration n.[u] the act of coming into a country; the place where you enter a country移民
After the Customs, you must show your passport to the office at Immigration.
通过海关之后，你必须在移民局出示你的护照。
strengthen vt. to make strong or increase the strength of 加强
The fence was strengthened with wire. 这堵围栏用金属丝加固了。
vi. to become strong or stronger 变强
Our enemy has greatly strengthened during the truce talks. 和谈期间，敌人力量已大为增强。
differ vi. not to be the same 不同；相异
I must differ from you. 我不能同意你的意见。
pronunciation n. how you say a word or words 发音
His pronunciation is very bad. 他的发音很糟。
vocabulary n.[c] all the words in a language 词汇
He has a vocabulary of only a few hundred words. 他掌握的词汇只有几百个字。
n.[c] list of words in a lesson or book 词汇表
There is an English Chinese vocabulary at the end of the book. 书末附有英汉词汇表。
n.[c] all the words that one person knows 词汇量
A young child has a small vocabulary. 小孩子的词汇量小。
mate n.[c] friend; someone who works or learns, etc. with you 伙伴；同事
His mates waited for him by the gate. 他的同事在门口等他。
n.[c] husband or wife 配偶
She has been a faithful mate to him. 她一直都是他忠实的妻子。
v. to join closely; pair. (使)密切结合；(使)配对
sheila [5Fi:lE] n. ( Australian) a girl or young woman 少女；少妇
female n.[c] woman or girl; animal that can have baby animals; plant that has fruit 女子；雌性植物
A daughter is a female child. 女儿是女性孩子。
adj. of, relating to, or denoting the sex that produces ova or bears young. 女的；女性的
wilderness n. an unsettled, uncultivated region left in its natural condition荒野；荒地
billabong n. a dead-end channel extending from the main stream of a river死河；
干河道
aboriginal adj. of or relating to aborigines 土著的
aboriginal races 原始种族
concept n. a thought; an idea; a general notion 概念；观念
A small baby has no conc ept of right and wrong. 小孩不懂什么是正确和错误。
break out start suddenly 爆发；突然发生
A fire broke out near here yesterday. 昨天此地附近发生了一场火灾。
chew vt. to bite and grind with the teeth; masticate 咀嚼
You must chew your food well before you swallow it. 你吞下食物以前必须要好好咀嚼。
vt. to meditate on; ponder 深思
The judge chewed the matter over before making a decision. 法官在判决前仔细考虑过此事。
chairwoman n. a woman presiding officer of an assembly, meeting, committee, or board 女主席；女董事长
feed ... on to serve as food for 喂养；饲养
We feed the sheep on grass. 我们给羊吃草。
koala n. 树袋熊；考拉(澳洲产无尾熊，即koala bear)
entire adj. complete; whole; without anything left out 完全的；整个的；全部的
The ship sank with the entire crew. 轮船及全体船员都沉没了。
Alaska n. 阿拉斯加(美国州名)
mine n.[c] big hole in the ground that people make when they are looking for coal,
metal, diamonds, etc. 矿井
There are many coal mines in the north. 北方有许多煤矿。
n.[c] a bomb placed in the ground or water for destroying enemy soldiers or ships 地雷
The lorry was destroyed by a land mine. 这辆卡车被一个地雷炸毁了。
v. dig for coal, gold, etc. in the ground 采矿
Gold is mined from deep under ground. 黄金是在很深的地下采的。
fence n.[c] a barrier round a garden or field 篱笆；围栏
We built a fence around the yard to keep the dog in.
为了不让狗出去我们在院子四周筑起一道篱笆。
dingo n. 澳洲野犬
round up to bring together; to collect in one place 赶拢；使集拢
They try to round up a scattered herd of cattle. 他们试图把分散的牲口赶在一起。
outdoors adv. in the open air, outside 在野外；在户外
They often worked outdoors. 他们常常在户外工作。
birthplace n. the place where someone is born or where something originates
出生地；发源地
outing n.[c] short journey to enjoy yourself 出外游玩；短途旅行
The children had plenty of outings during the summer. 孩子们夏天常外出游玩。
lemonade n. a drink made of lemon juice, water, and sugar 柠檬水
barbecue a social gathering, usually held outdoors, at which food is cooked over an open flame 户外烤肉餐；烧烤
vt. to roast or grill (meat or seafood) over live coals or an open fire 烧烤
roast vt. to cook with dry heat, as in an oven or near hot coals 烘烤
The meat is roasting. 肉正烤着。
adj. roasted 烘烤过的
roast duck. 烤鸭
steak n. a thick slice of meat or fish cut for frying, grilling, etc 肉排；鱼排 (尤指)牛排 =beefsteak
barrier n.[c] a divider between two things障碍
The police put a barrier across the road. 警察设了路障。
the Great Barrier Reef 大堡礁
logical adj. reasoning; reasonable 合逻辑的；合乎情理的
His argument seems logical. 他的论据似乎有道理 [合逻辑] 。
wombat n. 袋熊
pointed adj. with a sharp end尖的
That is a pointed stick. 那是一根尖棍。
adj. sharp; clear and direct 直截了当的；率直的
His pointed remarks about the party were not polite. 他对聚会直率的议论显得很不礼貌。
claw n. one of the pointed nails on the feet of some animals and birds; hand on a crab, etc. （禽兽）爪；脚爪；（蟹等）钳；螯
Cats have very sharp claws. 猫有着锋利的脚爪。
A crab has two claws. 螃蟹有两个钳。
v. to scratch, dig, tear, or pull with or as if with claws 搔；挠；抓
The cat clawed the chair. 猫用爪子抓椅子。
hairy covered with hair or hairlike projections 多毛的；(似)毛发的
a hairy caterpillar 一条毛茸茸的毛虫
medium adj. middle, not big and not small 中等的
He is a man of medium height. 他是一个中等身材的男人。
bushy adj. covered with bushes 灌木丛生的
Unit 4 Green world
Words and expressions
procedure n. a manner of proceeding; a way of performing 程序；手续
This is the correct procedure for obtaining a visa. 这是取得签证的正确程序/手续。
a series of steps taken to accomplish an end 步骤
a long therapeutic procedure 长期治疗过程
tulip n. 郁金香
rose n.[c] a beautiful flower, which is red, white or yellow 玫瑰(花)；蔷薇(花)
Father planted roses along one side of the garden. 父亲沿着花园的一边种了玫瑰。
You lie upon roses when young, you'll lie upon thorns when old. 少壮不努力，老大徒伤悲。
peony n.[c] 牡丹；芍药
She blushed like a peony. 她脸红得像一朵牡丹花。
strawberry n.[c] small, soft, red fruit 草莓
Her favourite fruit is strawberry. 她最喜欢的水果是草莓。
lemon n. 柠檬
a slice of lemon 一片柠檬
bunch n. a number of things of the same kind fastened or growing together 串；束
a bunch of flowers 一束花 a bunch of grapes/keys 一串葡萄/钥匙
merely adv. only仅仅；只不过
I didn't stop to speak to him--I merely smiled. 我没有停下来和他说话--我只是微微一笑。
herb n. 草药；草本植物；香草
classify vt. to arrange or organize according to class or category 分类
We usually classify types of character as good or bad.
我们通常把 (人的) 性格之类型分为善与恶。
identification n. the state of being identified 鉴别；验明
the identification of high yielding seeds 高产量种子的鉴别
n. proof or evidence of identity 身份证明(缩写 ID)
His only means of identification was his passport. 他唯一证明身份的证件就是他的护照。
male adj. of the sex that does not give birth to young ones 男（性）的；雄性的
A cock is a male bird. 公鸡是雄性家禽。
n. man or boy; animal that cannot have baby animals; plant that does not have fruit 男人；雄性动物/植物
A bull, a cock and a he goat are males. 公牛，公鸡，公羊都是雄性动物。
promote vt. to contribute to the progress or growth of 促进；推进
Kindness promotes peace. 亲切的行为可以促进和睦。
vt. to raise to a more important or responsible job or rank 提升
Our teacher has been promoted to headmaster. 我们的老师已被提升为校长了。
botanical adj. of or relating to plants or plant life; of or relating to the science of botany 植物的；植物学 (上) 的
the botanical garden(s) 植物园
privilege n. a special advantage, permission, right, or benefit granted to or enjoyed by an individual, a class 特权；优惠
Our members have the privilege of using the lending service of the library.
我们的会员有享受图书馆借书服务的特权。
cozy adj. comfortable; easy 舒适的；安逸的
I felt cozy watching the hearth fire. 看着炉火我感到温暖而舒适。
appetite n. a desire for food 食欲；胃口
Exercises give one a good appetite. 运动增进食欲。
n. a strong wish or liking 爱好；欲望
He has an appetite for writing. 他好从事写书。
wealth n.[u] (lots of) money; valuable things 财富；财产
Some were owners of great wealth and property. 有些人拥有万贯家财。
Oceania n. the Pacific Islands 大洋洲
appointed vt. to select or designate to fill an office or position 任命；委派
We must appoint a new teacher at once to the mountain school.
我们必须立即委派一名新教师到那山村小学去。
vt. to fix or set by authority or by mutual agreement 约定；指定
They appointed a place to exchange stamps. 他们约定一个地方交换邮票。
Venus n. the second planet from the sun 金星
n. (Roman Mythology) the goddess of sexual love and physical beauty
维纳斯(罗马神话中爱与美的女神)
the V of Milo 米罗的维纳斯雕像
calculate vt. find an answer by working with numbers 计算
Let me calculate the cost of the journey. 让我计算一下旅途的用费。
astronomy n. the scientific study of matter in outer space 天文学
expense n. the act of spending money; cost; money used or needed for sth.花费；
支出；代价；费用
The expense of running a car has risen recent years.近几年来使用汽车的费用增加了。
look our for to be careful of 当心；注意；警惕
Look out (for the car)! 留神(汽车)！
on a large scale 大规模地；大范围地
cocoa n. brown powder from the beans of a tree, made into chocolate 可可粉
n. drink that you make with cocoa powder and milk 可可茶
hemp n. 大麻
involve vt. to contain as a part; include 包括；涉及
All the children were involved in the school play. 所有的孩子都参加了学校排练的剧。
vt. to engage as a participant 使牵涉；使卷入；使参与
Don't involve other people in your trouble. 别把别人牵涉进你的麻烦中去。
enterprise ] n. an undertaking, especially one of some scope, complication, and risk; a business organization 事业；企业
government enterprise 公/国营企业 private enterprise 私/民营企业
small-to-medium-sized enterprises 中小企业
settlement n. group of homes in a place where no people have lived before 拓居地；定居点
The first settlements were on the east coast of America. 最初的殖民地是在美洲的东海岸。
n. agreeing about something after discussing it 解决（方案）
After long talks about pay, the managers and workers reached a settlement.
就工资进行长期谈判后，劳资双方达成一项解决办法。
Kew [kju:] n. 克佑(伦敦之西郊,为皇家植物园之所在地)
accumulate vt&i. to gather or pile up; amass; to mount up; increase
积累；聚集
He accumulated a fortune by hard work. 他靠努力工作积蓄了一笔财富。
Snow accumulated to a depth of 10 feet. 雪已积到十尺深。
abandon vt. leave someone or something; give up; desert 离弃；放弃；抛弃
The driver abandoned his car in the snow. 司机把汽车抛在雪地里。
straw n. dry, cut stalks of wheat, etc. 稻草；麦秆
Everyone of us had a straw hat on. 我们人人都戴草帽。
n. thin tube of paper or plastic for drinking a cold drink 麦管；吸管
He sucked Coke through a straw. 他用吸管吸可口可乐。
pineapple n. 凤梨；波萝
year after year adv. 年年；一年又一年(= year in year out)
We have visited this island year in year out and we never get bored.
我们在这个岛上参观很长时间，但我们没有厌烦。
classification n. the act or result of classifying; a category or class分类；类别
pass away die 去世
He passed away during the night. 他在晚间逝世。
Oxford n. 牛津[英国牛津郡 (Oxford shire) 的首府, 为牛津大学 (Oxford又作Oxford University) 所在地]
tone n. a sound; the quality of a sound; the voice, as expressing feeling音调；语调
She spoke in an angry tone. 她用恼怒的口气说话。
reward n. present or money that you give to thank someone for something 报酬；报答
He was given a reward for passing the examination. 他因考试及格而得到奖品。
He worked hard all his life but without much reward. 他辛勤一生，但得到的报酬却很少。
vt. give something in return for 酬谢；奖赏
He was well rewarded by the kind things people said about him.
人们表扬了他，这就是对他很好的奖励。
name… after 给……取名；命名
technician n. expert who works with machines, instruments or tools技术员；技师
Charles Darwin 查理士达尔文(英国自然科学家) beagle n. 小猎犬
nowhere adv. at, in, or to no place; not anywhere 任何地方都不；什么地方也没有
He was nowhere to be found. 什么地方也找不到他。
n. an unknown place 不知道的地方：
a cabin in the middle of nowhere 不知在什么中心的小屋
altogether adv. on the whole; all things considered 总共；总而言之
There were five of us altogether. 我们共有五人。
Altogether, the book is quite interesting. 总的说来，这本书相当有趣。
adv. totally; completely 完全；全部地
Some of what you say is true, but I don't altogether agree.
你说的有些是真的，但我不能全都同意。
finch n．雀科鸣禽
beak n. 鸟嘴
appearance n. what someone or something looks like 外貌；外表
Do not judge by appearances. 别从外貌判断事物。
n. being seen; coming 显露；出现
At the sight of his appearance on the stage, the hall rang with thunderous applause.
他一出场，礼堂里就掌声雷动。
output n.[u] amount of things that you have made 产量；产品
We must increase our output to meet people's needs. 我们必须增加产量来满足人们的需要。
dandelion n. 蒲公英
latter adj. 后者
Of the two, the former is better than the latter. 两者之中前者较后者为佳。
distinguish vt.& vi. show the difference in; show the difference; make a distinction 区别；辨别
He could not distinguish cotton from wool. 他不能辨认是棉花还是羊毛。
You are confusing things, let me distinguish. 你把事情越弄越糟，让我来把它区分出来。
in detail with all the facts 详细地
The teacher explained the text in detail. 老师详细地解释了课文。
millimeter [`milimitE] n. 毫米
Carl Linnaeus [`kB:l li`nI:Es] 卡尔林尼厄斯(瑞典植物学家)
Daniel Solander [ sE`lAdE] 丹尼尔索兰德(瑞典植物学家)
Tahiti n. 塔希提岛(位于南太平洋)
Galapagos [gE`lApEgEs] n. 加拉帕戈斯(群岛)
Gregor Mendel [`gregE `mendl] 格雷戈门德尔(奥地利遗传学家)
Gote Turesson [`ge:tE tE`ri:sn] 约特杜尔松(瑞典植物学家)
Unit 5 Getting the message
Words and expressions
convey vt. carry; take from one place to another; transport 传送；运载
A bus conveys passengers from the train to the boat. 一辆公共汽车把旅客从车站送到码头。
vt. serve as a means of carrying; conduct; transmit 转达；表达
Please convey my thanks to your wife. 请向你的妻子转达我的谢意。
advertise vt. to make public announcement of, especially to proclaim the qualities or advantages of (a product or business) so as to increase sales 做广告
It has been advertised in the magazine. 已在杂志上刊登了广告。
vi. to call the attention of the public to a product or business做广告
The company advertised for a new secretary. 公司登广告招聘一名新秘书。
advertiser n. 广告商；登广告者
The report gives advertisers a new picture of women today.
这份报告使广告商对今日妇女有了新的认识。
brand n.[c] a trademark or distinctive name identifying a product or a manufacturer商标；牌子
What brand of soap do you like? 你喜欢什么牌子的肥皂？
consideration n.[u] thinking about something 考虑
After much consideration, I accepted the offer. 经过仔细考虑我接受了这个提议。
n.[u] being thoughtful and careful about people's feeling 体谅；关心
We should have consideration for the rights of others. 我们应当为别人的权利着想。
take …into consideration 考虑……
charge n. words that a policeman says when he catches someone who has done wrong 指控；控告
The man went to court on a charge of stealing. 这人被指控盗窃，进了法院。
n. payment asked for something 收费；要价
These books are free of charge. 这些书是免费的。
n. responsibility; trust 责任；委托
I put the children in your charge. 我将孩子委托你照顾。
in charge of 负责
I am in charge of this department. 我负责这一部门。
loss n. losing 丧失；丢失
He told the police about the loss of his car. 他告诉警察他的小汽车丢了。
n. something that is lost; waste 损失；浪费
His death is a great loss to the country. 他的逝世对国家是一个巨大的损失。
blame vt. to say that a person did something wrong 责怪
The driver was not to blame for the traffic accident. 那次交通事故不应该责怪司机。
n. the state of being responsible for a fault or an error; culpability 责备；谴责
The car driver took the blame for the accident. 汽车的司机承担了事故的责任。
mislead to lead into error of thought or action, especially by intentionally deceiving 使误解；使误入歧途
Don't let his friendly manner mislead you into trusting him.
不要让他那种友好的态度使你误信他。
misleading adj. tending to mislead 使人误解的；欺骗的
Your words were rather misleading. 你所说的话颇容易引起误解。
broadcast vt. to send out or communicate, especially by radio or television播放；播出 (broadcast, broadcasted; broadcast, broadcasted)
The agency broadcast an urgent appeal for medical supplies.
代理商通过电台紧急呼吁要求药品供应。
vi. to transmit a radio or television program for public or general use; to be on the air播放(节目)
The station begins broadcasting at 6 a.m. 电台早晨 6:00开始播音
post vt. fasten (a notice) up in a place where it can easily be seen 张贴
The names of the members of the team will be posted up today.今天将贴出这个队成员的名单。
hand in hand holding each other's hands; together 手拉手；共同地
They walked away hand in hand. 他们手拉手地离去了。
react vi. to act in response to or under the influence of a stimulus or prompting:反应；作出反应
Our eyes react to light. 我们的眼睛对光起反应。
vi. 反对；反抗[against]
The people soon reacted against the cruel system. 人们不久便起来反抗暴政。
annoy vt. to cause slight irritation to (another) by troublesome, often repeated acts
使生气；使烦恼
These flies are annoying me. 这些苍蝇真让人讨厌。
vi. to be annoying 招人讨厌；惹人烦恼
A fly keeps annoying. 一只苍蝇总在烦我。
annoying adj. causing vexation or irritation; troublesome 讨厌的；恼人的
an annoying cough 一声恼人的咳嗽
critic n.[c] a person who is critic by profession 批评家，评论家
These critics have agreed to his arguments. 这些评论家已同意他的论点。
accuse vt. charge with doing something wrong or having broken the law 控告；告发
She accused him of theft. 她控告他行窃。
associate vt. to connect or join together; combine联合；结合；联系
They are associated with him in business. 他们在工作上与他有关系。
vi. to connect in the mind or imagination 联想
What do you associate with such a heavy snow? 这样一场大雪你有什么联想?
get across (a viewpoint, etc.) become clear or understandable; make(a viewpoint,etc.)clear or understandable 被人理解；传播
He got his meaning across. 他把意思讲清楚了。
appeal vi. to make an earnest or urgent request, as for help恳求；呼吁
The government is appealing to everyone to save water. 政府呼吁每个人节约用水。
vi to make or apply for an appeal 上诉，申诉
The victims' families of the murder have appealed to the Supreme Court.
谋杀案的被害家属已经上诉最高法院。
vi. to be attractive or interesting 有感染力；有吸引力
Does the idea of working for a venture company appeal to you?
你有没有兴趣到合资企业去工作?
n. an earnest or urgent request, entreaty, or supplication 呼吁；恳求
n. a resort or application to a higher authority, as for sanction, corroboration, or a decision
呼吁；上诉
a court of appeal 上诉法庭 a direct appeal 直接上诉
n. the power of attracting or of arousing interest 吸引力；感染力
a city with appeal for tourists 对游客有吸引力的城市
appeal to v. 呼吁；上诉；有吸引力
He appealed to us for support. 他恳求我们的支持。
This poem makes an appeal to the emotions. 这首诗有动人情感的力量 [有感染力] 。
frequent adj. common, habitual, repeated many times 常常发生的；频繁的
Snows are frequent in this area during December. 这个地区十二月下雪是常事。
figure n.[c] a written sign for a number 数字
The figures are not accurate. 这些数字不精确。
n.[c] how much money something costs 价格
We bought the house for a high figure. 我们高价买了这栋房子。
n.[c] a shape or drawing 图形；画像
That is a geometrical figure. 那是个几何图形。
n.[c] shape of a person or animal in stone, metal, or wood 塑像，雕像
This is the figure of Lu Xun in marble. 这是鲁迅的大理石雕像。
n.[c] a person, a character, 人物
He was one of the great figures in history. 他是历史上的伟大人物之一。
salesman n. someone whose job is to sell goods售货员；推销员
The salesman showed her nearly all the hats in the shop.
该店员几乎将店中所有帽子都拿给她看了。
saleswoman n.女售货员；女推销员
profit n. the return received on a business undertaking after all operating expenses have been met盈利；利润
Newspapers make a profit from [out of] the advertisements they carry.
报纸由其所刊登的广告获取利益。
v. 有利/益于
A wise person profits by [from] his mistakes. 智者由自己的过失中得到教益。
It will not profit you to do so. 那样做对你不会有益处的。
campaign n. a battle战役
a campaign to take the enemy city 攻克敌人城市的战役
n. a movement with a political or business purpose （政治或商业上的）运动；活动
a campaign to stop people drinking when they drive 禁止人们在开车时饮酒的运动
an advertising campaign 广告活动
vi. take part or serve in a campaign 从事活动；参加运动
They campaigned for human rights. 他们参加了人权运动。
policy n.[c] the general plan of a government, business, company, etc. 方针；政策
What is the government policy on education? 政府的教育政策是什么？
n. a course of conduct; a plan of action 计策
Honesty is the best policy. 诚实是上策。
spokesman n. a man who speaks on behalf of another or others发言人；代言人
spokeswoman n. a woman who speaks on behalf of another or others
女发言人；女代言人
illegal adj. wrong, not allowed by law 不合法的；犯法的
It is illegal to drive when you are drunk.. 喝醉了酒开车是违法的。
keep an eye out for 当心；警惕
bait n. 诱饵；鱼饵
target n. what you are trying to hit when you shoot a bullet or arrow 靶子；目标
The hunter's target was a wild animal. 这个猎人的目标是一只野兽。
n. something we aim to do or get 目标；指标
This book will be the target of bitter criticism. 这书会成为严格批评的对象。
bullet n.[c] a shot fired from a gun 子弹；枪弹
Every bullet has its billet. 每颗子弹都有归宿。
sneaker n. a sports shoe usually made of canvas and having soft rubber soles运动鞋
nutritional l adj. 营养(品)的
nowadays [`nauEdeiz] adv. during the present time; now 现在；当今
Nowadays, advertisements can be found everywhere in any big city.
现在,在任何一个大城市里,到处都可以看到广告。
nephew n. son of your brother or sister 侄子；外甥
He was a nephew of my friend. 他是我朋友的侄子。
waitress n.[c] a woman or girl who serves food in a restaurant女服务员
The waitress is bringing the soup. 女服务员正把汤端来。
hostess n. a female host; the wife of the host女主人
The hostess brought us out a pot full of steaming coffee.
女主人给我们拿出一满壶热气腾腾的咖啡。
bridegroom n. a man who is about to be married or has recently been married新郎
heroine n. most important woman in a story, play, etc. 女主角；女主人公
n. very brave woman or girl女英雄
goddess n. female god 女神
Venus was a goddess worshipped by the Romans. 维纳斯是罗马人信奉的女神。
promotion n. the act of promoting or the fact of being promoted促进；促销
the promotion of learning 学术的促进
n. advancement in rank or responsibility 晋升
Our teacher has got a promotion. 我们的老师被提升了。
attach vt. to fasten, secure, or join系；附；粘[to, on]
The clerk attached a price tag to each article. 店员给每一件商品系上标价签。
vt to adhere, belong, or relate.附属 [to]
This hospital is attached to our medical department. 这所医院附属于我们医学系。
vt. to ascribe or assign 认为有（重要性等）
attached no significance to the threat 不重视这种威肋
legend n. an unverified story handed down from earlier times, especially one popularly believed to be historical 传奇；传说
There is a legend that… 有一个传说,说是…。
slogan n. a phrase expressing the aims or nature of an enterprise, an organization, or a candidate; a motto标语；口号
a phrase used repeatedly, as in advertising or promotion 广告语
catchy adj. attractive or appealing 吸引人的
a catchy idea for a new television series 为一部新电视系列剧出的吸引人的主意
adj. tricky; deceptive 有圈套的；欺骗的：
a catchy question on an exam 考试中设有陷阱的题目
point out tell about or show something 指出
He pointed out the importance of the work. 他指出这一工作的重要性。
discount vt. to sell or offer for sale at a reduced price 打折
n. a reduction from the full or standard amount of a price or debt 折扣
n. attributive. often used to modify another noun（定语名词）
a discount market; discount merchandise 打折商场；打折商品
make sense have a meaning that you can understand 有意义；讲得通
I can't follow these instructions----they don't make sense.
我不理解这些指示--根本讲不通嘛。
bonus n. something given or paid in addition to what is usual or expected 额外给予的东西
n. a sum of money or the equivalent given to an employee in addition to the employee's usual compensation 奖金
n. a sum of money in addition to salary that is given to a professional athlete for signing up with a team 津贴
Those who put in many hours of overtime will receive a percentage of their salary as a bonus.
那些付出许多加班时间的人将得到相当于其工资的一部分作为奖金。
context n.[c] the parts directly before or after a word or sentence上下文
We can often tell the meaning of a word from its context.
由上下文，我们可以知道一个字的意思。
Tetsuya Komuro [`testjB: `kRmurEu] 小室哲哉
Unit 6 Going west
Words and expressions
perseverance n. steady persistence in adhering to a course of action, a belief, or a purpose; steadfastness 毅力；坚持
Great works are performed, not by strength, but perseverance.
伟大的作品不是靠力量而是靠毅力来完成的。
quit vt. to give up; abandon 放弃
He has not quit smoking, but is holding down to three cigarettes a day.
他并没有戒烟,但是已减到每天只抽三支烟了。
vt. to depart from; leave 离开
You and I are on the point of quitting the theater of our exploits.
你我正在离开我们辉煌业绩的舞台。
vt. to cease or discontinue 停止；中断：
The teacher asked them to quit talking. 老师要求他们不要说话。
apply (…) to … use; put into practice 应用；运用
We should apply theory to practice. 我们应当把理论运用到实践中去。
add up find the total of 总计；加起来
Add up 6,7 and 8 and you'll get 21. 把六、七、八相加，总数是二十一。
circumstance n. a condition or fact attending an event and having some bearing on it 环境；情况(常用复数形式)
It depends on [upon] circumstances. 这要视情况而定。
lose heart become discouraged 沮丧；灰心
Don't lose heart at any failure, but try again. 失败时不要灰心，要再接再厉。
assessment n. the act of assessing; appraisal 评估；估价
environmental assessment 环境影响评估
take it easy 放松些；别紧张
When the teacher found some of his students get nervous at the examination, he told them to take it easy. 老师发现一些学生考虑时焦急不安，就叫他们不要紧张。
keep up retain(one's spirits, strength, etc); (one's spirits, strength, etc.)not decline 维持；保持
The mountaineers' spirits kept up against heavy odds.
在非常不利的条件下，登山运动员们仍然情绪高涨。
Robinson Crusoe n. 鲁滨逊克鲁索
common sense natural good thinking 常识；情理
Although she's not very clever she's got lots of common sense. 她虽然不很聪明，但很有见识。
survival n. the act of surviving; continuance of life 幸存；存活
He stayed eight days in an open boat with no food, and he was still alive; his survival was a miracle. 他在无遮档的小船上呆了八天，又无食物，还活下来了，这真是个奇迹。
biscuit n. a small cake of shortened bread leavened with baking powder or soda饼干；小点心
alcohol n. a colorless, volatile, flammable liquid; intoxicating liquor containing alcohol 酒精；含酒精的饮料
goat n. a sort of hollow-horned, bearded ruminant mammals of mountainous regions山羊
On the ground lay an old sick goat. 地上躺着一只生病的老山羊。
flour n.[u] a powder made from wheat and used to make bread and cakes 面粉（或其他谷物磨成的粉）
Flour is used in making breads and cakes. 面粉用来做面包或糕饼。
axe n. 斧子
nail n. the hard substance at the end of a finger or toe 指甲；趾甲
Our fingernails need cutting now and again. 我们的手指甲有时需要剪一剪。
n. small piece of metal with one pointed end, which you hit into wood to fasten things together 钉子
The nail went right through the wall. 钉子直接穿过墙壁。
razor n. a sharp-edged cutting instrument used especially for shaving the face or removing other body hair 剃刀；刮胡刀
bedding n. bedclothes 寝具；床上用品
beyond prep. on the further or other side of 在较远的一边；在另一边
The post office is beyond the bridge. 邮局在桥的那一头。
prep. (of time)later than; more advanced than（时间）晚于；超过
Some shops keep open beyond midnight. 有些商店营业到半夜以后。
prep. out of the reach of; outside one's understanding 为…不能及；超出…理解力之外
He was beyond the help of the teacher. 他使老师束手无策。
prep. (negative and interrogative) except 除…之外
I know nothing beyond this. 除这之外，我什么也不知道。
adv. farther away 在远处
look beyond 向远处看
the Rocky Mountains 落基山脉
wagon n.[c] cart on four wheels, which a horse or an ox pulls; an open railway freight car 四轮马车（牛车）；无篷铁路货车
The wagon was full of vegetables. 这辆运货马车装满了蔬菜。
leave behind cause to remain behind; forget to take or bring along; abandon in a retreat 留下；忘带
She left her bag behind in the train. 她把提包丢在列车上了。
ox n. (pl. oxen) bull used for farm work公牛；耕牛
He is as strong as an ox. 他像牛一样强壮。
Kansas n. 堪萨斯州(美国洲名)
frontier n.[c] the border, the line between two countries国境；边境
We must show our passports at the frontier. 在边境我们必须出示护照。
lose one’s way become lost 迷路；迷失
Lily lost her way in the woods. 莉莉在森林里迷了路。
barren adj. lacking vegetation, especially useful vegetation 不毛的；贫瘠的
The desert is barren land. 沙漠是贫瘠的土地。
salty adj. tasting of salt; containing salt 盐的；咸的；含盐的
Sea water is salty. 海水是咸的。
pond n. a body of still water smaller than a lake池塘
There is a flock of waterfowls on the pond. 池塘上有一群水鸟。
patch n. small piece of ground 小块地
They grow their own vegetables on a small patch of ground. 他们在一小块土地上自种蔬菜。
n. pieces of cloth that you put over a hole in clothing, sheets, etc. 补钉
I sewed a patch over the hole in my jeans. 我给我工装裤上的洞打了个补钉。
burden n. something that you carry; a heavy load 负担；包袱
It is a burden to the people. 这对人民是一种负担。
n. a duty which is hard to do well 责任
The burden fell on me. 责任落在我身上。
desperate adj. having no hope and ready to do any wild or dangerous thing 绝望的；不顾一切的
The prisoners became desperate in their attempts to escape. 那些囚犯拼命企图逃亡。
adj. very serious 极严重的；危急的
The country is in a desperate state and we must work hard.
国家处于危急关头，我们应当努力工作。
beast n. an animal （四足）兽；牲畜
The tiger is a beast of prey. 老虎是食肉兽。
accustomed adj. being in the habit of习惯[于…]的[to]
I am not accustomed to walking long distances. 我不习惯于长距离的步行。
thirst n.[u] wanting to drink something; a strong desire 渴；渴望
I drank a cup of tea to relieve my thirst. 我喝了一杯茶止渴。
The artist thirsted for fame. 艺术家想出名。
starvation n. suffering or death caused by extreme hunger 挨饿；饿死
The cat died of starvation. 那只猫饿死了。
anxiety n.[c] worry and fear 忧虑；担心；焦急
We waited with anxiety for our examination results. 我们焦急地等待考试结果。
n.[c] something that makes you worried and afraid 担心的事；焦虑
He has been relieved of his anxieties. 他已消除了忧虑。
shallow adj. not deep; with not much water 浅的
The river is shallow here; we can walk across. 这里河水很浅，我们可以趟过去。
came to an end stop结束；终止
All good things must come to an end. 一切好事迟早都会结束。（天下没有不散的宴席。）
legendary adj. based on, or of the nature of a legend 传奇的；传说的
tax n. money that the government takes from your pay or from the sale of some goods 税
There is a large tax on cigarettes. 香烟的税很重。
anniversary n. the annually recurring date of a past event, especially one of historical, national, or personal importance 周年纪念；周年纪念日
Anchorage n. 安克雷奇（美国港市）
Nome [nEum] n. 诺姆（美国城市）
front-page [.frQnt `peidV] adj. worthy of coverage on the front page of a newspaper 头版的
front-page news 头版新闻
granddaughter n.[c] the daughter of your child孙女；外孙女
flu n. influenza 流行性感冒
He caught the flu. 他患了流行性感冒。
throat n. the front part of the neck 喉咙；咽喉
I have something stuck in my throat. 我有什么东西刺入了我的喉内。
diphtheria n.［医］白喉［症］
vaccine n. 痘苗；疫苗
catastrophe n. terrible thing that happens suddenly 大灾难；大祸
The forest fire was a catastrophe. 那场森林火灾是场大灾难。
relief n. the removal or ease of worry, pain ,etc. 解除；减轻
The medicine brought me relief. 这药减轻了我的痛苦。
n. help given to people in poverty of trouble 救济
They are in need of relief. 他们需要救济。
deliver vt. take something to the place where it must go 投递；送交
Every day the milkman delivers milk to our house. 每天送牛奶的人都把牛奶送到我家。
vt. give forth in words 发言
He delivered a speech at the meeting. 他在会上讲了话。
vt. to help in the birth of 接生
she delivered the child. 她接生了这孩子。
Nenana [ni`nB:nB:] n. 美国城市
Arctic adj. of the north polar regions 北极的
n. the regions round the north pole 北极；北极圈；北极地方
the Arctic Ocean 北冰洋 the Arctic Regions 北极地区
tough adj. able to withstand great strain without tearing or breaking; strong and resilient 坚韧的 demanding or troubling; difficult 困难的 physically hardy; rugged 强壮的
(tougher; toughest)
wrap vt. to cover completely with 包裹；缠绕
I wrapped the present in red paper. 我把礼物用红纸包了起来。
n.[c] an article of dress to be folded round a person 披在身上的衣物
Don't forget your wra
篇12：Teaching plan for Unit16(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
通过本单元的教学，学生应能熟练地运用表示“道歉”的常用语；复习动词被动语态；了解西方国兼职工作的由来和向他人寻求心理咨询的必要性。
Importance and difficulty:
Words: gift, value, doubt, so long as, solve
Sentences:
1. There is no doubt about the correct thing to do.
2. It is the duty of everyone in a work unit to report another worker to the manager if he / she does anything wrong, or tell lies.
3. I’m afraid it is quite common that people steal things from their wok place.
4. There is no need to say anything to the other worker.
Grammar:
1. The rooms are being painted now.
2. A new hotel will be built in one month.
3. All the means have been tried, but it is still no use.
4. Supper had been prepared before they came back.
Useful expressions:
1. I’m sorry….
2. I’m afraid……
3. I apologize……
4. Never mind.
5. That’s all right./ OK.
6. Don’t worry.
Lesson 61
Aims and demands:
Develop the Ss’ four skills : reading , listening, speaking and writing ability.
Importance and difficulty :
Have a deeper understanding of the text.
Teaching aids: a tape recorder and some slides
Teaching methods: reading and understanding
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming up
T: What kind of work would you like to do when you leave school / college / university?
Now you are Senior 3 middle school students , half a year later , most of you will go to universities or colleges.
What are you going to do if you are a university / college student?
Ss: Study hard. ( Studying is your full-time job.)
Find a part-time job.
T: What kind of part-time jobs are you going to look for/ be after?
Ss: ……
T: If you are studying in a Teachers’ college, then you’d better do the home-teaching for middle school students.
If you are studying in a tourist university , you’d better find a part-time job in a tourist agency ---- to do the guide service to tourists / to show the visitors around.
There are different jobs for you to do in the society. Let’s come to the text and the example is a true story about an Englishman, Fred Pearson, who started the tourist service “Take-a-Guide” in London after leaving Oxford University.
Step 2. Pre-reading questions
Ffind the answers to the questions:
1. What part-time job is mentioned as an example?
A guide service to tourists.
2. Find one reason for taking a part-time job.
Any of the reasons listed below in part 3.
Step 3. Careful reading
Read it carefully and do the comprehension exercises: (Unit 16 --- 3B)
I. Main facts:
Tick some good reasons for taking part-time jobs mentioned in the passage.
□ You can be financially (在经济上) independent from your parents.
□ It is good preparation for the outside world.
□ You can learn the value of the money.
□ It greatly helps you with your studies.
□ You learn to work with others in a team.
□ It can surely earn enough money to start your own business after graduation.
□ You have a greater chance of finding a suitable job.
II. Do the note-making .
Find out the reasons for taking a part-time job by completing the following.
1. If you earn money, you will not ____________.
2. If you have money, you can buy ____________.
3. It is good preparation __________.
4. We should learn the value of money and _____________.
5. It is good to learn to work _____________.
6. You will get some _____________.
7. Employers prefer _______________.
8. You will have a greater chance ____________.
III. Further comprehension CBCDCC
1. What’s the passage about?
A. It gives some tips about how to find a suitable part-time job.
B. It tells about how Fred began his part-time job.
C. It proves that taking part-time jobs is really helpful.
D. It’s mainly about the advantages and disadvantages of working part-time.
2. Fred Pearson was going to ___ when a tourist stopped him and asked for directions.
A. attend classes
B. listen to a lecture
C. deliver a lecture
D. visit the university town of Oxford
3. ___ main good reasons for taking part-time jobs are mentioned in the passage.
A. Five B. Four C. three D. Two
4. Fred decided to show the tourist around the university town because ____.
A. he was very kind and ready to help others in trouble
B. he wanted to make money by doing it
C. he did not want to listen to the boring lecture
D. he found it enjoyable walking and talking with the tourist
5. Taking part-time jobs is helpful, and it can help students ___.
A. make a fortune
B. be dependent on their parents
C. prepare themselves for the future
D. get nothing but some work experience
6. What is the writer’s opinion about work?
A. It is boring and unpleasant.
B. It is not enjoyable, but necessary.
C. It is interesting and enjoyable.
Step 3. True or False statements: TFFTT FTTTT
1. Fred Pearson was a student of Oxford University.
2. After the lecture, Fred showed the tourist around the university.
3. Fred spent the whole day with the tourist.
4. Fred earned ten pounds for showing the tourist around.
5. Fred found a good way of making money.
6. When he graduated from the university, Fred started his won business as guide.
7. It is good for a student to begin a part-time job so long as it does not affect your studies.
8. Taking a part-time job has another advantage for learning to work with others in a team.
9. Companies usually prefers to employ experienced workers.
10. If you have done some part-time jobs while studying in the university, it’s easier for you to find a suitable job.
Step 4. Workbook Page 85
Step 5. Listening
Listen and language points
Step 6. Discussion: 3B --- Unit 16
1. Do you think that college students should take part-time jobs? Why / Why not?
2. Make a list of as many different part-time jobs as you can . At the end discuss which job you would like to do most and which job you would hate to do.
3. What do you think of Fred?
Which of these adjectives will you use to describe Fred ? Why?
serious hard-working fun-loving
lazy crazy organized
easy-going clever energetic
educated
hard-working------in the morning he worked and in the evenings he studied.
fun-loving------they spent a very enjoyable morning together.
organized------he worked and studied at the same time.
easy-going ------they got on well.
energetic------he worked and studied at the same time; he earned enough money to start his own business.
educated------he passed his exams.
Step 7 . Homework
Text book and paper exercises:
1. He found out that he had a gift for making a visit interesting and lively. In other words, he was by nature a good guide.
2. Hard-working------in the morning he worked and in the evenings he studied.
fun-loving------they spent a very enjoyable morning together.
Organized------he worked and studied at the same time.
Easy-going ------they got on well.
Energetic------he worked and studied at the same time; he earned enough money to start his own business.
Educated------he passed his exams.
3. A part-time job which results in a full-time job, or interesting developments.
4. A part-time job; you learn the value of money; you learn to work with others in a team.
5. They value someone who leads and active life and is anxious to learn.
6. To be independent.
7. C
Step 6. Rearrange the following events
a. At lunchtime, the tourist thanked him and gave him ten pounds, which was a lot of money in those days.
b. He passed his exams, and even better, when he left university he had warned enough money to start his own business. Offering guide services to tourists.
c. They got on so well that Fred decided not to go to the lecture but to show the tourist around the university instead.
d. Fred realized that he had discovered an interesting and enjoyable way of making money.
e. They spent a full and very enjoyable morning together, and Fred discovered that he had a gift for making a visit interesting and lively.
f. Fred Pearson was walking through the university town of Oxford one morning in 1961.
g. In the evenings, he studied hard for his exams, and most mornings he took tourists around Oxford.
h. He was on his way to his lecture, when a tourist stopped him and asked him for directions. As Fred was going in the same direction, he walked along with the tourist.
Step 7. Workbook
Homework
Lesson 62 Letters
Aims and demands:
Review how to write a letter and know develop the Ss’ four skills
Importance and difficulty:
Have a good understanding of the text and let them discuss how to deal with the difficult situation.
Teaching aids: tape recorder and some slides
Teaching method : reading
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming-up : story-telling (listen to the tape )
I’ve been working at a meat factory for about two months now. It’s a part-time job, so I only work evenings. I’ve recently noticed that one of my workmates is stealing. From time to time, I notice that he puts a piece of meat down his trousers just before he leaves the factory. Now the manager has found that things are missing. He says that all this happened after I started work.
What should I do?
Ss: discuss the question.
Step 2. Reading comprehension
Read the text ( three letters ) and do the comprehension exercises:
Workbook:------Exercise 2 . True or false
Paper exercise:
D 1. The two friends are writing to ______.
a) tell each other stories B. give each other information
C. persuade each other to change mind D. ask for and give advice
D 2. From John’s letter we can tell that _______.
A. he relies in friends B. he is not brave or independent enough
C. he doesn’t know how to solve the problem D. all of the above
A 3. Which of the following wards has the same meaning as “position” in John’s letter?
A. condition B. attitude C. job D. opinion
A 4. From Marty’s second letter we know he is _______.
A. brave and willing to fight for truth B. selfish
C. understanding, clever and careful D. brave but careless
A 5. The job that is not a part-time job is called ________.
A. a full-time job B. a half-time job C. a full-day job D. a half-day job
B 6. If someone says “ I am afraid that…” he / she is ________.
A. frightened B. polite C. worried D. unhealthy
Step 3. Exercises
Practice 4 in page 22 Exercise 3 in page 86
Step 4. Grammar
Passive voice and active voice
Do the exercises
Homework
Lesson 61~62
Aims and demands: Deal with the important language points.
Importance and difficulty: Grasp the usage of the language points
Teaching aids: some slides
Teaching methods: practicing
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Deal with the language points
Fill in the blanks: (Lesson 61~62)
1. Fred showed the tourist around the university instead of going to the lecture.
2. He had a gift for making the visit lively and interesting.
4. It is a good idea to start a part-time job so long as it does not affect your studies.
5. We should learn the value of money and learn how many hours’ work has to be done before we can buy something.
6. The employers value someone who leads an active life and is anxious to learn.
7. It’s a part-time job, so I only work evenings.
8. Maybe I should have told ( tell )that workmate I knew what he was doing. Or possibly I should have gone ( go ) to the manager and told him who was stealing meat.
9. It is quite possible that the thief might pot some meat in your bag, hoping ( hope ) you will be caught and called a thief.
10. In my personal opinion,（ 依我个人的意思 ） you should have done this as soon as you found out he was stealing.
11. There is no doubt about ( 对于……没有疑虑/ 怀疑 ) the correct thing to do.
Step 2. Explanation (on the Bb )
1. show … around
show …in
show … out
2. have a gift for
have no gift for
3. so long as
if
4. value n. 价值
value v. 珍视，器重
3. be anxious to do sth.
be anxious about / for sth.
4. evenings adv. 每天晚上
5. should have done
ought to have done
could have done
might have done
must have done
6. hoping 伴随状语
7. catch
catch sb. by the arm
catch sb. doing
be caught in the rain
catch what one said
catch it
8. in one’s personal opinion
in the opinion of sb. ( me , her, him , us…… )
11. There is no doubt about…… ( a set phrase ) 对于……没有怀疑/ 疑问
There is no doubt as to …… ( 关于 )
There is no doubt that……
Doubt vt.
Eg. There is no doubt as to the truth of the story. 故事的真实性无可置疑。
There is no doubt that he is a thief.
I doubt whether he will come.
Step 3. Exercises : Fill in the blanks ( Lesson 61~62 )
1. The doctors are anxious about / for his health.
2. I am anxious to have a new car.
3. He is a polite boy, whenever a guest leaves his home, he shows him out.
4. We’d better value the friendship between us.
5. She has a gift for music.
6. Most parents know the value of a good education .
7. You can go out so long as you promise to be back before 9 o’clock.
8. In the opinion of most people, the plan is good. So do I. So I stick to my opinion.
9. He studied days and worked evenings.
10. If your father sees you doing that, you’ll catch it.
11. Yesterday, on his way home, he was caught in the rain.
12. There is no doubt about / as to his honesty.
13. I believe what he said. That means I don’t doubt what he said.
There is no doubt about what he said.
14. The examination turned out easy.
15. The English evening turned out a great success.
16. I should have phoned ( phone ) Jack this morning, but I forgot.
17. The light is on. He must be ( be ) at home.
18. The light is on. He can’t have gone ( go ) out.
19. We could have walked ( walk ) to the station. A taxi wasn’t necessary at all.
20. I shouldn’t have used ( use ) your computer without your permission.
21. She shouldn’t / couldn’t have used ( use ) your computer without your permission.
Step 4. Workbook.
Homework
篇13：Teaching plan for Unit13 (人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
通过本单元教学，学生能熟练地运用表示“提供和拒绝帮助”的常用语；复习句子的成分---- 主语；了解纽约的发展历史和土著人被压迫的历史。
Importance and difficulty:
1. words and expressions
a handful of , worth, tear down, pass through, take possession of, die out ,turn away, now that
2. sentences:
A. Today Native Americans express their anger over this business deal.
B. This is because the surface of the earth is not flat but round.
C. Now that they could ride horses, it became easier to hunt the bison.
D. This in return had and effect of the food supply for wolves.
3. Grammar-----Subject
A. The first settlers on the plains were farmers.
B. The killing of the bison changed the whole wild life of the plains.
C. Whether he will come or not is unknown.
D. To see is to believe.
E. The learned should be respected.
4. Useful expressions:
A. Can I help you?
B. What can I do for you?
C. Let me….
D. Would you like …
E. Thanks….
F. That’s very kind of you.
G. That’s very kind of you, but…
Lesson 49 New York
Aims and demands: Develop the Ss’ reading ability
Importance and difficulty: Have a deeper understanding of the text
Teaching methods: reading ,discussing, exercises
Learning methods: To read independently , try to guess it meaning according to the text
Teaching aids: tape recorder and some slides
Procedure:
Step 1. New words
Step 2. Warming up
Find out how much the Ss know about the USA
T: As we have learnt in Book 3A . There is one word which you must learn before you visit the USA. What is it ?
Ss: Freeze.
T: What does it mean?
Ss: Stand still and don’t move.
1. What is the capital of the USA? ( Washington. D C )
2. Who is the president of the USA?
3. Name three past presidents of the USA?
4. In which city is the tallest building? ( Chicago )
5. How many states are there in the USA? ( 50, 48+Alaska and Hawaii )
6. Which American president brought and end to slavery and was shot in a theatre?
(Abraham Lincoln)
7. What was the gold rush?
The time when thousands of people went to California to look for gold.
8. Where are the two Disneylands?
( Los Angeles and Florida.)
9. What is the name of the center of the film industry in Los Angeles? ( Hollywood )
10. What prize is given to film actors and directors? ( An Oscar )
Step 3. Fast reading
Read the text fast to get a general idea. And tell which of the following subjects are mentioned in the text? ( text book )
Population History Government Sports Weather Transport Parks Buildings
Step 4. Careful reading
Find out the facts that happened in the following years and give a description of the development of New York.
1. In 1524 : an Italian explorer discovered a group of islands on the east coast of the USA at a point where several rivers flow into the ocean.
2. In 1626 : the island of Manhattan was bought from local Indians , Native Americans , for a handful of goods worth about $24.
3. From 1789 to 1790: New York became the capital of the USA .
4. By 1820 : the population of New York had grown to about 125,000 , making it the largest city in the USA.
5. In 1858 : an area of poor housing, factories and farm buildings was torn down and Central Park was created.
6. In 1892 : the age of mass arrivals began and 15 million new people passed through Ellis Island into the USA over a period of 62 years.
7. Around the year 1900 : the building of skyscrapers in New York began.
8. In 1913 : a 55-storey building went up.
9. In 1931 : the Empire State Building was completed and it was the tallest building in the world then.
Step 5. Discussion ( P.2 )
Step 6. Workbook ( Lesson 49)
Step 7. Comprehension exercises:
Reading comprehension for 3 B Unit 13 ( Lesson 49) CDBCD BDDC
1. The passage is about _____.
A. about the history of New York
B. about the development of buildings in New York
C. a brief introduction to New York
D. about the characteristics of New York
2. Which one is not true?
A. New York is a harbour.
B. New York was owned by the local Indians.
C. New York was the capital of the USA.
D. New York is the political center of the USA.
3. “Native Americans” are _____.
A. American citizens B. local Indians
C. black people D. New York citizens
4. Which sentence is true?
A. Central Park is a natural park.
B. Central Park is a good place to study in.
C. Central Park is an entertainment center.
D. Central Park is a perfect place for rollerskating.
5. The age of mass arrivals began in ____.
A. eighteenth century
B. the early eighteenth century
C. nineteenth century
D. the late nineteenth century
6. The phrase “turn away” in paragraph 3 means___.
A. send away B. refuse to admit
C. cause to return D. drive out
7. “New York never sleeps.” Means ____.
A. people in New York work the whole day.
B. people in New York enjoy night life very much
C. New York is always noisy
D. all kinds of services are offered at night in New York
8. That the buildings in Manhattan become higher and higher cannot prove that ____.
A. the competition is becoming more fierce
B. more and more business and trade take place there
C. the building technology is becoming more advanced
D. New York is a good place for people to live in
9. People are of different opinions that New York is a city of ____.
A. short history B. heavy transportation
C. only one culture D. big population
Homework: ABC
Lesson 50 THE BISON ON THE PLAINS OF AMERICA
Aims and demands : Develop the students’ listening , speaking, reading and writing ability
Importance and difficulty : Have a good understanding of the text
Teaching methods: intensive reading
Teaching aid: text book , some slides, pictures
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Revision
1. Check the homework Exercises:
2. ask some questions: comprehension exercises
Step 2. Presentation
Now more and more people went to America. Do you know how first people went to America?
Step 1. Presentation
Review something about Australia.
1. Do you remember how the first people come to Australia?
The first people crossed into Australia from Asia on a great land bridge when the water level of the oceans was lower.
2. What were they once called?
In the past they were known as “ aborigines”, which means “ the first people of a country”.
3. What are they called now?
They are now known as Kooris.
4. How did they make a living ?
They made a living by hunting and picking fruits from the trees.
5. What are the famous animals in Australia? (which are disappearing)
Kangaroo, Koala , dingo…
T: Then how about America?
6. How did the first people come to America?
They arrived by crossing a land bridge from Asia to America.
7. Who were the first settlers in America?
Native Americans Who were known as local Indians.
8. How did they make a living ?
They made a living by hunting and killing wild animals, by gathering foots, nuts and wild fruits.
9. What kind of animal is very famous but it is disappearing now? ( bison / bisons / wild horses)
T: Today we are going to learn Lesson 50----- THE BISON ON THE PLAINS OF AMERICA
Step 2. Reading
Read the text and find out: Which words and phrases do the woods in bold in the text refer to?
Step 3. Careful reading
Read the text again and do the comprehension
Step 4. Diagram completion
Step 5. Workbook ---- Ex 2
Step 6. Questions:
1. In what ways did the settlers treat the Native Americans unfairly?
The settlers killed them, forced them to leave their hunting grounds, broke agreements which they had made, forced them onto poor land, and killed most of the bison on which Native Americans had relied for food.
2. What caused a big change in the wildlife on the plains?
The killing of large numbers of bison changed the whole wildlife chain on the plains.
Step 7. Comprehension exercises
Homework:
Reading comprehension for 3B Unit 13 Lesson 50 ACCDD DABD
1. What’s the general idea of this text?
A. While the settlers moved westwards, their killing of great numbers of bison destroyed the Native Americans life as well as the balance of the plains of America
B. The bison on the plains of America lived a poor life.
C. The struggles between the settlers and the Native Americans were fierce.
D. Settlers ruined Native Americans’ life.
2. Which is not true?
A. The Native Americans’ life depended on nature.
B. The Native Americans lived a hard life.
C. The Native Americans grew grains and raised animals.
D. The Native Americans lived a free life.
3. What brought by the settlers was ( were) good for the Native Americans?
A. Their culture. B. Their trade.
C. Their horses D. Their railways.
4. Bison was a treasure for Native Americans because _____.
A. they used bison to make themselves more beautiful
B. they used bison to carry goods
C. they used bison to make money
D. they couldn’t live without bison
5. “Object” in paragraph 3 means ____.
A. subject B. fight C. agree
D. say or do something against
6. The settlers’ killing of lots of bison had __purposes.
A. 1 B. 2 C. no D. 3
7. The settlers’ killing of the bison made ____.
a. settlers get a lot of money
b. Native Americans lose more land
c. Native Americans live a poor life
d. Nature lose its balance
A. a,b,c,d B. a,b,d C. b,c D. d
8. The change in number of bison had a great effect on the plains because ___.
A. bison was the most important part in the wildlife chain
B. bison was one part in the wildlife chain
C. bison was very important to the Native Americans
D. bison was very important to the grass and soil
9. This text is ____.
A. an animal story B. an old tale
B. a historical story
D. an animal story as well as a historical story
Lesson 49~50 Language practice
Exercises: Fill in the blanks or complete the sentences or translate the sentences:
Exercises for Lesson 49
1. The little boy got a handful of rice to feed the chickens.
2. Only a handful of people attended the dance/ ball.
3. He bought a book worth over $10.
4. New York is a city worth a visit / visiting.
be worth sth
be worth doing
非常值得参观 well worth a visit / visiting
well worthy of a visit / visiting
5. By 1820 the population of New York had grown to about 125,000 ,making it the largest city in the USA.
6. 到昨天下午5点钟（以前），他们已经做了一半的工作。
By 5 p.m yesterday they had already done half of the work.
7. 到下个星期天我们将完成这项工作。
By next Sunday we’ll have finished the job.
8. 杰克只学不玩，这使得他成为一个呆笨的孩子。
Jack had all work but no play, making him a dull boy.
9. The workmen tore town the old houses and built a new one in its place.
10. Behind our school is a vegetable garden, reaching down to the river. (延伸到河边)
11. He passed through the doorway and entered the room.
12. His grandpa went through many dangers during the war. （经历了许多危险）
13. They would go through fire and water （赴汤蹈火）to serve the people.
14. Because the hall was full, many people were turned away.
15. He never turned away anyone who asked for help .
turn away: refuse to admit
16. He bought the car in 1988, then a modern type in China.
17. A 55-storey building went up in 1913.
go up : be built （没有被动语态）
到处都在盖新房.
New buildings are going up everywhere.
18. What does “New York never sleeps” mean?
All kinds of services are offered all night long.
Many service sectors （服务行业 ） work round the clock.
Lesson 50
Exercises for Lesson 50
1. 既然你已经康复了，你就可以和我们一起工作了。
Now that you are well again, you can work with us.
2. 既然你的工作已经完成了，你就可以走了。
Now that you have finished your work, you may go.
3. 食品供应源源而来。
Since 1978 , food supplies have been coming in large numbers.
4. 战争期间，我们士兵杀死了大量的敌人。
During the war, our soldiers killed the enemy in great / huge numbers.
5. From 1830 on / onwards in the USA, and from about 1870 in Canada, settlers began to move westwards and to take possession of the plains as their own.
从现在开始 from now on / onwards
从那时开始 from then on
从1990年开始 from 1990 on
6. At midnight they crossed the river and took possession of the village.
7. You can’t take possession of my house until all the papers have been signed.
8. Though busy, they still objected to putting off the meeting.
9. The settlers killed the bison, cut off the skins and left the bodies behind to rot.
10. They refused to give in （投降）and fought to the end.
11. Mother kept inviting Mrs Smith to stay for lunch, and finally she gave in.
12. Mary usually has to give in to her brother.
give in: 投降 屈服 同意 让步
13. The ground supported few plants, and the insects which lived on these plants died out.
die out 绝种
die away 消逝. 消失
die of 死于
die from
be dying for 渴望,很想…
be dying to do… 很想做…
A. These animals have already died out .
B. I am dying for a cup of tea.
C. The fire died out.
D. The noise died away.
E. She is dying to see you.
F. She died of old age.
14. These boys were called in turn to see the headmaster.
15. The arrival of the European settlers had a great effect on the life of Native Americans.
Homework
篇14：Unit 2 News media 教学目的和建议(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
(Teaching aid and demands)
1. Words and Expressions
类别 课程标准要求掌握的项目
话题 Talking about news and the media
词汇 Media reliable fire face difficulty editor reason elect injure headline inform informed relate talented switch interviewer present reflect effort spiritural seldom AIDS addict social attention tolerate affair concern telegram retire complete bore attitude disappoint guard citizen polluter arm update
Go up burn down relate sb/sth relate to for once be addicted to even if draw attention to on all sides change one’s mind current affairs look up to fall in love with
功能 1. 谈论新闻媒体（Talking about news and the media）
Our readers want to know about….
Which of the media si the most reliable?
Newspapers and other media do more than simply record what happens.
2. 表达意见（Expressing opinions）
The man was careful/funny/nosy/generous/honest/clever…
What do you think of….?
What’s your opinion?
Why do you choose….?
Perhaps ….is more important.
I would rather choose….
I don’t think we should choose…
I don’t think we should choose….
语法 过去分词短语作定语和表语
1． 能够用-ed 形式描述人物的特性或状态
a journalist He is experienced
an experienced journalist
a programme It is updated
an updated programme
I want to write about people addicted to drugs.
3. 能够用-ed形式与系动词连用，描述人或物品的特性或状态；
The American audience is excited about Yaoming’s performance..
2．Language using.
By using the language, fulfil the tasks of listening, speaking, reading and writing. and learn about the life of a reporter and the details of printing newspapers.
3. Teaching periods. 4 periods
Period One: Practice speaking and listening.
Period Two: Reading Comprehension.
Period Three: The study of language points.
Period Four: The Study of Grammar and writing.
Teaching Steps for SEFC Book 2A
Unit 1 News media
Period 1
Step 1 Revision
1 Ask some Ss to tell what they did during the summer vacation.
2 Talk about TV and newspapers with the Ss: Who likes reading newspapers? How do they often learn about news? What kind of news do you like? Who's your favourite news reporter? Which newspaper
do you like? etc.
Step 2 Presentation
Tell the Ss: In this unit we are going to learn about news media. Every day we learn about news through
Different ways, for example: by surfing the internet, listening to the radio, watching TV, reading books or reading newspaper etc. But which do you like best? Why?
Which of the news media mentioned is the most reliable? Why?
2. How are the media mentioned above different from each other?
3. How do you know whether what you hear, see or read is true?
4. Do you know how a newspaper is made? What about a magazine?
5. What words will you need to talk about news and the media?
Step 3 Listening
SB Page 10, Part 1. Say Look at the picture. What can you see in the picture? (picture 1. two men. Picture2. a young man and woman.) ,What do you think are they, Can you guess their relations (picture 1. the old man looks like a boss, and the young man looks like his employee. They are discuss something. Picture 2. they look like a couple or good friends, they are drinking)
Ok. Next, we will listen to the recorder. Do the listening and learn what happens. and answer the following questions:
1. What kind of person is Jim Gray? Why is he no longer working for the company?
2. Compare your answers to questions 1 and 2 with those of your classmates. Are there any differences? Why?
3. You have heard two different descriptions of what happened to Jim Gray. Why are they different/ Which one do you think is better?
Step 4 Speaking
Next, work in groups. You are the editiors of a newspaper. Below is a list of ten things that happened today. You may only report five of them. Decide which events you are going to put in your newspaper and give you reasons for your choices. Compare your choices with those of your classmates by using the following useful expressions:
What do you think of……../
What’s your opinion?
Why do you choose….?
Perhaps…is more important.
I would rather choose…
I don’t think we should choose…
Maybe it would be better to choose…
Our readers want to know about…
Topics.
1. 200 people died in an earthquake in Turkey.
2. France elected a new president
3. Two men robbed a bank in shanghai.
4.Ahouse in your city burnt down. Nobody was injured.
5. people in your city moved into new buildings today and were happy.
6.A Chinese scientist has invented a new car engine that does not pollute the air
7There is a rumour that a large company wants to build a factory in your city
8. China beat Brazil 2-1 in the football
9. Three children from your city were killed
10.Food prices are going up.
Notes:. 1. be different from……
Make a difference….. make some / no difference.
2. interview, 接见，会谈
give/grant an interview to sb. 接见某人
have an interview with sb 会见某人
3． Description 描写，描述形容
give a description of the battle.
Beyond description 难以描述
4． Rob 抢劫
rob sb of sth.
steal sth from sb.
5． go up/go down 价格的上升、下降
6. burn down, 把。。。烧成平地， （蜡烛等）渐渐烧完，火力减弱。
Step 5. homework
Finish the exercise on page 88, Ex. 1,2,3
Period 2
Step 1 Revision
1 Check the homework exercises.
2. What do you think the life of a reporter is like?
Step. 2 Preparation for reading
SB Page 2, Part 1. Talk; about the pictures: What can you see? Can you describe it?(Picture 1, several people are sitting at the desks in the office, perhaps they are editors. Picture 2, a reporter is interviewing a man, and several people are taking pictures of the man. Picture 3 , we can see several copies of newspapers. namely People’s Daily and China Daily. What do you think the process of making newspapers.. Next, we’ll read a passage about what a reporter’s life is like? And their opinions! )
Step 3 Reading
Wb Lesson 2, Ex. 1. Go through the exercise and make sure the Ss know what to do. Let them read the whole passage carefully and answer the questions, working in pairs or small groups. Check the answers with the whole class.
Comprehension.
1．What’s the basic task for a reporter?
a. To report events as what happened.
b .To reflect opinions according to readers’ tastes.
c. To develop stories as the editors tell him or her.
d. To draw readers’ attention.
2. The first sentence in the first paragraph means _______.
a.More information was given to us by newspapers and other media than that simply recorded.
b.It takes newspapers and other media more efforts and time to report what happen than just record what happens.
c.What newspapers and other media can give us is much more than what is simply recorded.
d.Recording what happens is much easier than using newspapers and other media.
According to the passage, the media mentioned are__________.
A. newspapers B. TV programmes
C. broadcasts D. Both A and B.
3. What happened in the first report ?
a. Some workers in the company are on strike.
b. A group of about 100 people made trouble for the workers in the company.
c. Not all of the trouble-makers left peacefully after the police arrived.
d. Workers fought with the trouble-makers.
4. In the 2nd report what happened?
a. A peaceful march against pollution was put to an end by the company.
b. The company was in trouble because of the citizens.
c. The citizens fighting against the pollution fought against the angry men with sticks.
d. On seeing the man with sticks sent by the company, the citizens were timid and frightened.
5. The company in the first report is considered to be____ while in the second it is regarded as _____ .
A. the best; the worst B. a best; the worst
C. the richest; the poorest D. richest; poorest.
6. What topic is treated in Passage 1?
a. How is the news made and written?
b. How does a reporter decide who to write.
c. How do a newspapers help us understand the world?
7. Their jobs and the news we read is made and written.
a. What’s the best title for each story in passage 2?
b. The most successful company/ the worst company.
c. A fight with the police/ A fight with citizens.
d. Friends or enemies?/Bad or good citizens.
8. Making troubles/carrying out the right of the citizens.
‘Behind the headline” proves that ________.
a. We can understand the world better by reading the headlines.
b. The headlines must be written by talented journalists.
c. Publishing papers needs much and is worth doing so.
d. The headlines must be true.
9. From the two reports in Passage 2, we can infer_________.
a. The most successful company in the first report is really the worst polluter in the second one.
b. The citizens against the pollution in the second report are the trouble-makers in the first report.
c. Police in the first report are the angry men armed with sticks to fight with the citizens in the second report.
d. All of the above.
Keys 1-10.ABDBA ADBCD
Step3. Listening
Next listen to the tape, Listen to the two passages. Act the interviewees and interviewers.
Step4.post-reading
Next do the post-reading part on page 12.
Step 5. Homework.
Finish the exercise on page 89.
Period 3
Step 1 Revision
1 Check the homework exercises.
2 Revise the reading passage in SB Lesson 2, Part 1.
Step 2 Language points
Tell the Ss Today we are going to learn some important words, expressions and phrases and sentence patterns.
1. informed decisions, 通知决定
常用于句式： inform sb. of sth.
I informed her mother of her safe arrival.
She returned and informed us of their decision.
后可接从句做宾语，
We were informed that a big fire had broken out in the next town.
常用于被动语态或复合结构中。
Has he been informed of his father’s death yet?
Please keep me informed of fresh development.
2. relate vt. 把。。。。。。联系起来
relate…to/with…..把。。。与。。。联系起来
I can’t relate what he does to what he says.
常英语被动语态： be related to…… “与。。。。。。有关系“
His fear of people is deeply related to his unhappy childhood.
Physics is closely related to mathematics.
vi. 有关， 涉及常和 介词to 连用
I want to ask you a question that relates to politics.
That doesn’t relate to him.
This letter relates to the sale of the house.
3. switch roles for once….. 改变一下角色、身份
switch vt. 转换，改变
switch sides 改变立场 switch the discussion to another topic 换一个讨论题目
4． Rather than….而不是。。。
He, rather than you , is wrong.
You played football in the classroom, rather on the playground.
The color seems green rather than blue.
They were screaming rather than singing.
rather than 后接动词不定式， 可省略不定式符号 to
She likes to keep things rather than (to)throw them away.
Rather than go there, I’d prefer to stay on my own.
4. The editor’s job is to kep the newspaper balanced and interesting to the readers.
编辑的工作就是使报纸对于读者来说平衡和有趣
keep 后跟宾语 ， 然后形容词balanced 和interesting 做宾补
Please keep your room clean.
5. ….make sure that the article reflects events and opinions truthfully.
Make sure….确保。。。。
When you leave the classroom, make sure that all the lights are turned off.
Reflect vt. 反映； 表现
Does this letter reflect your real opinions?
Her face reflects how angry she was.
Vt. 反射，回响
The water reflected the sunlight.
The mirror reflected the heat.
Vt. 映出； 照出
She was looking at her face reflected in the mirror.
6. ….I wrote about the efforts to bring stolen cultural relics….
Efforts, 努力， 艰难的尝试
Make efforts to do sth./ make every effort to do sth./make an effort to do sth.
努力做某事、尽一切努力做某事
spare no efforts to do sth.. 不遗余力地做某事
bring…back to….使。。。回到。。。
使。。。回忆起来。。。His letter brought back to them the days when they were young.
使。。。恢复。。。bring sb. back to health. 使某人恢复健康
7. 。。。who tried to adapt to her new life after having…..
adapt to 适应。。。You should adapt to the life in the No. Middle School.
Adapt…to…使。。。适应； 使。。。适合。。。
Adapt one’s thinking to the new conditions. 使自己的思想适应新的情况
8． 。。。it was the first time that I had written….
注意时态的一致： It is/was the first time that I have/had been there.
9. ….who are addicted to drugs…..
be/become/get addicted to…..对。。。。。。上瘾； 沉溺于 to 介词
She is addicted to drinking.
He became addicted to drugs.
10. on all sides/on every side 在各方面， 到处
There are mountains on all sides. 四面都是山。
11． 。。。leading to a future world where……
lead to…通向； 导致。
This is a road leading to Beijing.
His carelessness led to his failure.
11. …to what we are concerned with now.
concern vt. 使关心； 使挂念，使担心
concern oneself with state affairs 关心国家大事
be concerned for the masses 关心群众 be concerned about the growth of the younger generation
关心年青一代的成长。
Be concerned with ……对。。。。关心。。。
12． Tolerate…..vt. 忍受； 容忍
I can’t tolerate his selfishness.
Tolerate ( sb./one’s )doing sth.
I won’t tolerate you/your cheating in the exam.
The government tolerate smoking and drinking but not taking drugs.
12. look up to 尊敬； 钦佩
Schoolboys usually look up to great athletes.
He is a fine chap,I’ve always look up to him.
13. arm. Vt. 武装； 用武器装备
arm oneself with…. “装备。。。。。。； 以。。。。。。为武器“
They armed themselves with machine guns.
The crowd armed themselves with sticks and stones.
* be armed to the teeth 武装到牙齿
He is armed to the teeth.
n. (常用复数)武器， 兵器
a man of arms/ The people were quick to take up arms to defend their freedom.
*** 短语中的介词 “to”
relate…to…/be related to 与。。。有关系。。。
adapt to…. Be/get/become addicted to…对。。。上瘾； 沉溺于。。。。
draw attention to….. lead to…. ; bring ….. back …. To…..
pay attention to…….; look forward to……, stick to……..,object to…….., be/get used to……,
look up to……, listen to……,devote…to….., owe….to…..., be/get married to….,add to/ add up to……,
Step 3. Exercise.
Translation:
1. 与。。。。有关。。。。 --------------
2. 就这一次------------。
3. 对。。。。上瘾。。。----------。
4. 在各方面------------。
5. 十分之九----------。
6. 使报纸保持均衡------。
7. 条理地, 有组织地----------------。
8. 适应新生活。----------。
9. 注意。。。。----------
10. 尊敬----------。
11. 爱上；喜欢上--------。
II. Correction.
I am looking forward to join the army.
2. The books are well worth to reading.
3. She reached the top of the hill and stopped resting on a big rock.
4. He get down to write the composition after lunch.
5. It is a waste of time to talk to him.
6. They left the restaurant as possible as they could after dinner.
7. Let’s fix a time to a face-to-face interview.
8. Three hours late, I phoned him again.
9. The old man needs to look after.
10. The girl got married with the boy last month.
11. The letter we looked forward to coming at last.
Step 4. Homework.
Finish off the workbook exercise. On page89,ex 1,2,3,4.
Period 4
Step 1 Revision
1. check the students’ homework.
2. Let the students retell the story.
Step 2 Grammar.
The past participle used as Attribute and Predicative.
First let the students tick out the sentences from the passages with the p.p in them.
For example:
1. Experienced editors and reporters make informed decisions about what events to report…
2. We asked two of China’s many talented journalists to tell us more about news and newspapers.
3. After the interview, the reporter must present the material in an organized way and……
4. Chen wrote about the efforts to bring stolen cultural relics back to China.
5. I want to write about people addicted to drugs.
6. TV programmes and printed articles help people in other countries learn about China and the Chinese people.
7. The media can often help solve problems and draw attention to situations where help is needed.
8. It will lead to a future world where people from all countries are respected and different views and opinions are tolerated.
Next, sort them out, which are used as Attributives ? and which are used as Predicatives
Attributes: 1,2,3,4,5,6 Predicatives: 7,8
Step 3. Rewrite the following sentences with the Participle.
1. The telegram that was sent by my sister brought the news of my dear grandma’s death.
2. Let’s try the bookstore that was opened last month.
3. Nine out of ten women who were interviewed about the product said they liked it.
4. The three guns, which had been stolen from the police station, were found in the house.
5. I don’t like going to supermarkets that are located in the center of the town.
suggested answers:
1. The telegram sent by my sister brought the news of my dear grandma’s death.
3. Let’s try the bookstore opened last month.
4. Nine out of ten women interviewed about the product said they liked it.
5. The three guns, stolen from the police station, were found in the house.
6. I don’t like going to supermarkets located in the center of the town..
Step 4.Translation with the participles.
1. 地面上有一个打碎了的玻璃杯。
2. 给我买的那辆自行车被偷了。
3. 这是第一本为孩子们写的英语书。
4. 被感动的孩子们久久不能入睡。
5. 昨天出版的报纸为我们提供了虚假的信息。
6. 去年建成的那座大楼是我们的图书馆。
7. 正在回答问题的男孩子就是李明。
8. 一个叫杰克的男子对这个问题很感兴趣。
9. 英语口语是很有意思的。
10. 在澳大利亚，人们所说的语言是英语。
Suggested answers:
1. A broken glass lay on the ground..
2. The bike bought foe me was stolen.
3. This is a book written for children.
4. The moved children slept late.
5. The newspapers printed yesterday provided us false information.
6. The building built last year is our library.
7. The boy answering the question is Liming.
8. A man called Jack is interested in the question.
9. Spoken English is very interesting.
10. The language spoken in Australia is English.
Step 5. Writing. Write a short passage to compare two kinds of media, for example , websites and newspapers. . use the following information :
Similarities Differences
A website is similar to a newspaper. Websites, on the other hand, change all the time.
Both newspapers and websites make money by selling ads However, not all websites are updated every day.
Websites also have different pages Newspapers are written by reporters, but websites can be written by anyone.
Websites have headlines and pictures, too. While many websites are free, most newspapers cost money.
A model passage:
单元知识过关练习
I . Multiple choice.
1. What they have said_____ to what we are expecting.
A. reflected B. is related C. switches D. tolerates
2. From my work with people I find everyone’s life is _________.
A. unique B. positive C. negative D. careless
3. We should respect other people and _____ different views and opinions.
A. print B. tolerate C. seek D. publish
4. ______ reporters can present their materials in a(n) ______ way.
A. informed; talented B. Talented; informed
B. Talented; organized D. Organized; talented
5. The lady thinks her husband is very ______ because he is very honest and positive.
A. nosy B. generous C. reliable D. experienced
6. An old building ______ in the fire and a few people were injured.
A. burn down B. pulled down C. destroyed D. put down
7. We should learn to consider things _________ .
A. on all sides B. on the other hand C. on one side D. on one hand
8. It’s very interesting to see many young fans ______ their stars.
A, look for B. look down upon C. look out D. look up to
9. Now food prices are _____ fast.
A. gone up B. going up C. bringing up D. brought up
10. The film is so popular because it _______ the present country life very truthfully.
A. present B. ignores C. bores D. reflects
11. We can’t be so careless as to ignore them _____they are very ordinary people.
A. as if B. even if C. if D. as
12. His critical attitude ______ us.
A. disappointing B. disappointed C. boring D. surprising
13. We are discussing the questions _____ by teachers or ourselves.
A. raised B. raising C. rising D. risen
14. We spent the night _____ in our bedroom.
A. locking B. locked C. played D. to play
15. Do you think the teaching equipment should be _________.
A. addicted B. completed C. updated D. retired.
II.完形填空 阅读下面的短文，掌握其大意，然后从短文后各题所给的A、B、C、D四个选项中选出一个最佳答案，完成短文。
Henry was from the United States and he 16 to London for a 17 . One day he was not feeling 18 , so he went to the desk of his 19 and said, “I want to see a 20 . Can you give me the mane of 21 one?” The clerk looked 22 a book and then said, “Prkenneth Grey, 61010.” Henry said, “Thank you 23 . Is he expensive?” “Well,” the clerk answered, “he 24 charges(收费) his patients(病人) two pounds for their 25 visit to him, and 1.5 for later 26 . ” Henry 27 to save 50p, 28 when he went to see the doctor, he said, “I’ve come 29 , doctor.”
For a few 30 the doctor looked at his 31 carefully without saying 32 . Then he nodded and said, “Oh, yes.” He 33 him and then said, “Everything’s going as 34 should do. Just continue with the 35 I gave you last time.”
( )16. A. had come B. has come C. was coming D. comes
( )17. A. week B. month C. holiday D. year
( )18. A. good B. well C. nice D. better
( )19. A. office B. room C. house D. hotel
( )20. A. friend B. doctor C. nurse D. lawyer
( )21. A. good B. bad C. old D. young
( )22. A. up B. down C. in D. on
( )23. A. more B. a lot C. lots D. much
( )24. A. never B. always C. seldom D. sometimes
( )25. A. past B. first C. last D .next
( )26. A. call B. visit C. visiting D. visits
( )27. A. decided B. believed C. thought D. considered
( )28. A. however B. but C. so D. yet
( )29. A. again B. twice C. first D. already
( )30. A. while B. seconds C. minute D. quarters
( )31. A. body B. head C. face D. nose
( )32. A. anything B. something C. nothing D. everything
( )33. A. examined B. watched C. asked D. touched
( )34. A. one B. ones C. it D. they
( )35. A. food B. drink C. tea D. medicine
III. 阅读理解 阅读下面的书信，从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出能回答所提问题或完成所给句子的最佳答案。
Sep, 28, 2000
Dear Bob,
Thank you very much for inviting me to your birthday party. I am very sorry, but I cannot come.
My mother is sick in bed. The doctor has told her that she should stay in bed for several days. Last night she insisted on doing the housework as usual, so this morning her illness got worse.
My father will be away on business trip until Wednesday. In the meantime I am the only person who can take care of my mother.
I hope your party will be a great success. Please give my best wishes to everyone.
Yours,
Charlie
( )36. Charlie wrote his letter to tell Bob ________.
A. he invited Bob to have a picnic in the park
B. he accepted Bob’s invitation
C. the reason why he was not able to attend the birthday party
D. to express his regards to Bob’s parents
( 37. Who is the only person to look after the sick mother?
A. The nurse B. Charlie’s friend C. Charlie’s partner D. Charlie himself
( )38. Why Charlie’s father couldn’t take care of his sick wife? “Because _________.”
A. he was a lazy husband
B. he was not willing to do the nurse job
C. he had to be off on business while his wife was ill
D. Charlie’s mother didn’t like her husband to be a nurse
( )39. What advice did the doctor give the sick mother?
A. He told the sick mother not to drink too much water
B. He said that Charlie’s mother should go outside for shining
C. Charlie’s mother should stay in bed at least several days
D. Charlie’s mother should eat more meat and chocolate
( )40. Charlie’s mother got worse because _________.
A. she didn’t see a doctor B. she didn’t take any medicine
C. she was tired with heavy housework D. she smoke and drank too much
IV.短文改错
Last August we decided to spend a day in the country. 41 _____________
Many others people had the same idea. We moved 42_____________
out the city behind a long line of cars. But at 43_____________
finally we came to a quiet country road and after 44_____________
some time, we stopped. We bought many food with 45_____________
us and we got it out. Now, however, everything 46_____________
is ready. We sat near a path at the food of a hill. 47_____________
it was quiet on the cool grass until we saw bells ringing 48____________
at the top of the hill. That we saw made us pick 49____________
out our things and run back to our car as quickly as 50____________
possible. About 200 sheep were coming to us down the path!
V. 书面表达：
下面是李海二○○一年暑假期间的活动安排。请你按其先后顺序用第三人称的口吻写一篇英语短文。（单词限制在80-120之间，力求语言通顺、连贯、正确，不能逐字逐句翻译。）
1． 完成老师布置的暑假作业。
2． 和父母一起游览长城、颐和园，到公园游泳、划船、钓鱼等。
3． 帮助妈妈干些家务事。
4． 阅读课外书籍。
5． 预习下单元功课。
Keys to Exx:
1--------5BABBC 6------10 AADBD 11-----15 BBABC
16-----20 ACBDB 21-----25 ACDBB 26-----30 DACAB
31-----35 CAACD 36-----40 CDCCC
41. √ 42. others→other 43. out→out of 44. finally→last 45. many→much
46. however 47. is→was 48. saw→heard 49. That→What 50. out→up
IV. Possible version:
Li Hai is going to spend his summer vacation.
First he wants to finish his homework and then he, together with his parents, will go to Beijing to visit the Great Wall and the Summer Palace. He will go swimming, boating and fishing in some other parks. Besides, he will do some housework to help his mother, and he will read some books. Finally he will preview (go over) the lessons of next trem.
篇15：Unit 2 News Media整体教案（课件）1(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
Unit 2高二语法讲义
1. 不定式的构成
不定式是由不定式符号to+动词原形构成，在某些情况下to也可省略。
不定式一般有时式和语态的变化，通常有下表中的几种形式（以do为例）：
主动式 被动式
一般式 to do to be done
完成式 to have done to have been done
进行式 to be doing /
完成进行式 to have been doing /
1) 不定式的一般式
不定式的一般式所表示的动作通常与主要谓语的动作同时或几乎同时发生，或是在它之后发生。如：
They invited us to go there this summer. 他们邀请我们今年夏天去那儿。
He stood aside for me to pass. 他站到一边让我通过。
2) 不定式的完成式
不定式的完成式所表示的动作在谓语所表示的动作之前发生，它在句中可作表语、状语、宾语，有时也可作主语、定语等。如：
She seemed to have heard about this matter. 她似乎已听说过这件事。
I am sorry to have kept you waiting so long. 我很抱歉让你等了这么久。
I meant to have told you about it, but I happened to have an important thing to do.我本来想告诉你这件事的，但我碰巧有一件重要的事要做。
It has been an honor for me to have traveled so much in your country. 对我来说，在你们国家旅行这么多地方是一件很荣幸的事情。
3) 不定式的进行式
不定式的进行式表示正在进行的与谓语动词同时发生的动作。它在句中可以用作除谓语以外的所有成分。如：
It’s nice of you to be helping us these days. 你真好，这些天一直帮我们。
He pretended to be listening to the teacher carefully. 他假装在认真地听老师讲课。
We didn’t expect you to be waiting for us here. 我们没料到你一直在这儿等我们。
4) 不定式的完成进行式
如果不定式表示的动作是谓语所表示时间之前一直进行的动作，就需要用完成进行式。如：
They are said to have been working in Tibet for 20 years. 据说他们已经在西藏工作了。
We are happy to have been helping each other these days. 我们很高兴这些天能互相帮助。
5) 动词不定式的否定形式是由not或never加不定式构成。如：
Try not to be late again next time. 尽量下次不要再迟到。
He wished us never to meet her again. 他希望我们永远不要再见到她。
6) 疑问词+动词不定式：
不定式和疑问词whether, what, which, whom, where, when, how, 等连用可以在句中起名词的作用，通常跟在tell, know, show, decide, learn, wonder, explain, advise, teach, discuss, find out等动词后面作宾语，有时也可以充当主语、表语等。如：
On hearing the news, he didn’t know whether to laugh or to cry.
听到这个消息，他不知道该哭还是该笑。
When to hold the meeting has not decided. 什么时候开会还没有决定。
The most important problem is how to get so much money.
最重要的事情是如何搞到这么多钱。
介词后一般不直接接不定式，但可以接疑问词+不定式短语作宾语。如：
Mary gave some advice on how to learn English. 玛丽提了一些如何学习英语的建议。
I have no idea of how to do it. 我不知道该怎么做。
7) 不定式的被动式：
当不定式逻辑上的主语是这个不定式所表示的动作的承受者时，不定式一般要用被动形式，to be +过去分词和to have been +过去分词。这些形式可以用来作主语、表语、宾语、定语、状语、补语。如：
It’s a good thing for him to have been scolded by the teacher. 对他来说，被老师责备是一件好事。
They seemed to be satisfied with the result. 他们似乎对结果很满意。
He asked to be sent to work in the countryside. 他要求被派往农村工作。
She was the last person to have been mentioned at the meeting. 她是会上最后一个被提到的人。
I had to shout to be heard. 我不得不大喊才能被听到。
We don’t like our friends to be laughed at from time to time. 我们不喜欢我们的朋友不时地被嘲笑。
2. 不定式的语法作用
1) 不定式作主语：
To see once is better than to hear a hundred times. 百闻不如一见。
To master a foreign language is not an easy thing. 掌握一门外语不是一件容易的事。
在很多情况下，人们通常用it作为形式上的主语，而把不定式短语移到谓语之后，使句子显得平稳一些。如：
It’s good manners to wait in line. 排队等候是很有礼貌的。
It made us very angry to hear him speak to his mother like that. 听到他那样跟他妈妈说话我们很生气。
2) 不定式作表语：
The most important thing is to put theory into practice. 最重要的论付诸实践。
The greatest happiness is to work for the happiness of all. 最大的幸福就是为大家的幸福而工作。
3) 不定式作宾语：
He wanted to know the truth. 他想知道真相。
I prefer to be starved to death rather than beg. 我宁愿被饿死也不愿乞讨。
He pretended to have read the book when I asked him about it.
我问到他的时候，他假装读过这本书。
另外，不定式在某些复合宾语中作宾语时，人们常常用it代表不定式，而将真实宾语放在补足语之后。如：
Do you think it better to translate it in this way? 你认为这样翻译是不是更好？
I feel it a great honor to be invited to speak at the meeting before so many students.
我觉得被邀请在会上面对这么多学生发言是一件很光荣的事情。
4) 不定式作补语：
①不定式可以和名词或代词一起构成复合结构作动词的宾语，这时不定式被称为宾语补足语。如：
I would like you to help me with my English exercises. 我想请你帮我做英语练习。
I never expected the shoes to be worn out so soon. 我从来没想到鞋子这么快就穿破了。
注意：动词help后面接不定式作宾语或宾语补足语可以带to也可以不带to。如：
Who can help me (to) carry this heavy box? 谁能帮我拎这个重箱子？
②在make, let, have等使役动词和see, watch, notice, hear, feel等感官动词后的复合宾语中，动词不定式不带to。
I often hear her sing in the next room. 我经常听到她在隔壁唱歌。
They make the baby go to bed at 7:00 p.m. every day. 他们每天让孩子晚上7：00上床睡觉。
注意：get, leave等词也有“让”“叫”的意思，和使役动词意思相近，但它们后面的不定式作宾语补足语必须要有to。如：
I’ll get him to try it again. 我将让他再试一次。
How could you leave him to have supper with a stranger?
你怎么让他跟一个陌生人一起吃晚饭？
注意：当使役动词和感官动词变为被动语态时，不定式就成了主语补语，作主语补语的不定式必须加to。如：
Though he had often made his little sister cry, today he was made to cry by his little sister. 尽管他经常弄哭他的小妹妹，但今天他却被他的小妹妹弄哭了。
He is often heard to sing the song. 经常有人听到他唱这首歌。
③think, consider, believe, declare, suppose, find, imagine, know, understand, take, prove, feel等动词后面接的不定式短语作补语多由to be+形容词或名词构成，think, consider, find后的to be常可省略。如：When he woke up, she found herself (to be ) badly injured.
她醒来的时候，发现自己受了重伤。 I thought her (to be) nice and honest the first time I met her.我第一次见到她的时候就认为她人很好，很诚实。
含有此类复合宾语的句子变成被动语态时，不定式同样被称之为主语补足语。如：
The young man was considered to have great promise. 这个年轻人被认为大有前途。
The situation was found to be quite encouraging. 形势看来很使人鼓舞。
④以be said, be reported, be known, seem, happen, prove, appear等构成谓语的句子中，动词不定式通常也可看作主语补语。如：
More than 20 people were reported to have been killed in the accident.
据报道，有20多个人死于事故。
I happened to be talking with him when he was hit by a car. 他被汽车撞的时候，我碰巧在和他谈话。
5) 不定式作定语：
不定式在句中作定语通常放在其所修饰的名词或代词之后，以下几种情况常用不定式作定语：
①能带不定式作宾语的动词，其同源名词可以带不定式作定语，常见的有attempt, decision, promise, plan, intention, failure, wish, determination等。如：
He hasn’t kept his promise to write to his parents regularly. 他没有遵守诺言定期给他父母亲写信。
My wish to be a teacher is quite understandable. 我想成为一个教师的愿望是可以理解的。
②常与不定式搭配的形容词，其同源名词一般可以带不定式作定语，常见的有ability, anxiety, eagerness, ambition等。如：
His eagerness to finish his work in time was quite obvious.他急切地想准时完成工作是很明显的。
We admire his ability to speak a foreign language so well.
我们欣赏他能把一门外语说得这么好。
③序数词、形容词最高级或被only, last, next等词修饰的名词可以用不定式作定语。如：
He is always the first person to come and the last one to leave.他总是第一个来最后一个离开。
The next person to attend the meeting is Dr. Baker.下一个出席会议的人是贝克先生。
④还有一些名词经常带不定式作定语。如：person, man, thing, something, anything, nothing, time, way, reason, chance, courage, opportunity等。如：
We students should have the courage to face any difficulty.
我们学生应该有勇气面对任何困难。
He had no reason to leave his friends and live alone on the island.
他没有理由离开他的朋友独自住到岛上去。
⑤不定式作定语时，有时与被修饰的名词之间有意义上的动宾关系，如果该不定式动词是不及物动词，它后面需加上适当的介词。如：
There is nothing to worry about. 没什么可担心的。
There are many interesting books to choose from, but I don’t know which to borrow. 有很多有趣的书可以挑选，但我不知道该借哪一本。
6) 不定式作状语：
不定式作状语可以表示行为的目的、结果、原因、条件等
① 不定式作目的状语，有时也可以用in order (not) to, so as (not) to结构。如：
In order to protect the young plants from the sun, Mother put them in the shade.
为了保护幼苗不被太阳晒坏，妈妈把它们放到了阴凉处。
He got up very early this morning so as not to be late for school again.
今天早上他起身很早以免上学再迟到。
注意：so as (not) to do不可以置于句首。
②不定式作结果状语，常见的结构有too…to, enough…to, so…as to, such…as to, only to…等。如：
The question is too difficult for me to answer. 对我来说，这个问题很难回答。
He said he was clever enough to deal with it by himself.他说他足够聪明可以独自应付这件事。
Will you be so kind as to turn down the radio? 请你帮我把收音机调低一点好吗？
He woke up only to find himself in hospital. 他醒来发现自己在医院里。
注意：too…to通常表示太……而不……，但在下列句子中没有否定的意思。
She is only too glad to stay at home. 她太想留在家里了。
He is too anxious to know the examination results. 他很急切地想知道考试结果。
③不定式作原因状语，通常用来修饰表示情感、心理状态、性格等的形容词。常见的形容词有：happy, glad, lucky, fortunate, surprised, angry, anxious, ready, quick, slow, cruel, clever, frightened, shocked, sorry, eager, proud, disappointed, foolish, impatient, unwise, naughty等。如：
They are surprised to learn of his death. 得知他死亡的消息，他们很惊讶。
We are proud to be young people of new China. 成为新中国的青年，我们感到很骄傲。
另外，hard, difficult, easy, fit，comfortable等词也可以接动词不定式。这时候，作句子主语的除了是表示人的词外，还可以是表示物的词。如：
The water is not fit to drink. 这水不适合饮用。
The room is very comfortable to live in. 这个房间住起来很舒服。
注意：后两句中的不定式与句子的主语或宾语之间是动宾关系，此时如果不定式动词是不及物动词，则需要带上适当的介词。
3. 不定式的复合结构
1) 不定式复合结构的构成
不定式在使用时通常有自己的逻辑主语，一般可以是句子的主语或宾语，或者由物主代词暗示出来。如：
They plan to build a hotel. 他们计划建造一个酒店。
His father sent him abroad to study literature. 他父亲送他出国去学文学。
I could see her eagerness to go abroad. 我可以看出他急切地想出国。
但有时需要明确表示出不定式的逻辑主语（即不定式动作的执行者），此时一般用for/of +名词（代词）短语+不定式来构成不定式的复合结构。如：
It’s expensive for people to use electricity for cooking. 人们用电做饭是很昂贵的。
It’s careless of you to make such a mistake. 你犯这样的错误真是粗心。
2) 不定式复合结构的语法作用
不定式的复合结构在句中可以做主语、宾语、表语、状语、定语。
①不定式的复合结构作主语、宾语，通常用it 作形式主语或形式宾语来代替不定式的复合结构。如：
It’s necessary for the goods to be packed in strong cases. 货物很有必要用坚固的箱子打包。
They thought it impossible for us to find the lost child in the darkness.
他们认为我们要在黑暗中找到迷路的小孩是不可能的。
②不定式的复合结构作表语、状语、定语。如：
That’s for you to decide. 那个由你来决定。
For the test to be passed, the students should work harder than before.
为了能通过考试，学生们应该比以往更认真学习。
I have some books for you to read. 我有几本书送给你读。
1. 不定式不带to的规则：
前面我们已经谈到，在一些使役动词和感官动词后的不定式作宾语补语时，不定式符号to常常省略，下面还有几种情况请大家注意：
① 动词原形come, go等在口语中可接不带to的不定式。如：
Go tell her. 去告诉他。
Come have a glass. 来喝一杯。
②在why引起的一些疑问句中，疑问词直接跟动词原形或not+动词原形。如：
Why spend so much money? 为什么花这么多钱？
Why not let her have a try? 为什么不再让她试一试？
③在had better（还是……最好）, had best（最好，顶好）, would rather（宁可，宁愿）, would rather…than（宁可……而不……）, would sooner（宁可，宁愿）, would sooner…than（宁可……而不……）, cannot but（不得不，必然）, cannot choose but（只得）, cannot help but（不得不）等结构后直接跟动词原形或not +动词原形。如：
You’d better listen to your teacher’s opinion. 你最好听一听老师的看法。
I would rather work than stay idle. 我宁愿工作而不愿闲坐。
Rather than ride on a crowded bus, he always prefers to ride a bicycle.
他宁愿挤公共汽车也不愿骑自行车。
Liu Hulan would sooner die than surrender. 刘胡兰宁死不屈。
One’s world outlook cannot but come through in what one says and does.
一个人的世界观必然在他的言行中表现出来。
④在介词but, except之前如有动词do的任一形式，其后的动词不定式不用to。如：
Last evening I did nothing but repair my farm tools. 昨晚上我除了修理农具外，没有做其它的事情。
Now there was nothing he could do except admit defeat. 现在他只有认输。
如but 之前没有do，其后的不定式则一般要加to。如：
I’m afraid we have no choice but to take a taxi. 恐怕我们别无选择，只好乘出租车了。
They desired nothing but to succeed. 他们只想成功。
⑤在出现并列的动词不定式时，为了避免重复，后面的不定式符号to可省略。如：
I really don’t know what to say and do. 我真的不知道该说什么，该干什么。
Can you help me to call him and ask him to attend the meeting at 2:00 p.m.?
你能不能帮我打电话给他，叫他下午两点来开会？
但如果两个不定式有对比的意思，则不定式符号to不可被省去。如：
I came not to scold you but to praise you. 我是来夸你的，不是来骂你的。
The purpose of the new technology is to make life easier, not to make it more difficult.
新技术的目的是为了使生活更容易，而不是使生活更艰难。
2. 动词不定式的省略问题：
上文中出现了某一动词或动词短语，下文中再遇到此动词的不定式结构时，往往要省略动词不定式，但通常省略动词原形或短语而保留不定式符号to，一般有下面几种情况：
①含有助动词或情态动词如be going to, used to, have to, ought to, be able to, be about to等+动词原形结构时：
---Do you think I ought to go to see my doctor? 你认为我应该去看医生吗？
---Yes, I think you ought to. 是的，我想你应该去。
She must go but you don’t have to. 她必须走，但你没有必要。
②含有动词want, decide, like, love, hope, wish, mean, refuse, try等+不定式作宾语结构时：
---Did you go to see the Great Wall? 你去看长城了吗？
---I wanted to, but I was too busy. 我本来想去的，但我太忙了。
You may go with them if you hope to. 如果你希望的话，你可以和他们一起去。
③含有动词如ask, tell, order, advise, persuade, warn, wish, permit, allow, forbid等+不定式做宾语补语或主语补语时：
Don’t do anything unless your father tells you to. 除非你父亲叫你去做，不然不要做任何事情。
---May I use your car? 我可以用你的汽车吗？
---No, I forbid you to. 不，我禁止你使用。
④对话的答语中含有形容词如happy, glad, eager, anxious, willing, ready, pleased, afraid等+不定式作表语结构时：
---Will you lend me a hand? 你能帮我一个忙吗？
---I’m willing to, but I can’t now. 我很愿意，但我现在不行。
---Would you please come to my birthday party tomorrow? 明天下午来参加我的生日聚会好吗？
---I’ll be glad to. 我很乐意。
3. 不定式主动语态和被动语态的区别：
动词不定式在句中究竟用主动还是被动，有时比较复杂。主要有下面几种情况：
①不定式所修饰的名词或代词和不定式逻辑上构成主谓关系时，不定式往往用主动形式。如：
Have you got a key to unlock the door? 你有开门的钥匙吗？
②不定式做后置定语，和被修饰名词或代词构成逻辑上的动宾关系，又和该句主语构成逻辑上的主谓关系时，不定式常用主动形式，不定式为不及物动词时，其后应加相应的介词。如：
Do you have anything to say on this question? 针对这个问题你还有什么要说的吗？
He is a pleasant person to work with. 他是一个合作愉快的人。
③不定式作表语形容词的状语，和句子主语构成逻辑上的动宾关系时，不定式多用主动形式，不定式为不及物动词时要加相应的介词。如：
The fish is delicious to eat. 这鱼很好吃。
The chair is comfortable to sit on. 这把椅子坐起来很舒服。
④在There be结构中，当说话人考虑的是必须有人去完成某件事时，不定式用主动形式；如果说话人强调的是事情本身必须完成，则用被动形式。如：
There is nothing to worry about. 没什么可担心的。
There is a lot of work to do. 有许多事情要做。（表示某人必须做这工作）
注意下面两个句子的含义：
There is a lot of work to be done. （强调有许多事情必须做。）
There is nothing to be done. （强调出了某事，现在没办法解决。）
4. for somebody to do和of somebody to do的用法区别：
句型“It is +形容词+for somebody+不定式”中的形容词通常强调不定式的行为属性，如：important, possible, impossible, necessary, difficult, hard, reasonable等。
It’s difficult for us to finish the work within two hours. 我们要在两小时之内完成工作是很难的。
It’s reasonable for them to run away so quickly. 他们这么快就逃跑了是很有道理的。
“It is +形容词+of somebody+不定式”中的形容词表示人物性格和特征。如：kind, silly, good, unwise, clever, wrong, right, foolish, stupid, careless, rude, impolite, bold, thoughtful, honest, bad, sensible, naughty等。
It’s kind of you to think so much of us. 难为你这么为我们着想。
It’s silly of the boy to keep pouring water into the basket 这个男孩真傻，一直往篮子里倒水。
5. 高中阶段能接不定式的常见动词：
能接不定式作宾语的常见动词有：want（想要）, like（喜欢）, wish（希望）, hate（憎恨，讨厌）, prefer（宁愿）, hope（希望）, fail（失败）, plan（计划）, refuse（拒绝）, ask（要求）,continue（继续），manage（设法）, try（尽力）, offer（提供）, start（开始）, begin（开始）, forget（忘记）, remember（记得）, promise（答应）, mean（打算）, pretend（假装）, intend（想，打算）, attempt（尝试，企图）, decide（决定）, learn（学会）, desire（渴望，请求）, agree（同意）, care（关心，喜欢）, choose（选择）, determine（下决心）, expect（期望）, afford（负担得起，买得起）等。
能接不定式做补语的常见的动词有：感官动词see, watch, notice, hear, feel等；使役动词make, let, have 等；还有一般的动词如advise（建议）, allow（允许）, ask, beg（乞求）, command（命令，指挥）, tell（告诉）, invite（邀请）, force（强迫）, oblige（强迫）, get（致使）, help（帮助）, wish, want, like, hate, prefer, intend, expect, encourage（鼓励）, persuade（说服）, permit（允许，许可）, remind（使想起，提醒）, request（请求，要求）, order（命令）, warn（警告，提醒）, cause（引起）等。
6. 高中阶段常见的不定式短语： 高中阶段常见的一些不定式短语可以作谓语，如：be able to do（能，会）, be about to do（即将做……）, used to do（过去常常……）, be glad to do（乐意做……）, would like to do（想要做……）,be likely to do（很可能做……）, go all out to do something全力以赴,be supposed to do应该等。
高中阶段还有一些不定式短语可以作状语修饰整个句子，也可以称它们为插入语。如：to tell you the truth（说老实话），to be frank（坦率地说）, to begin with（首先）, to be brief（简言之）, to make a long story short（长话短说）, to be exact（精确地说）, to say nothing of（姑且不说），to conclude（总而言之）, to be sure（诚然、固然）， to do him justice（说句对他公道的话）,so to speak（可以这么说、打个譬喻说）等。
To tell you the truth, I hate him. 说老实话，我恨他。
To be frank, I don’t agree with what you said. 坦率地说，我不同意你说的话。
篇16：Unit 2 News media完整的教案Reading Ⅰ(period 2)(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
一. Teaching aims
1. Familiar with news reporters’ job
2. Help students understand that media have other social functions besides reporting events.
3. Deal with those important words, expressions and difficult sentences.
二. Key points and difficult points
Key points: the function of media; language points
Difficult point: two difficult sentences
三.Teaching aids
slides
四.Teaching procedures
Step 1. Lead-in 5 minutes
T: (choose one student) do you often read newspapers?
S1: yes.
T: which parts of a newspaper do you like best?
S1: entertainment/sports/news….
T: Thank you! Sit down, please. (Ask the whole class) What were we doing just now?
Ss: having an interview.
T: Right! I interviewed S1, and then we call S1…?
Ss: interviewee
T: what about me?
Ss: interviewer
T: Very good! As a reporter, I have got the information I want from S1, and then what will I do?
Ss: Write articles/ talk it with your editor…
T: Now, open your book and turn to page 11. Look at the picture on the right. Guess who are
they and what are they doing?
Ss: They are editors, reporters…they are surfing the net, discussing something…
T: Very good! We know this text is about reporters and newspapers. Then what does the title
“ Behind the headlines” mean?
Ss:标题背后的故事。
Step 2 Fast –reading 6-7 minutes
T: Right! Now, let’s learn this text. First, read the first paragraph, those three questions and the last paragraph quickly. And find out the answers to two questions.
( Slide ) questions: 1.Who do they interview?
2. Do media only tell people what happens?
(4-5 minutes later)
T: stop here please! Who’d like to answer the first question?
S2: Cheng Ying and Zhu Lin
T: Very good! And what about the second question?
S3: no!
Step 3 Careful- reading 31-33 minutes
Part 1. 17-18 minutes
T: Then what other things can media do? Keep this question in your mind, we’ll deal with it later. Let’s learn the first paragraph now. Listen to the tape of the first paragraph, pay attention to the reader’s pronunciation.
(This paragraph is the most difficult one in the text. So I’ll explain it sentence by sentence)
Language points:
1.more than 不仅仅
e.g.: I can do more than this.
2. make sure 确信
e.g. Please make sure all the lights are off before you leave.
3.relate to sb./ sth. 理解或同情某人（某事）
e.g.: Marry find it difficult to relate to children.
Students find it difficult to relate to the life of a scientist.
relate (…) to … 相关的，有关联的
e.g.: This relates to something I mentioned earlier.
If you relate the results to the cause, you will find things are not that simple.
4. switch roles for once 这一次转换角色
e.g.: For once, he broke the rule.
(Slide) help understand the last sentence of this paragraph:
The two reporters agreed to switch roles for once / and be the interviewees rather than the
interviewers / in order to let us know about their work and how the news we read is made.
Part 3. 13-14 minutes
T：Are there any other questions about the first paragraph? Good! Well, let’s go back to that question “what other things can media do?”(slide) Do you want to know?
Ss: yes!
T: Ok, let’s find it. Turn to next page, the last paragraph. (choose a student to read it)
Now, discuss the question with your partner and make a list of it.
(slide)Suggested answers:
1. help solve problems by draw people’s attention to it.
2. help people become interested in important questions.
3. help people understand each other and the world better.
T: All of you have done a good job! Well, let’s solve some difficult sentences. Who’d like to tell us the meaning of the first sentence?
S4: 媒体总是能帮助解决问题，会把人们的注意力吸引到需要帮助的问题上。
T: Very good! For example, we can know many things happened in other parts of China and in other countries from newspapers like “ The People’s Daily”.
Now let’s learn the last sentence, it’s difficult. “leading to a future world” 是现在分词做状语，表示目的。”Where”引导的是定语从句，用来修饰 a future world.
(slide)The result is a better understanding of the world on all sides, leading to a future world /where people from all countries are respected /and different views and opinions are tolerated.
Language points
1.draw attention to 对。。。表示注意
e.g. Reporters write articles to draw people’s attention to pollution.
2.on all sides 方方面面，各方面
四．Homework
T: Today, we have learned the functions of media. We know that media are very important in our life. If you are interested, you can think about what our life will be like without media.
Please preview the rest parts of the text.
五. Blackboard work
1.more than 不仅仅 (new words)
e.g.: I can do more than this. interview
2. make sure 确信 interviewer
e.g. Please make sure all the lights are off before you leave. interviewee
3.relate to sb./ sth. 理解或同情某人（某事）
e.g.: Marry find it difficult to relate to children.
Students find it difficult to relate to the life of a scientist.
relate (…) to … 相关的，有关联的
e.g.: This relates to something I mentioned earlier.
If you relate the results to the cause, you will find things are not that simple.
4. switch roles for once 这一次转换角色
e.g.: For once, he broke the rule.
5．draw attention to 对。。。表示注意
e.g. Reporters write articles to draw people’s attention to pollution.
6.on all sides 方方面面，各方面
篇17：书面表达训练：通知(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
--湖南省涟源市第二中学 曾 省 初
曾 省 初，男，毕业于湖南教育学院英语系, 任教于湖南省涟源市第二中学。自八七年以来一直从事高中毕业班和复习班的教学工作, ,英语教研组组长, 中学英语高级教师。《高考金刊》 、《学英语》、《中学英语之友》、《中学生英语报》、《中学英语指导》等多家杂志社特约编辑,曾在《中学英语之友》、《英语辅导报》、《数字世界报》、《 新高考》等报刊杂志上发表论文数十篇,主编了《最新英语听力教程》、《高考英语点晴》、《高中英语语法详解》、《高考英语热点与难点解析》、等15本。多年参加湖南省英语高考阅卷和高考英语口语主考工作,并被评为优秀阅卷教师。多次代表涟源市在娄底市高考英语学科研讨会上做示范讲座。坚持高三,复习班一线工作, 潜心于网络（个人网址www.k12.com.cn/teacher/union/personal/per_zj.php3?uid=Robert7616）与多媒体教学研究，能与外教自由交谈，教学效果显著。
[名师导航]
通知是一种常用应用文体，用来把有关事情告知特定的读者或听众。通知的正文就是通告的内容，这是主体部分，包括通告的对象、事由、时间、地点等。它分为书面通知和口头通知两种，这两种通知在格式上有较大差别。
书面通知的常见形式有一般通知、布告、海报等。它们一般张贴在布告栏或黑板上。通知的正文上方有Notice (或全部大写NOTICE)或Announcement (或全部大写ANNOUNCEMENT)为题目。以海报形式出现时，通知常以海报内容为题，如Lecture, Football Match等。当然题目中还可以出现发通知的单位，如Student Union Notice, English Department Announcement，通知题目要求居中打印、书写，有时为了强调，甚至可以以粗体形式出现。书面通知一定要有发通知时间及落款。出通知的时间一般写在通知正文的下方左角，落款于右下角，当然时间及落款也可都写右下角。书面通知的正文一般用第三人称来写。时间、地点、参加者、内容、注意事项是通知的要点，应直截了当地一一予以说明。我们既可以用包容量较大的长句，也可以用简明的短语，前者正式，后者易懂易记。在正文中切忌添枝加叶的评论。一般情况下通知以段落形式出现，海报则按信息分行居中书写或打印。
口头通知一般不用写题目，也不必有出通知的时间。发布口头通知首先说明被通知的对象，在正文前面有呼语且顶左格写，如：Ladies and gentlemen, Boys and girls 等等。为了引正听者的注意，需另起行不顶格写一些引人注意的话，如：Be quiet, please! May I have your attention? Attention, please! 等。口头通知要口头发布，因而可以用较随意口语体，如：I’ll, I’ve等。口头通知在结束时要有结束语，这是因为口头通知需要用一些语言表明通知的起止，如用That’s all. 表示通知到此为止宣布完毕。另外结尾处还需要一些如Thank you. 一样的客套语。口头通知的一些常用的开头语和结束语。
开头语
Be quiet, please! Attention, please!
Listen, please.
A Please be quiet, everyone.
Please stop talking over there!
May I have your attention, please!
Please be quiet, everyone, There is something I have to tell you.
B Be quiet, please. There is something you need to know.
Listen, please. There is going to be…
结束语
Any questions?
Does everyone understand?
That’s all. Thank you.
不论是口头通知还是书面通知都是宣布即将发生的事情及其具体内容，因而多用将来时态，其中往往有一些注意事项，一般用祈使句来强调。通知的语言要简洁明了，条理清晰，要求精确，特别是时间概念很重要，必须写得十分明确，不容丝毫含糊。
[高考真题演练]
]
1．[ 春招]
为了丰富外国留学生的生活，你校学生会将举办一次音乐周活动，请你以组织者的身份写一个书面通知。有关内容如下：
时间：5月第1周
活动：
1．演唱歌曲：流行歌曲
2．器乐演奏：古典和民间音乐
3．音乐比赛：听歌曲片断,然后猜出处
地点：届时通知
参加者请于4月20日前报名。
注意：1．书面通知应写成一篇连贯的短文;
2．可以适当增减细节;
3．词数100左右;
4．通知格式已为你写好;
5．生词：古典 - classical 民间 - folk 乐器 - musical instruments
比赛 - contest
Possible version
April 10, 2000
Dear students,
The Students Union has decided to organise a music week. It will be held in the first week of May. The activities include singing pop songs and playing classical and folk music. Bring your own musical instruments, please. A music contest will be included, too. The students taking part in the contest will listen to part of a song or a piece of music, and then guess where it comes from. If you'd like to take part in the music week, please come and sign up for it before April 20th. The place for the activities will be announced later.
Come to the great fun!
Students Union
2．[书面表达1994]
提 示：你校学生会将为来访的美国朋友举办一个晚会，要在学校广播中宣布此事，并欢迎大家参加。为使美国朋友听懂，请你用英语写一篇广播通知。要点如下：
宗 旨：欢迎来访的美国朋友
组织者：学生会
时 间：8月15，星期六，晚7：30
地 点：主楼屋顶花园
活动内容：音乐、跳舞、唱歌、游戏、交换小礼品(请包装好、签名并在包装外面写上几个祝 愿词)
注意：
(1) 广播稿约100词；
(2) 应包括以上要点，但不要逐字翻译，要组织成一篇通顺连贯的短文；
(3) 开头语已为你写好。
生词：
交换礼品to exchange gifts 学生会 the Student Union
May I have your attention please?
I have an announcement to make--
内容要点：
(1) 为欢迎来访的美国朋友举办晚会；
(2) 由学生会组织；
(3)于8月15日，星期六，晚7：30举行；
(4) 在主楼屋顶花园；
(5) 将跳舞、唱歌、听音乐、做游戏；
(6) 交换小礼品，礼品需包装、签名并写上祝愿词；
(7) 欢迎大家都参加。
One possible version:
May I have your attention, please? I have an announcement to make. The Student Union is going to hold a party on Saturday evening, August 15, to welcome our friends from the United States. The party will be held in the roof garden of the Main Building. It will begin at 7:30 p. m. There will be music, dancing, singing, games and exchange of gifts. Will everybody please bring along a small gift for this purpose? Remember to wrap it up, sign your name and write a few words of good wishes.
Don’t forget: 7:30, Saturday evening, roof garden, Main Building. There’s sure to be a lot of fun. Everybody is welcome.
[创新训练]
1．会议通知
1．某中学将有一位美国教授布菜克博士来访，该教授将给师生们作一次报告，介绍美国的教育情况。学校要求同学们在星期三下午2：30准时到105大教室参加报告会，并带上笔记本，以便会后讨论。请你根据上面要点，用英语写一通知。(字数：80左右)
参考词语
美国教授American professor
有关教育的报告a report on education
作笔记to take notes
讨论to have a discussion
Notice
An American professor, Dr Black will visit our school this Wednesday afternoon. He will give us a report on the education in America. Everyone is supposed to be in Room 105, the big classroom exactly at 2:30 p.m. Wednesday. Please bring your notebooks with you and take notes while listening to the lecture, so that we can have a discussion about it after it is over.
2．郊游通知
[题 材]
假如你是高三(2)班班长，你班要在5月4日即下星期六去庐山郊游。请你拟一份通知，准备向同学们宣读。内容包括：
1、郊游日期：5月4日，下星期六；
2、主要内容：攀登比赛、摄影等；
3、早餐后8点坐校车出发，午餐自带，下午3点回校；
4、欢迎全体同学参加。凡参加者先登记并交给班长5元钱。
注意：通知词数约70-120。要求意思连贯。
[范 文]
An Outing to Lushan
An Announcement
Class, please be quiet. I am glad to tell you that we have decided to have an outing to Lushan next Saturday, May 4th. The expense is about five yuan. Those who wish to go should put down the names on this piece of paper and give the money to me. We will go by school bus which is to start after breakfast at 8:00 a. m. and come back to school at 3:00 p.m.. Remember to bring your lunch with you.
We’ll have a contest of climbing the hill and take photos there. All the students are welcome. That’s all. Thank you.
Monitor
Class 2 of Senior Grade 3
3．晚会通知
假如你是班长，通知你班同学本周星期六晚上7：30-在本班教室举行一次英语晚会，节目有唱歌、朗诵、讲故事、话剧等，要求本班同学都参加，欢迎外班同学光临，请同学们作好准备。(字数：80左右)
参考词语
朗诵recitation 节目programme (或program)欢迎to be welcomed表演 to perform
Fellow students, attention, please.I have some good news to tell you. We’re going to have an English evening, in our classroom at 7:30 on Saturday evening. The programme inclides songs, recitations, storytelling and short plays. Everyone in our clas must take part in it and students form other classed are also welcome. Everone who takes part in the party should perform once.
That’s all. Thank you.
4．游玩的通知
请你以学生会名义，根据下面表格的内容写一则去人民公园游玩的通知。
参加者 高二年级全体学生
活动内容 1．12月28日，周六去人民公园，上午浏览东湖；
2．中午在湖边野餐；
3．下午参观植物园（the botanical garden ）.
集合时间和地点 早上6：50在校门集合；7：00开车。
注意事项 1．穿运动鞋；
2．自带午餐和饮料；
3．如有可能，每班带1--2部照相机；
4．准时集合。
注意：1.词数100左右。2.通知的格式已写出。
Notice
Attention, please.
Notice
Attention, please .
The students of Senior Grade Two will go to the people’s Park for an outing on December 28,Saturday. In the morning ,we will visit the East Lake . We’ll have a picnic by the lake at noon .After that , we’ll visit the botanical garden .Please wear your sports shoes ,and take your lunch and drinks with you ,If possible ,each class can take a couple of cameras along so that you can take some pictures of the beautiful sights . We are to meet at the school gate at 6:50 a.m. The buses will start at 7:00 a.m. Don’t be late .
The Student’s Union
[创新训练]
5．假如有一批澳大利亚中学生在京旅游，住在北京饭店，请用英语为他们拟一个参观颐和园的口头通知, 内容要点如下:
参观时间: 五月二日 星期三
颐和园简介: 它是中国最大的保存最完好的皇家园林, 风景优美, 甚是迷人, 有山有水, 有皇家建筑和画廊。
活动安排: 上午自由参观, 中午在快餐馆吃午饭, 下午5:30返回宾馆。
集合时间: 星期三早上6:10, 汽车6:30开, 行驶45分钟。
集合地点: 宾馆大门口。
要求: 不要逐条翻译, 词数100词左右
One possible version:
May I have your attention?
We will visit the summer Palace on Wednesday, May 2nd. The Summer Palace is the largest well-kept royal park in China. In the park there is water and man-piled hills. There are some royal buildings and a gallery, too. I am sure you will be struck by its beautiful scenery. In the morning we will be free to visit the different places of the Palace and then we will have lunch in the fast-food restaurant. We will get back to the hotel at half five. Please gather at the hotel gate at 6:10 on Wednesday morning. The buses will start at 6:30. It will take us about 45 minutes to get there . Please be on time. Thank you.
6． 假如你是学校业余气象员，晚上6:00你根据从电台天气预报节目中得知的当地当天晚上和第二天上午的天气情况，用英语向全体师生作天气预报，并提出忠告。要点如下：
1．午夜至凌晨两点有强北风。
2．气温下降5-8°C。
3．明天上午有阵雨。
4．要求同学们今晚离开教室时关好门窗。
5．明天早晨起床时多穿些衣服，以防感冒。
(词数100左右)
Possible version：
Teachers and schoolmates,
It is six o'clock in the afternoon. I'm now giving the weather forecast as usual. From midnight to 2:00 tomorrow morning there will be strong north wind blowing across our town and the temperature will drop by 5--8℃. Also there will be showers tomorrow morning. Therefore, be sure to close all the doors and windows when you leave the classroom tonight and when you get up tomorrow morning, please put on more clothes in order to protect yourself from cold.
That' s all. Thank you.
7．通知全班同学，英语期中考试增加口试，内容包括：
1．朗读课本中的某些课文，部分自选，部分由教师在口试时指定；
2．围绕教师在口试时指定的课文，向教师提问；
3．口头英汉互译教师在口试时指定的课文；
4．就口试时教师指定的句型做替换练习，口试占期中考试15％，请大家做好准备。
参考词组：替换练习substitution drills 口头翻译oral translation
Possible version：
Boys and girls,
Attention, please. In order to improve your ability of speaking, an oral test will be added to the mid-term English examination. The test will include:
1. Reading aloud some of the texts, partly assigned by the teacher during the test and partly self-chosen.
2. Ask the questions about the texts assigned by the teacher during the test.
3. Oral translation of some of the texts from English into Chinese and from Chinese into English assigned by the teacher during the test.
4. Substitution drills of sentence patterns assigned by the teacher during the test. The oral test will be 15% of the marks of the mid-term examination. Please get ready for it.
8．某机场因浓雾，飞机不能起降。请你用英语拟一广播通知。内容包括：
1．原因：浓雾。
2．措施：各航班推迟起飞，滞留乘客免费午餐。
用餐时间：11：00-13：00；地点：二楼餐厅。
雾散即宣布起飞，1小时内无飞机降落机场。 ，
3．要求：遵守秩序，保管好自己的行李，不要离开候机厅。
注意：1．通知应包括上述全部内容；2．词数100左右。
Possible version：
Ladies and gentlemen,
May I have your attention, please?
All flights this morning are put off because of the thick fog. As there is no wind, the weatherman is unable to tell when the fog will clear up. We cannot but wait. Please keep order and take good care of your baggage, and don't leave the waiting room.
For passengers retained at the airport, lunch is free. It will be served in the dining hall on the second floor from eleven o'clock to thirteen o'clock.
By the way, no planes will arrive in an hour.
As soon as the weather turns favourable, we shall announce flights.
Thank you.
9． 你是班长，根据下面提示，拟一个英语口头通知。
1)加拿大学生来校参观；
2)共24人，从5月25日上午8:00到下午5:00；
3)5月25日上午7:50在会议室集合，欢迎来自加拿大的学生并开联欢会，现在要准备好节目；4)带客人参观学校，12:00在校食堂就餐；5)下午听加拿大学生介绍他们学校的情况 6)注意待人要热情，礼貌。
Possible version:
Attention, please, everyone! 24 students from Canada will come to visit our school on May 25. They will arrive at 8:00 in the morning. We are to gather at 7:50 in the meeting room to give them a warm welcome, and then we'll hold a get-together. Please get our programmes. After that, we'll show them around our school. And we'll have lunch together in the school dining hall. In the afternoon some Canadian students will talk to us about their school. They will leave at 5:00 p.m.. We should be polite and friendly to our guests.
That's all. Thank you.
篇18：Teaching plan for this unit 15(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
通过本单元教学，学生应能熟练地运用表示“邀请”的常用语；复习谓语，情态动词和实义动词的时态；了解应如何地阅读，以及怎样做一个好的听者。
Importance and difficulty:
1. Words and expressions:
dip into, look our for, refer to , get at , respect, enlarge, digest, come across
2. Important sentences:
1) Imagine that you have found a good story, and , what is even more important, the time to enjoy it.
2) Do not start a book unless you can see from the first few pages that it is one you can easily read and understand.
3) The more we practise, the better we get at listening to speech in a foreign language.
4) Then it will be someone else’s turn.
3. Grammar:
1) If he comes, I will let him know.
2) You’re always making the same mistake.
3) I didn’t expect to meet you here.
4) If you have finished reading the magazine before I leave, please give it back to me.
5) He suddenly remembered that he hadn’t locked the door.
6) Given more time, we could finish it.
7) The ground is wet. It must have rained last night.
4. Useful expressions:
1) Would you like to …?
2) I’d like to invite you to…?
3) Have dinner with us , will you?
4) Yes, I’d love to ….
5) I’d love to , but……
Lesson 57 On reading
Aims and demands:
1. Develop the Ss’ four skills , listening , speaking, reading and writing ability.
2. Let them know how to read different kinds of books.
Importance and difficulty:
Let them have a good understanding of the text and do the deeper understanding comprehension .
Teaching methods:
Reading and comprehension
Teaching aids:
Tape recorder and some slides
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. New words
Step 2. Warming up
Discussion: 1. What do you enjoy reading most?
2. What do you enjoy reading least?
3. What good books have you read recently?
4. What good stories have you read?
Step 3. Fast reading
Read it quickly and find the answers to the two questions at the top of the text.
1. What are the three methods of reading which are described?
Tasting, swallowing, and chewing-and-digesting.
2. What is the most important piece of advice in the text?
Enjoy your reading.
Step 4. Careful reading
Read it carefully and have a good understanding of the text.
Complete the following form on reading .
Situation What you should do
If you pick up a travel book just to read it before going to sleep It is enough for you to dip into it and read bits here and there. This is “tasting”.
If you have found a good story and the time to enjoy it You might go over it quickly from the beginning to the end, for it is so good that you cannot put it down. This is “swallowing”.
If the book you have is on a subject that you are interested in You will want to “chew and digest it”.
Read it slowly and carefully.
If it is not a story You may get an idea of the organization of the book. Read the back cover and the introduction. Look at the pictures and the short texts below them. Turn to the front of the book and look at the contents.
When you read a book for the first time You read a chapter quickly to get a general idea. Then, if you wish, you can read it once again more slowly.
When you want to use a dictionary You should know that you use it when necessary. Do not stop every time you come to a work or phrase you do not know. Quite often you will find the unknown word appears again, perhaps several times, and by the end of the chapter you will have guessed its meaning.
If you do not know what to read You may start by making a list of all the types of books that you enjoy reading in Chinese.
Step 5. Comprehension
Number these subjects in the order in which they occur in the text.
Page 14.
Step 6. Note making.
Write down in your own words the advice the writer gives in the text. Page 14
Step 7. Workbook
Step 8. Comprehension exercises---- paper
Step 9. Listening and find out the importance and difficulty
Homework. ABC
Lesson 58 The art of being a good listener
Aims and demands:
1. Develop the Ss’ four skills: listening , speaking , reading and writing ability.
2. Teach them how to be a good listener.
Importance and difficulty:
Have a deeper understanding of the text and do the comprehension exercises.
Teaching methods: reading and speaking
Teaching aids: tape recorder and some slides .
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming up
Ask Ss what they have learnt about reading in the previous lesson.
Ask them to talk about any techniques of their own which they find useful.
Step 2. Presentation and reading for general understanding
Read the title of the text aloud and get the Ss to talk about the Chinese character ting in the picture.
聽 Read the two comprehension questions aloud, then allow the Ss enough time to read the text and compare their answer in pairs.
1) Mainly about listening to people.
2) Both advice and information.
Step 3. Reading carefully
When you listen to someone,
what should you do?
Look at the speaker as Listen with complete
a sign of respect . attention, and with
complete respect for
the other person.
You should look at the speaker as a sign of respect while you are listening.
You should listen with complete attention , and with complete respect for the speaker.
More tips on First …
becoming a Second …
good listener Third …
1)Take turns to listen.
Don’t all try to speak at the same time when you are in a group.
Listen without interrupting, and stop other people from interrupting.
2)Do not give advice when your friends have problems. Ask some questions instead, such as “What do you want? How do you feel about it? What are you afraid might happen?”
3) Listen and be quiet while others are talking.
Step 4. Note making and discussion
Step 5. Workbook
Step 6. Comprehension exercise ----paper exercises
Homework
Lesson 57~58
Aims and demands:
Grasp the language points.
Importance and difficulty:
Let them know the usage of the language points.
Teaching aids:
Some slides and a small blackboard.
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Translation
1. 有些书是应当尝尝滋味的，有些书是应当吞下去的，有少数书是应当咀嚼和消化的。
Some books are to be tasted , others to be swallowed, and some few to be chewed and digested
be +不定式的被动式结构表示“某事应当/ 必需如何做”的意思，常用在通知和说明书里。
The books you borrowed are to be returned before July 5. （应当于7月5日前归还）
This medicine is to be taken three times a day after meals. (此药一日三次，饭后服用)
子女“下达命令”。be +不定式结构通常用来表示“按计划或安排将要做的事情”，或表示上级对下级，父母对子女“下达命令”。
这趟火车于上午10：30到达北京。（安排好的）
The train is to arrive in Beijing at 10:30.
你得完成作业后才能看电视。
You are to finish your homework before you watch TV.
be to do 事先安排好的
be going to do 个人打算，看法
be about to do 最近的将来马上就要发生
I’m to meet him at the station. （双方约好）
I’m going to meet him at the station.（个人打算）
2．这种书只要浏览一下，这儿读一下，那儿读一下，也就够了。
It is enough to dip into this kind of book (it) and read bits here and there.
dip into 浏览，翻阅
I haven’t read that book seriously , I’ve only dipped into it. （翻阅）
Each student dipped a finger into the mixture and sucked it. （伸入）
3．不要一遇到不认识的单词或短语就停下来。
Don’t stop every time you come to a word or phrase you don’t know.
every time 一。。。就。。。（从属连词，引出表示时间的状语从句）
每当他碰到一个好的句子，他就把它抄下来。
He copies it down every time he comes to a good sentence.
Make a sentence……
4．你有什么特别嗜好或特别喜爱的体育运动吗？如果有， 你就该找一些有关的书籍，文章或杂志来读。
Are there any hobbies or sports you particularly like ? If so, look out for books , articles or magazines about them.
If so… （如果这样） 是承接上文而来的一个省略句
look out for 寻找（留心找）
look for 寻找（动作）
look out 当心，留心
He has been looking out for a new job for half a year.
He has been looking for a job for half a year.
5．“听的能力”这个词组有两个意思。一个是指我们学习外语时所作的那种听力练习。另一个意思是指善于倾听别人讲话的艺术。
There are two meanings of the phrase “listening skills”. One refers to the type of listening practice which we do when learning a foreign language .The other meaning is about / (refers to) the art of being a good listener to other people.
refer to …
when doing…
6．我们练习得越多，就越能更好地听懂用外语所说的话。be good at listening to speech
The more we practice, the better we get at listening to speech in a foreign language.
get better at doing = be better at doing … 更善于做…
be good at
7．因此，当你听某人说话时，你要一心一意地听，对别人完全尊敬。
So when you listen to someone , you should listen with complete attention, and with complete respect for the other person.
with complete attention （作方式状语，修饰listen）
with complete respect
show / have respect to (for ) sb. (对……尊敬)
8．我们常常需要的是一位能倾听我们“畅叙衷肠”的好朋友。
Often, all we need is a good friend who will listen to us while we “talk things through” .
talk… through 充分讨论/ 把话说完
We talked the plan through for nearly an hour.
我们对计划讨论了将近一个小时。
After three long meetings , the question seemed to be talked through.
经过三次长时间的会议后，这个问题似乎已经详细讨论过了。
Step 2. Exercises
Homework
篇19：Teaching plan for this unit 14(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
Aims and demands:
1. Develop the Ss’ reading and understanding ability.
2. Let the Ss know the history of the Negroes treated as slaves in America.
Importance and Difficulty:
Have a deeper understanding of the text.
Teaching aids: tape recorder and slides.
Teaching methods: reading
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming up
Listen to a story about the slaves .
SEFC 1A Lesson 13 “同步听力”
Listen to the story and answer the questions. Before you listen you’d better learn the following words.
Tennessee/ Gambia/ slave trader/ hero
1. Who wrote the book “Roots”?
2. Who is the hero of the book Roots? Kunta Kinte
3. What is Alex Healey’s book about?
( one black American family and it also tells the early history of the USA.)
4. What can you learn from the story? Is Alex Healey a black or a white?
Step 2. Fast reading
Read the text fast and find the answers to the two questions.
1. What happened to Kunta in this story?
He was caught in a forest in Africa and put in chains and sent by ship to America.
2. What do you think happened to many of the black people on the ship?
About a third of the black people on the ship died during the journey.
Step 3. Careful reading
Read the text carefully and do the note making .
1. When Kunta was in the forest______.
2. When he woke up _________.
3. When they came to the river ________.
4. Then Kunta was thrown _________ where he was held prisoner.
5. Kunta wondered why the white people ________, but could not stand up.
6. Another thing which shocked Kunta ________, also children’s voices.
7. Worse was to come. One day about 140 black people ________ , unable to stand up or move around.
8. The sea journey lasted __________ days and nights. When the ship finally _______ . About a third of the people _________ were missing.
Suggested answers:
1. … cutting down a tree in order to make a drum, he was caught and then hit on the head with a hard object.
2. … his hands and feet had already been tied together
3. … a white man was waiting in the boat for then
4. … into the bottom of the boat and covered with an old smelly cloth. The men took him in their boat to the castle on the coast….
5. … had done this to him. He was born a free man, but now in chains . Heavy iron chains around his feet and hands were fixed to a metal bar that ran round the hall about ten centimeters off the ground. He was just able to lie down on the ground…
6. … was that women were held in the castle too. He could hear their crying….
7. … were taken and put on a tall sailing ship waiting off the coast . Once on the boat, they were taken below and their chains were fixed to two bars that ran the length of the ship. Their feet were fixed to one bar and their hands to another bar. Thus they lay on hard wooden boards…
8. … over sixty… arrived in a port, the wooden cover was opened wide and Kunta could see in daylight for the first time across the part of the ship where he had been chained… who had been chained up below at the beginning of the journey…
Step 4. Comprehension
Put these events into the correct order.
Step 5. Discussion
Discuss these questions with your partner .
Step 6. Workbook
Step 7. Reading compression ----Paper exercises
Homework. 3+X reading exercises
Reading comprehension for 3B Unit 14 Lesson 53 BCABA BBCB
1. The text is about _____.
A. a white man’s experience in Africa
B. an African black man’s experience
C. a black man’s experience in USA
D. a black slave’s experience in Africa
2. “Treatment” in the last paragraph means ____.
A. some nice food B. a good beating
C. some medical care D. a good rest
3. According to the order of time, which paragraph should be put at the beginning of the passage?
A. 3 B. 2 C. 1 D. 6
4. The black men caught Kunta for _____.
A. the county B. money
C. their own freedom D. the white
5. Put the following places into the correct order according to the order of time.
a. the castle b. the boat
c. the forest d. the sailing ship
A. c,b,a,d B. a,b,c,d C. d,a,b,c D. c,d,a,b
6. How did Kunta know that they had rough weather during the sea journey?
A. He saw it. B. He felt it.
C. He heard it. D. He imagined it.
7. What happened to the missing people?
A. They were sold.
B. They died.
C. They were taken to hospital.
D. They were set free.
8. Kunta must be very ____ to be alive after a long sea journey.
A. clever B. quick C. strong D. rude
9. Although Kunta was not sure about many things, he was quite clear ____.
A. why the white treated them like that
B. he would live a very miserable life
C. what the white were going to do with them D. the white were going to eat those children
Lesson 54 Roots
Aims and demands:
1. Develop the Ss’ four skills ---- listening , speaking, reading and writing ability
2. Have a good understanding of the text .
Difficulty and Importance:
Have a deeper understanding of the text.
Teaching aids: tape recorder and slides
Teaching procedure:
Step 1. Warming up
Talk about the pictures using the cue words :
1. Kunta Kinte / born in Gambia / a free and strong man / fond of music;
2. one day / Kunta / cut a tree in a forest near the coast / make a drum / hit on the head;
3. Kunta Kinte / wake up / caught by some black men / reason with them / sent to a castle on the coast ;
4. a few days later / taken and put on a tall sailing ship / in chains / unable to / stand up / the sea journey / 60 days and nights;
5. the ship / arrive in a port in America / see in daylight / a third of the black people missing ;
6. at a market / Kunta and some other Africans / sold to farmers / work in the fields / badly treated / try to run away / cut off part of his foot.
Step 2. Fast reading
Read the text fast and find the answers to the questions:
1. Where did Haley’s ancestor come from?
Gambia
2. What were Haley’s “ roots”?
Information about his ancestors.
Step 3. Careful reading
Read the text carefully and do the compression exercises---- paper exercise
Step 4. Workbook
Step 5. Workbook Lesson 55, Page 79 , Exercise 1
Homework : Cloze test
Reading comprehension for 3B Unit 14 Lesson 54 (Roots) DDBCC ACC
1. The farmer prevented Haley’s ancestor from running away by _____.
A. putting him in chains B. giving him little to eat
C. watching him all the time
D. cutting off part of his foot
2. What helped him find the satisfactory answer to his roots?
A. Letters and diary copies. B. Money.
C. The words “river” and “guitar” in his own language.
D. Both B and C.
3. In most parts of Africa, family and hero stories are passed down ____.
A. in written form B. only in oral (口头的)form
C. both A and B D. neither A nor B
4. It seems that the truth of the history in most parts of Africa depends on ____.
A. how many people can remember
B. how many people are able to write
C. how well those particular people can remember
D. how long the history is
5. Haley was successful in finding his roots because he is ____.
A. lucky B. rich C. strong-minded D. clever
6. Haley found out that his ancestor came from ____.
A. the east part of Gambia on the west coast of Africa
B. the west part of Gambia on the east coast of Africa
C. the east part of Gambia on the east coast of Africa
D. the west part of Gambia on the west coast of Africa
7. “Kinta”, the family name, is shared by ___.
A. all the people in Gambia
B. all the people on the west coast of Africa
C. a group in the east of Gambia
D. a group in the west of Gambia
8. One of the similarities between Haley and Kunta is that ____.
A. they were both well educated
B. they were born in Africa
C. they were born free D. they were both slaves
Lesson 53~54 Language study
Aims and demands:
Let the Ss grasp the usage of following language points:
Words and expressions: in chains , reason with , become of , feel sick, once in a while, prove…with, the moment , go back, role
Important sentences:
Born a free man, he was now in Chairs.
What shocked him most was that the man who carried him were black.
Worse was to come.
All he knew was that his African ancestor taught his son and grandson the words in his own language for “river” and “guitar”!
Procedure:
Step 1. Revision
Fill in the blanks with a proper word:
1. Kunta Kinte, Who lived in the village of Juffure in Gambia, was captured/seized/caught in 1767. He was taken on the slave ship, Lord Lord Ligonier, sailing from Gambia on July 5th 1767 and arriving in Annapolis USA on September 29th. The cargo included 3,265 elephant tusks, beeswax, cotton, gold, and 140 slaves, 98 of whom arrived alive in Annapolis. The loss of a third of the slaves was about average for slaving voyages. On arrival in Annapolis, Kunta was sold to a farmer named John Waller, who gave Kunta the name of Toby. John Waller’s brother, Kr Willian Waller, was angry at the way Kunta had been treated during his escape and bought Kunta from his brother on September 5th, 1768.
2. Born a free man, he was now in chains.
Though he was born a free man, he was now in chains.
他生下来就眼瞎。 He was born blind/ deaf/ poor.
他天生就是一个诗人/歌手。He was born a poet/ a singer.
3. The light went out, because the oil was out. （直接的原因）
The oil must be out, for the light went out . （推断的理由）
He can’t be out, for the light is on. （推断的理由）
He is loved by all, because he is honest. （直接的原因）
He must be honest, for he is loved by all. （推断的理由）
For 是并列连词，连接两个并列分句，它所表示的原因是附加的推断的理由。
Because 是从属连词，连接表示原因的状语从句，他所表示的原因是直接的理由。
4．Kunta had been seized in the forest and then hit on the head with a hard object.
Hit sb on the head
约翰打了他的头。 John hit him on the head.
约翰打了他的右腿。 John hit him in the right leg.
5. What shocked him most was that the men who carried him were black.
最使我吃惊的是他被一个黑人抓走了。
What surprised me most was that he had been taken away by a black person.
6. He reasoned with me for an hour about my plan.
reason with 和。。。 说理
7. The men took him in their boat to the castle on the coast where he was now held / kept/taken prisoner.
be held / kept prisoner
他被囚禁在一个小岛上。
He was held / kept prison on a small island.
8. He wounded what was to become of them.
Become of sb. : happen to sb.
What has become of the book I put here yesterday.
他们想知道昆塔后来怎么样了。
They wondered what had became of Kunta later.
我不知道我失业以后会怎么样。
I don’t know what will become of me when I am out of work.
9. I am sorry to say that he is going from bad to worse.
Bad/ ill --- worse --- worst
我还有更坏的事要告诉你们。
I have worse to tell you.
10. Once in the examination hall, he forgot everything including some rules.
11. Once on the boat , they were taken below and their chains were fixed to two bars that ran the length of the ship .
Ran : extend, stretch, reach
12. He didn’t go to school because he became ill with fever .
Become ill: feel sick
13. Sometimes we go out for a walk after supper .
Once in a while: sometimes
Step 2: Exercises
Homework: English Weekly
Lesson 54
Fill in the blanks;
1. I am determined to give my youth to the motherland.
2. He took out a book and began to read on his arrival at the classroom.
3. The farmer cut off part of Kunta’s foot to make sure he could not run away again.
4. We have made up our minds to work hard .
5. Yesterday it was raining hard, we made our way home.
6. The government is trying to provide / supply the people in flood areas with food and clothing.
7. The moment I saw her I knew she was angry with me.
8. Please let me know immediately /if / when / as soon as/ the moment you get the result.
The moment , as soon as, immediately, as soon as 用来连接一个表示时间的状语从句。
他在街一露面，我就认出他来了。
I recognized him the moment he appeared in the street.
他一走进办公室，句告诉了我们这个坏消息。
The moment he got into the office, he told us the bad news.
他们一到达那里，就立即开始工作。
Immediately they got there , they started to work.
9. In Gambia, all the stories of families, heroes…are passed down from generation to generation.
10. My family goes back 300 years, while his family goes back to the 15th century.
我的家族延续了3，而他的家族可追溯到15世纪。
11. When my grandpa talks, he always likes to go back to his younger days.
Go back : 从过去某时开始延续到现在；追溯； 回顾
12. I wish to take / play the role of a soldier.
Homework: English Weekly
篇20：单词水平测试一(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
单词水平测试一
班级 ______________ 姓名 ______________
1. We made a careful ______________ (分析) of the problem.
2. What she has in mind is beyond our ______________ (想象).
3. Things fall to the ground because of the pull of ______________ (重力).
4. The pilot of the plane is ______________ (负责) for the passengers’ safety.
5. We must take a correct ______________ (态度) towards criticism for others.
6. Few bridges survived the earthquake, even those made of ______________ (混凝土).
7. There are many ______________ (古代) buildings in Rome.
8. Steel glass is a widely used ______________ (材料) in modern architecture.
9. A famous architect ______________ (设计) the National Stadium two years ago.
10. Adams’s ______________ (缺席) from the football match led to our failure.
11. Your uncle is very ______________ (慷慨) to you and he wants to buy a car for your birthday.
12. Don’t hang up your dress on the mail, or it will lose its ______________ (形状) .
13. He preferred the romantic ______________ (诗) by George G Byron.
14. The ______________ (模式) of family life has changed greatly compared with traditional life styles.
15. An elephant, with its huge and strong body, cannot match in ______________ (力量).
16. There’s no perfect sport. Most of them have both ______________ (长处) and disadvantages.
17. ______________ (一般) speaking, girls are better at mastering language skills.
18. He didn’t’ give his father the money; he gave it to his mother ______________ (代替).
19. The medicine will ______________ (治疗) you of your cough.
20. I only caught a ______________ (瞥见) of the thief, so I can’t really describe him.
单词水平测试二
班级 ______________ 姓名 ______________
1. If you fail your driving test the first time, don’t be ______________ (泄气).
2. He is good at his job, but he seems to ______________ (缺乏) confidence.
3. People began to prevent factories and cars from sending ______________ (有毒的) gases into air.
4. ______________ (相反) to what I had originally thought, the trip turned out to be fun.
5. When he saw an old man lying on the ground, he dialed 120 to call an ______________ (救护车) .
6. All of the ______________ (代表) from ABC Petrol Company will come to China to discuss the topic on “energy”.
7. Before the white settlers came, the natives lived in ______________ (和谐) with all the wild life in North America.
8. Her dream of being a film star was turned into ______________ (现实).
9. If you want to ______________ (保证) that you catch the plane, take a taxi.
10. The audience was thrown into a ______________ (恐慌) when the fire started.
11. Flowers soon f ________________ when they have been cut .
12. nobody i _______________ my ticket before I got on a train .
13. Have you __________ （登记） the birth of your baby ?
14. Her illness has ___________ （使困惑）all the doctors .
15. Her report of what happened was _______ （准确的）in every detail .
16. She ________ （像）her sister in appearance but not in character .
17.Their house _________ （不同）from mine in having no garage .
18. She spent the __________ （整个的） day in bed .
19. A steam engine t ___________ heat into power .
20. Prison is a place for punishing _____________ （罪犯） 。
Key
单词水平测试一
1. analysis 2. imagination 3. gravity 4. responsible 5. attitude 6. concrete 7. ancient 8. material 9. design 10. absence 11. generous 12. shape 13. poems 14. pattern 15. strength 16. advantages 17. generally 18. instead 19. cure 20. glimpse
单词水平测试二
1. discouraged 2. lack 3. poisonous 4. Contrary 5. ambulance 6. representatives 7. harmony 8. reality 9. ensure 10. panic 11. fade
12. inspected 13. registered 14. puzzled 15. accurate 16. resembles 17. differs 18. whole/entire 19. transforms 20. criminals
★ 江苏省李堡中学高三年级主备课unit 2(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
★ 高三复习：模块1 unit 1 重点词汇复习(人教版高考复习英语必修一教案教学设计)
★ 高三英语教学计划
★ 高三全册单词拼写训练3-4(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)
★ 人教版高三1-4单元词汇详列(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)
★ 人教版高三英语复习教案（8）（SB I-Units 15-16）
★ 高三Unit 18教案及练习(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
【Unit2 news media(人教版高三英语教案教学设计)（精选20篇）】相关文章：
高三老师工作计划2023-02-25
人教版高三Unit 7 A Christmas Carol2022-09-01
高三学期教师教学个人工作总结2022-08-08
高中英语备课组教学计划2022-10-16
部编版是人教版吗2023-10-19
初中社会学期教研活动计划2023-01-13
教学研究室年度教研工作计划2023-11-30
英语教师个人学期教学工作总结2022-07-07
备课组工作总结2022-11-09
高一英语第一学期备课组工作计划精选2022-05-05